^. t^t^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) WS^' /. .v^ 1.0 I.I u liii us IM 2.2 1.8 IIIU L25 1.4 ||.6 « 6" ► V] <^ /i >• /a .v >' y ^ Photographic Sdences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14S80 (716) S72-4S03 CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductlons historiques Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. D Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommag^e Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture rest^.ur6e et/ou pelliculde Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque Coloured maps/ Cartes gdographiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur D D Bound with other material/ Reli6 avec d'autres documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure serr^e peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distortion le long de la marge int6rieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutdes lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, lorsque ' ela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont pas dtd filmdes. Additional comments:/ Commaiitaires suppl6mentaires; L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a 6td possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger una modification dans la mdthode normale de filmage sont indiqu4s ci-dessous. D D D n Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagdes Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restaur§es et/ou pellicul^es Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages ddcolor^es, tachetdes ou piqudes Pages detached/ Pages ddtach^es r~^ Showthrough/ D Transparence Quality of print varies/ Qualitd indgale de I'impression Includes supplementary material/ Comprend du material supplementaire Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont 6t6 filmdes d nouveau de fagon d obtenir la meilleure image possible. This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film6 ai taux de reduction indiqud ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X / 12X 16X 20X 26X 30X 24X 28X U 32X e dtf>ils IS du lodifier ir une ilmage The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of: Thomas Fiiher Rare Book Library, University of Toronto Library The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grSce A la g6nirosit6 de: Thomas Fisher Rare Book Library, University of Toronto Library Les images suivantes ont iti reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de la nettet^ de l'exemplaire filmd. et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. 3S Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated Impres- sion, and ending ott the last page with a printed or Illustrated impression. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol ^»- (meaning "CON- TINUED "), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprim6e sent film^s en commencant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'imprassion ou d'illustration, soit par le second plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont filmis en commengant par la premiere page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernidre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas. le symbole — »- signifie "A SUIVRE ", le symbole V signifie "FIN". Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre film^s d des taux de reduction diff^rents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre reproduit en un seul clich6, il est film6 i partir de Tangle supirieur gauche, de gauche d droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images ndcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la m^thode. errata to f pelure, an i n 32X f f '^ 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 ^^.^'■^ i- «- ^^'i I ^,Var> .i NEW rRAMMAR OF FRENCH GRAMMARS: COMPRISINQ THE SUBSTANCE OK ALL THE ]\IOST APPROVED FEENCH GRAMMARS EXTANT, BUT MORE ESPECIALLy OF THE STAND/RD WORK, "GRAMMAIRE DES GRAMMAIRES," SAXCTIONED nv THE FRENCH ACADEMY AND THE UNIVERSITY OF PARI& WITH NUMEROUS EXERCISES AND EXAMPLES ILLUSTRATIVE CF EVERY RULE BY DR V. DE EIVAS, M.A, r.E.I.S., J.'EMBI:R of the grammatical society of PARIS, ETC. • I /FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS IN THE BRITISH rROVINCES. "W. THIRTY-SECOND EDITION. TORONTO: JAMES CAMPBELL & SON. LONDON: LOCKWOOD & CO., ' 7 Stationers' Hall Court. 1869. ^" The Copyright for Great Britain and Ireland, France, and Germany, is secured. PREFACE. France, *' Oratntnar, aa the master-key of the human mind, it the first object in the cultivation of the underatanding."-. (77<« Linguist.) '*Prc8quepartout, deux hommes d'csprlt, donation diverse, qui 80 rencontrent, .s'accordent & parlcr fran^ais."-- (Fr^. du. Diet, de F Acad. /rani J We read, in a recent London publication, that there are about one hundred French Grammars for the use of English students. But, How many of these exhibit the orthography and rules of the language as they are fixed at the present day f It is the im- possibility of satisfactorily answering this question, that first suggested to me the idea of producing a work which, without being a mere compilation, should embody the substance of the latest decisions of the French Academy, with the most lucid and concise rules of the best modern French Grammarians. The single fact of the French Academy having lately published a new edition of their Dictionary, entirely revised and greatly enlarged, shows in an obvious point of view the call that is made for a new and improved French Grammar. My plan, in this publication, has been to give everything useful, and nothing superfluous.* I have studied to make the * Some Grammarians devote fifty pages to the declensions of nouns and pro- nouns, vvliile the French language has no declension. f Many encroach on tlie province of the Teacher, and encumber tliclr pages by giving a repetition of all the conjugations interrogatively and negatively, when one, as a model, is quite suffi- cient Others, give elaborate treatises on pronunciation, which can never be pro- perly learned IVom books, and are quite unnecessary, since a good Frencli Teacher can now be found in every town and village of tlie United Kingdom, from whom more knowledge of pronunciation will bo obtained in one lesson tlian in one year &om all the books ever published on tliis subject f La Langue A-an^alse n'a point, ct ne pent avoir, de dficllnalsons; on doit purgcr nos Grammaires de tout ce fatras, de toutes ces suporfluit^s qui sont plus proprps h uuirc Qu'i servir & I'lutelligenpe de la Laiiguc. Demandbe, Diet, de VElocviion franfaise. iv PREFACE. definitions at once clear and precise, that they may be readily understood and easily retained. When I judged it necessary, I liave also presented the rules in a new light, in order to adapt them to the capacity of youthful students. I have further endeavoured to arrange and distribute the matter, so as to embrace, within a narrow compass, much more information than is usually found in grammatical class-books. Indeed, there is not a useful Rule or Observation in the largest grammar in print that is not to be found in this. The Exercises illustrate everything that can be reduced to rules in the French language. This branch of the work has, for several years, engaged my special att.^ntion. The phraseo- logy is all founded on tke highest Frencl? classical autliorities ; and it has been my study throughout to introduce a moral pre- cept, an historical or a geographical fact, or a conversational phrase ; and thus to impart useful information along with gram- matical rules. The present Edition of this Grammar has been carefully re- vised, and a considerable number of words and remarks intro- duced that are not to be found in any other Grammar. I have also had the advantage of being able to avail myself of the criticisms that the learned Authors of the " Grmnmaire Naiionale" have made on the " Orammaire des Grammaires,'* and of the answers to those criticisms by M. Lemaire, Professor of Rhetoric at the College Louis-le-Grand, in Paris. " Tout homme qui veut bien ecrire," says Voltaiue, "doit corriger 8CS ouvrages toutc sa vie." Lo.VDOM, Jllll/ 18(i0. ■(^•••■•^■•^« *«Knw- [ s ] The followiny are a few of the numerous Literary Notices of this Work: — " At once the simplest and most complete Grammar of the French Language To tlic I'upili the effect Is almost as If he looked Into a map, so wcll-deflned is tlio course of study as explained by M. de 'Eiy&i." ^(Literary Uazette.) "This Grammar is ihe most systematic and distinct that we liave seen;— the ■vvorK is simple in its arrangement; clear and precise In Its definitions; and llie Exercises under each head, most appropriate and \\?,ci\xl."— (Chronicle.) "Its precision and conciseness arc admiralile. We cordially recommend it to I'cachers and Students. Its txcellcncc cannot fail to secure it an establlslicd reputation."— f5«e Mercury.) " This Is, bej'ond comparison, the best French Grammar we have ever met with. It contains everything necessary to a thorough knowledge of the lan- guage."— CZ^M&^m Monitor.) From Professor Marcel " J'ai parcouru votre dernier ouvrage ' Grammairc des Granmiaircs,' et, frapp6 de sa clartd ct de sa concision, je lui ai reconnu sous ce rapport une grande supdrioritb sur los autrcs gramniaircs, aussi me suis-jc enipressd de la recommauder ii tous ccux qui d(5sirent se p(Sndtrer des vrais prin- cipes de notrelangue." From Trofessor VoQUE.— •' J'ai lu avec un vif intt-rfit votre Grammalre francaise. Jc me suis convaincu de ton me'rite ct de son utilite. Je ne manquerai pas de la rccommander comme claire, exacte, et complete." From Professor Dcmas " Votre ouvrage bien que pcu volumineux est clair ct ccmplet. Je ne recommandcral certainement jamais d'autre grammalre." From Professor Dcval.— " J'approuve beaucoup votre ouvrage et je me pro- pose d'en faire usage : 11 est ddjh entre les mains de plusieurs de mes dlfevcs." From Professor Messieux— " Je me ddclde h donner la prdfigrence h votre gram- malre, ayant le m(Srite d'etre mieux arrang^e, plus claire, et plus correcte que celle dont je me sers." From Professor de Candole *' J'ai cherclid du mal dans votre ouvrage, mais Je n'en ai pastrouvd; je me suis fait critique, j'y ai perdu ma peine, car tout dtait juste, vral. Vous avez retranch^ bien des Inutilitds dansle commencement, et dans la syntaxe que j'ai parcounie avec soin vous avez franchcment ahorc'.^ les diffl" culttJs et fait admirablcment scntir les diSlicatcsses de notre langue." [ 6 J EXriANATION OF THE ABBREVIATIONS AND MARKS USED IN THE EXERCISES. • in. stands for masculine. ind-2 stonf/s /or imperfect. f. . . . feminine. ind-3 . . . preterite definite. sing, or s. . singular. ind-4 . . . preterite indefinite. pi. . . . plural. ind-5 . . . preterite anterior. hm. , . h mute. ind.6 . . . pluperfect. h asp. , . h aspirate. ind-7 . . . future absolute. art. . . . article. ind-8 . . . future anterior. pr. or pr ep. preposition. cond-1 . conditional present pron. . pronoun. cond-2 . conditional past. inf-1 . , . present of the infini- imp. . . , imperative. inf-2 . . . infinitive past. [tive. subj-1. . present of the sub- inf-3 . . . participle present. junctive. iuf 4 . . . participle past. , subj-2. . . imperfect. ind-l . . present of the indi- subj-3. . . preterite. cative. subj-4. . . pluperfect. Acad, for Acad^mie frangais i (French Academy), a learned Society, a literary Parliament, the highest au thority on the French language. The small figures 1, 2, 3, point on t the order of the French construc- tion whe sn it differs from the Englisl 1. The larj ;er figures 32, 47, etc. refer to the rule with that number, and which the student will do well to consult in cases of doubt. * The asterisk, or little star, denotes that the English word under which it is placed, is to be omitted in French. The line placed wider an English word indicates that it is the same in French. ( ) When several English words are included within a parenthesis, they must be translated by the French word or words placed under them. The English words printed in italics, are those to which the rules prefixed must be applied. The substantives are generally given in the singular, the adjectives in the masculine singular, and the verbs in the present of the infinitive the student being expected to put them in their proper gender, number tense, and person. N.B, — The student should make himself well acquainted with the use of the Apostrophe^ page 9 — with the Contraction oi the article, p. 14 — and, with the General rnh for the place of personal pronouns, p. 237. The knowledge of these points will greatly facilitate his studies. ARKS GKAMMAR OF FRENCH GRAMMARS. Blcn parlor onnonce la bonne dducation ( Bion (Jcrlro annoucc dc I'csprit INTRODUCTION. 1. Grammar is the art. which teaches to speak and write a language correctly. To speak and to write, we make use of words. "Words are composed of one or more syllables; and syllables are composed of one or more letters, 2. The French Alphabet contains 25 letters, viz. : Xamcs: B C D E F G II bny say day a off fjay ash P Q R S T U pay kuf err CBS tay uf -AppeUalionA B C D E F G H ^ usudle:— a be cd de 6 cffc g6 ache NOPQRSTU ennc o p6 ku erro esse 16 n A -ah N cnn I J K L M •Jco kah oil omm V X Y Z. yay ccks ccgrcc zaid. 1 J K L M i Ji ka eUe emme V X Y Z. •v6 ikfl Igrcc zfede.! —Aca(llmte/ran{aiie.j 3. Letters are divided into vowels and consonants. The vowels are A, E, I, 0, U, and Y, which sometimes has the sound of one t, and sometimes of two. All the other letters are consonants. The French make use of the W only in words bor- rowed from other languages ; as, Washington^ whist. *J lins here the sound of » in pleasure. f The sound of « muat be learned from the Teacher ; unless yott klloW hoW tO pronounce « In Uie Scotch Morde gude (good), or schule (school). 8 or ACCKNTS AND OTIIKII MARKS. OF ACCENTS AND OTIIEU MARKS. 4. The orthographical signs used in the French hm- guagc are, — the accents, the apostrophe^ tlie hyphen, tlio diceresis, the cedilla, tho parenthesis, and the difTercnt marks of punctuation. OF THE ACCENTS. 5. Accents arc small marks placed upon vowels, either to point out their true pronunciation, or to distinguish the meaning of one word from that of another Avhich is spelt alike, but has a different meaning. — \Z\. peche, peach; pe'che', sin ; pecher, to fish ; pe'cher, to sin. 6. There arc three accents in French, — the acute, the grave, and the circumjlex. 7. The acute accent (') is never used but over tho vowel e, as in ve'ritc, truth ; e'te', summer; cafe, coffee. 8. The grave accent (' ) is used over the vowels a, e, u, as in voila, there is ; phx, father ; rt'gle, rule ; om, where. It is placed — Over the preposition a, to, in order to distinguish it from the third person singular of the vorb avoir, il a, he has ; Over the adverb la, there, to distinguish it from the article la^ the, or tho pronoun la, her, it ; Over the adverb or pronoun oil, (where, in which, to which), to distinguish it from the conjunction ou, or ; Over the preposition des, from, since, to distinguish it from the compound article des, of the, some. 9. The circumflex accent (*) is used with any of the vowels, the sound of which it always lengthens ; as in <^^e, age ;lural of either gender; Over ti(, participle past of (aire, to be silent, to dis- tinguish it from the pronoun /w, thou ; Over criiy past participle of croitre, to grow, to distin- guish it from crUi past participle of croire^ to believe. OF THE ArOSTROPlIE. 10. The Apostrophe is a small mark in the form of a conniia ( ' ), Avhicli is placed over the line between two letters, to point out the elision or suppression of a vowel at the end of a word before another word beginning with a vowel, or h mute, as in Vchne, the soul ; Vhomme, the man ; s'?7, if he ; instead of la time, le hommey si il. A, E, I, are the oidy vowels liable to bo thus cut off. 11. The A is suppressed only in la, article or pronoun. 12. The elision of the E occurs, not only in the mascu- line article and pronoun le, but also in the monosyllables je, me, te, se, ce, cle, ne, que; and, moreover — (I.) Injusque, before a, au, aiix, ici; i\.s,jusqu'a Rome, (2.) In lorsque, puisque, and quoique, before il, ils, die, elks, on, un, line, or a word with which these conjunctions are immediately connected; as — Lorsqu'ils viendront. — PuisqiCainsi est. — Puisqu'il le veui. — Quoiqu^elle soit. [^.) In quelque, before wn, une i as, quelqvJun, quel' quhine ; and also in quel qu*il soit, quelle qu'elle soit. But we write quelque autre ; quelque historien. (4.) In presque, in the compound word presquHle, pen- insula ; and likewise in grande, m the words grand'mere and grand'tante. We also say and write: — La grand'messe. — Avoir grand 'faim. — Faire grand 'chcre. — C^est grand ^pitie. — II eut grand^peur. — Ce 7i^est pas grand^chose. 13. The I is cut off only in the conjunction si (if) before the pronoun il and its plural ils, but never before die or elleSj nor any other word whatever. 10 Ot TitE nVPIIEiS^, DIURESIS, AND CEDILLA. 14. But no elision of the a or e takes place in le, la, de, cc, que, before out, huit, huitaine^ huitvbme, ome, and ori' zVeme / neither in the pronouns le or la, after a verb in the imperative mood, nor in the adverb la : so we say, le out et le non ; le huit ou le onze du mots ; menez-le a Paris ; ira-t-il la avec voiis f 15. The final e of the preposition entre is retained be- fore the pronouns cw^, elles, and before autres ; and is only retrenched when entre forms a compound word with another word beginning with a vowel; as — entr*actef ep 'ouvrir, s'entr^ accuser, s^entr'aider. OF THE HYPHEN. 16. The Hyphen (in French, tiret or trait d union) is a short horizontal line, thus - , which is used principally in connecting compound words, and between a verb and a pronoun, when a question is asked, as in arc-en-ciel, rainbow ; clicf-d'aiuvre, master-piece ; parlez-vous f do you speak? avez-voust have you? OF THE DIJERESIS. 17. The Dlaresis (in French, trema or dierese) is a mark of two points, thus " , put over the vowels e, /, u, to intimate that they form a distinct syllable from the vowels that precede them, as in the words cigue, hem- lock ; MoisCj Moses ; Saul, Saul ; which are pronounced Ci-gu-e, Mo-ise, Sa-ul. OF THE CEDILLA. IS. The Cedilla is a small mark placed under the letter C, to indicate that it is to be pronounced like 8, before the vowels a, o, u, as in Franqais, French ; garqan, boy ; maqon, mason ; requ, received. The signs of punctuation, and all other marks and cha- racters, are the same in French as in English^ L^ OF NUMBER, CASES, AND GENDER. 11 la, dCj ,nd on- 'erb in say, le Paris ; ' OF NUMBER. 19. There arc two numbers in Frcncli ; the singular and the plural. The singular denotes one person or thing ; the plural denotes more than one. OF CASES. 20. The French language has no Ca^es^ properly go called, and consequently no declensions. The French express by prepositions, and especially by de (of or from), jmd a (to or at), the relations which the Greeks and the Romans indicated by the change of the different ter- minations of their nouns. OF GENDER. 21. The French language has only two genders, the masculine and the feminine. The gender of animate or living beings presents no difficulty, as all males are mas- culine, and all females are feminine ; but it is only by practice that one can 'learn the gender of inanimate ob- jects, and of animals whose names are the same for the male and female, such as elephant, elephant ; huffle, buf- falo ; cygne, swan ; perdrix, partridge ; baleine, whale ; truite, trout ; saumon, salmon. It is not possible to give general and precise rules by means of which one may, on every occasion, distinguish the gender of a noun from its mere aspect. Several Grammarians, however, have given treatises on the genders ; but those treatises are extremely incomplete ; some of their rules are vague, and above all liable to numberless exceptions. The truth is, the perfect know- ledge of the gender of substantives can only be the work of time. It is by reading with attention, and by having recourse, in cases of doubt, to a dictionaiy, that one will insensibly acquire a complete knowledge of the genders. Nevertheless in cases of doubt, and in the absence of 8 yf 12 OP GENDER. dictionary, it may be of some practical utility to know tliat ab6ut nine tenths of the nouns ending in e not ac- cented are feminine ; the final e mute being, in French, tJie distinctive mark of the feminine gender. The French call tlic termination in e mute, a feminine termination; any other is called masculine. This dis- tinction arises probably from the circumstance that most nouns of the feminine gender end with an e mute ; thus, la table, la rue, la plante, la tcte, la fenetre, la chambre, la plume, Vencre. 22. Names of states, empires, kingdoms, and provinces are of the gender which their terminations indicate ; thus : Danemarck, Piemont, Tyrol, Portugal, etc., are masculine ; but : Angleterre, Irlande, Ecosse, France, Espagne, Italie, Suisse, Belgique, Hollande, Allcmagne, Prusse, etc. which end in e mute, are feminine. Le Hanovre, le Bengale, le Mexique, and perhaps a few more, are exceptions. 23. The preceding rule is applicable to towns ; every name of a town ending with an e mute is generally femi- nine, any other termination is masculine ; thus : Rome, 31antoue, Toulouse, Marseille, are feminine ; but : Paris, Lyon, Rouen, Toulon, Amsterdam, are masculine. Je'ru- salem is feminine ; Londres is masculine. So we say, Londres est jlorissanti Marseille est florissante. But, when one is uncertain of the gender of a town, the best way to get out of the difficulty is to put the word ville before the name of the town, and say : la ville de Bruxelles, la ville de Lisbonne, etc. 24. To the student who understands Latin, it may not be unimportant to know, that of nouns derived from that language, those from feminine nouns are mostly feminine, and those fr-^ n masculine or neater nouns, masculine ; as foi from fides, lot from lex, fomnni from formica, genie from genius, college from collegium, poeme from poema, incendie from inccndium, Jleuve from fluvius, &c. The gender of Nouns has been generally marked, in the Exercises throughout this work, in order to facilitate *he acquirement of this part of French Grammar. 18 PART I. 25. There are, in French, as in English, nine sorts of words, usually called Parts of Speech ; namely, 1. Article. 2. Substantive or Noun. 3. Adjective. 4. Pronoun. 5. Verb. 6. Adverb. 7. Preposition. 8. Conjunction. 9. Interjection. CHAPTER I. OF THE ARTICLE. 26. The Article is a word placed before a noun, to point it out, and to show the extent of its meaning. The French article is le, la, les, the. As the French language has borrowed much from the Latin, there is every reason to think that we have formed our le and our la from the pronoun ille, ilia, illud. From the last syllable of the masculine word ille, we have made le; and from the last syllable of the feminine ilia, we have made la; it is thus also that from the first syllable of that word, we have made our pronoun il (he), which we use with verbs, as likewise from the feminine ilia we have made elle (she). We use le before substantives masculine in the singu- lar ; la before substantives feminine, also in the singular ; and, as the letter s, in the French language^ is tho sign of the plural when it is added to the singular, >;.; have formed les from the singular le. Les serves equally for both genders. When le or la comes before a noun beginning with a vowel or h mute, the e or a in cut off, and an apostrophe is put instead of the letter omitted. (See page 9.) S u or TDE ARTICLE. The, by ^ or aw is trans- ( un Ijefore n noun masculine 27. From the foregoing remarks it follows that the learner is to translate the English article le before a noun masculine singular. (a before a noun feminine singular, r before a noun, either masculine or feminine sing-ular, beg-hming' with a vowel or h mute. les before any noun m the plural. lated by : ( une before a noun feminine. 28. The English prepositions to and at are generally rendered in French by a; and of and from by de, or rf' if the word begins with a vowel or an h mute. EXERCISE I. I'he father. — The mother. — 'The children. — 27ie brother pere m. inh'e f. enfants pi. frere m. 77ie sister. — 17ie uncle. — The aunt. — The relations. — A son.— sosia' f. ancle m. tante f. parents pi. fils ra. A daus^hter. ~ The man. — The women. — A boy. — fitlei. homme\\.m. ' femmesiA. garden \\\ The day. — The nig-ht — The sun. — I'he moon. — The jour m. nuit f. soleil m. lune f stars. — A history. — The school. — A book. — The pag-e. etoiles pi. histoire f. ^cole f. livre m. page f. 29. CONTRACTION OF THE ARTICLE. AVhenever the prepositions a [to or at) or <^e {of ov from) precede the article le before a noun masculine singular, beginning with a consonant or h aspirate, a le is contracted into au, and de le into du ; and before plural nouns of either gender, a les is changed into aux, and de les into des. A and de arc not contracted with le before nouns which begin with a vowel or h mute, but then the article suffers elision. Nor are a and de ever contracted with la. The learner will therefore translate ^^^ ( before a noun masculine singular, beginning 1 with a consonant, or h aspirate. a la 4 ^^%'^ ^ ^^^^^ feminine singular, beginning ( with a coi.aonant, or h aspirate. ^ ^, ( before a noun masculine or feminine, in the ( singular, beginning with a vowel, or h mute, aiix before any noun in the plural. To the, or at the, by OP THE ARTICLE. 15 Iiat the eminino h miUo. snerally or (T if other erem. A. son fils m. loy — arQon in . ^ The )ag"e. mge f. vfrom) ngular, itracted f either ies. nouns article ^ 0/the, or from the, by before a noun masculine singular, beginmng with a consonant, or h aspirate, before a noun feminine singular, beginning with a consonant, or A aspirate.^ before a noun masculine or feminine, in the singular, beginning with a vowel, or h mute, before any noun in the plural. To a, to an, ( at a, at an, •< are translated by ( Of or from a j or an, by \ ci un before a noun masculine. a line before a noun feminine. d' un before a noun masculine. d' wwc before a noun feminine. EXERCISE II. -To the hero. — To the scholars.- To the king. — To the queen. roi m. reine f. heros h asp. icoliers pi. Of the master. — Of the house Of the church. — Of the coat maitre m. maison f. eglise f. habit h m. Of the curtains. — To a dictionary. — Of a grammar. — To a pen. — rideaux^l. dictionnairem. grammairef. plumei. Of a penknife. — At the hotel. — From the garden. — To the canif m. hdtel h m. jardin m. town Of the harp. — J'o a watch. — From a clock. — ville f. harpe f. h asp. montre f. horloge f. Of the ladies. — At an inn. — From a village to a town. dames pi. auberge f. m. GENERAL RULES ON THE ARTICLE. 30. — I. The article must always agree in gender and number w^itli its noun. 31. — II. The article and the prepositions a and c/e, whe- ther contracted or not, arc generally repeated in French before every noun, although often omitted in English. EXAMPLE. gmnmg ™:inniug in the I mute. Le lis est le symbole de In camleur, de ^'innoccDcci et de la puretd TIio lUy is the emblem of candour, innocence, andpurity EXERCISE m. The lion is the king of animals. — The fox is the — vci. est roi m. Qxt.animaux\i[. renardm. emblem of cunning. — The rose is the queen of flowers . embleme m art. ruse t. — f. reine f. art. fleurs pi. 16 OF THE AIITICLE. Idleness is the mother of all vices. ~ The love of art parcsse ?. mei'e f. de tons art. — pi. amour ni. life is natural to man. — She (is learning) art. rief. naturel art. /tomwchm. Elh apprend drawing, music. and dancing. — I wi'ite to the art. dessin m. art. musique f. et art. danse f. J'ecris nephew and the niece. — The Creator of heaven neveu m. pr. nUce f. and Cr^aieur m. art. del m. mind and body. earth — The vigour of pr. art. ierre f. vigueur f. art. esprit m. pr. art. corps m 32. — III. Of the Article du, de la, ''I, des, used i>f a PARTITIVE SENSE, t. c. implying a part, not the whole. I Du for the masculine, de la for the fetninine, de V be- ( fore a vowel or h mute, des for the plural, answering to I the English words some or any, expressed or understood^ ] must be repeated before every noun in French. EXAiH'LES. ♦ Envoyez-nous du pain, de la viande, et des pomines de tcrre. Avez-vous de la monuaie ? Send us some bread, meat, and potatoes. Have you got any change 1 EXERCISE IV. Give me some paper, ink, and pens. — Take Donnez-moi papier m. encre f. et plumes pi. Prenez ^6 Sucre m. and cream.— crime f. some tea or coffee. — Put in some sugar tM m. ou cafe m. Mettez-y Offer him some cheese, eggs, butter, and milk. — Offrez-lui fromage m. osufs pi. heurre m. lait m. Drink some wine, some beer, or some water. — Eat Buvez vin m. biere f. eau f. Mangez some hash. — Bring me some oil, mustard, hachis m. h asip. Apportez-moi huilehm. moutardet pepper, and salt — Have you got a7iy money ? — Has she any poivrem. selm. Avez-vous argent m. A-t-elle wool or thread ? — Is there any ripe fruit in tlie garden ? laine f. film, Y a-t-il "milr ^ — m. dans jardin m. Yc3 ; thare are apricots, peaches, pears, and apples. il y a abricots, peches, poires, pommes. : OP THE SUBSTANTIVE. 17 to the and 'i CHAPTER II. OF THE SUBSTANTIVE OR NOUN. 33. A Substantive or Noun is the name of any person or thing that exists, or of which we have any notion ; as, Alexandre^ AlexsLiidev, LondreSj London; /wwwc, man ; maison, house ; vertu^ virtue. Substantives are either proper or common. The substantive proper^ or proper name, is the name appropriated to one person, or one thing only ; as, Calvin^ Milton, France, Paris, Dublin. The common noun is that which belongs to persons, or things of the same kind ; as, homme, man ; arbre, tree j >vhich appellation equally suits all men, all trees. Among common nouns, we must distinguish the col' lective nouns ; so called, because, although used in the singular number, they present to the mind the idea of several persons or things. Collective nouns are divided into general and partitive. The former express a whole body ; as, arme'e, army ; foret, forest. The latter express only a partial number ; as, multitude, multitude ; quantite', quantity. OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF FRENCH SUBSTANTIVES. GENERAL RULE. 34. TuE plural of Substantives, either masculine or feminine, is formed by adding an s to the singular ; as, le p^re, the father. la mfere, the mother. I'eufant, the child. le moment, the moment. les peres, the fathers. les meres, the mothers^ les enfants,* the children. les moments,* the moments. * It was fonncrlya general practice, and it is still retained by some, to leave out tlie t in the plural of nouns and adjectives ending in ant and ent, but at the present day the adjective tout (all) Is the only word in which the French Academy drops tho t in the plural masculine; as, Tous les parents. J All the relations. Tons les h&hltaatB.^Acad^mie.) | All the inhabitants. To tovt might be added gent, plural gens ; but gent singular is only used ii) fomiUor poctrj' ; as, (a gent maHcageuse, the marshy tribe. i 18 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. EXCEPTIONS TO THE GENERAL RULE. 35. Exception I. — Nouns ending in 5, x, or z, in the singular, remain the same in the plural ; as, le lis, la voix, le nez, the lily, the voice, the nose. les lis, les voix, les nez, the lilies, the voices, the noses. EXERCISE V. The trees of their orchards. — The Jlowers of our gardens. — arbi'e leurs verger fleur nos jardin The palaces oi' the kings. — Buy me four pounds of walmits. palais rot Acheiez-moi quatre livre noix — Thefashionsof the French. — The crosses of the knights.-^ mode Frangais croix chevalier The laws of those countries. — The movements of the armies. — loi ces pays mouvement armec The spoons and forks are on the table. — He has cuiller et art. fourchette soni sur f. II a three sons and two daughters The lilies of the fields. trois fits deux fdle champ 36. Exception II. — Nouns ending in aw, cm, xu, or om, take an x instead of an s in the plural ; as. chapeau, jeu, voeu. bijou, hibou, hat. game, vow. ^ewel. owl. chapeaux, jeux, voeux, bijoux, hiboux, hats. games. vows. jewelSy owls. 37. The following nouns in ow, conform to the general rule, taking an s m the plural : clou, coucou, filou, fou, 7iail. cuckoo, mckpocket. fool. licou, sou, trou, verrou. halter, penny, hole, bolt. EXERCISE VI. A fleet of twenty ships. — The boats of the sailors. — flotte f. vingt vaisseau bateau matelot He (found himself) between two fires. — Owls are II se trouva entre deux feu art. so7it des nocturnal birds. — The knives are on the sideboard ^nocturnes ^oiseau couteau sur buffet m. (There are) many pickpockets in London and Paris.—' Jly a beaucoup de filou a Londres et a * a OP THE SUBSTANTIVE. 10 in the h Fill up those holes. — Give him six peiice. — Our doors Remplissez ces Vonnes-lid — sou Nos porte have bolts He has sold the pictures and the jewels. out 32 verrou vendu tableau 38. Exception III. — Most nouns ending in al or ail in the singular, form their plural by changing the final cl or ail into ana;; as, canal, canal. hopital, hospital. travail, work. canaux, canals. hopitaux, hospitals. travaux, works. 39. The following nouns in al and ail take an s in the plural : attirail, apparatus, imple- bal, hall. \ments. carnaval, carnival. detail, detail, particulars. 40. aXeul, ciel, (eil, have two plurals. Singular. Meaning. eventail, fan. gouveniail, nelm, rudder, portail, portal. regnal, treat. ^^^ ( ancestor, forefather, - Plural. dieuls. aieux. deux, dels ciel 1^'^^' iieaven, ( sky in a picture ; or, tester of a bed, ceil eye, _-__---- yeux. (ceiUde-boeuf, bull's-eye, (architectural tq^'m), makes in the plural, ceils-de-boeuj.) Bkail, subst. masc. sing., and Bestiaux, subst. masc. pi., aro synonymous, both meaning cattle, EXERCISE VII. The horses of the generals. — The marshals of France. — chesal general marechal The English admirals These corals are beautiful. — The balls ^anglais ^amiral Ces corailsontsuperbes. bal of the nobility. — He sells fans. — Our Saviour noblesse f. II vend 32 eventail Notre Sauveur ascended into heaven in presence of his disciples Open monta a art. ciel pi. en presence de ses Ouvrez your eyes. — She has the portraits of Jier two grandfathers. * aft. cdl Elle a ses deux — TX^ forefathers have filled high stations. out rempli de grandes charges. 80 OF TRB ADJECTIVE. CHAPTER in. OF THE ADJECTIVE. 41. An Adjective is a word which expresses some quality or distinction ascribed to a substantive. Adjective, from the Latin adjectus, signifies added to. A word is known to be an adjective, wlien it can be properly joined with the word personne^ person ; or chose^ thing. Thus, fidele, faithful, and agreable, agreeable, are adjectives, because we can say, une personne Jidele, a faithful person ; une chose agreable, an agreeable thing. In English, the adjectives never vary on account of gender and number, but iu r^ench they change their termination, in order to agree, in gender and number, with the nouns or pronouns to which they relate. OF THE FORMATION OF THE FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. GENERAL RULE. 42. The feminine of adjectives is formed by adding an e mute to the masculine singular ; as, 31asc. Fern. prudent, prudente, prudent. grand, grande, great. court, courte, short. Masc. Fern. joli, jolie, pretty. ^ge, agee, old^ aged. petit, petite, Utile, small. EXCErTIO??S. 43. Exception I. — Adjectives ending in e mute (that is, e not accented), remain the same in the feminine ; as, un Jcune garyon, a young boy. \ uno Jeune fllle, a young girl EXERCISE VIII. Their house is small, but it is very pretty Leur maison f. est mats elle est tres That street is narrow and dark. — The meat is cold; the Cette rue f. Hroit et ohscur viande f. froid water is hot. — This pear (is not) ripe. — Avoid cau f. chaud Cdi^ poire f. ii'est pas miXr Evitez Art. I litis a is a had company. — Art. tnauvais com]>agnie f. liiis a black gown and a red OF THE ADjECTIvn. That a *noir 91 phi i.s very cunning. —^ho Jille f. rusti Elle scarf. — Tlic eldest sister robe f. ^rottge ^ectiarpe f. ^atn^ hccur is a modol of filial piety (She is) a clever woman. modelem. ' ^pieUf. C'est habile femme, 44. Exception II. — Adjectives ending in / cliango that letter into ve for the feminine ; as, Masc. Fern. actif, active, active. bref, breve, briefs short. 45. Exception III. — Adjectives ending in x change the X into se ; as, Masc. Fern. neuf, nouvc, new. vif, vive. lively. Masc. Fern. heureux, heurcuse, happy. jaloux, jalouse, jealous. Masc. Fern. paresseux, paresseuse, idle. vertueux, vertueuse, virtuous. Masc. Fern. roux. rousse, red. vieux, vieiUe, old. 46. The following in x form their feminine thus : Masc, Fern. doux, douce, sweet, mild. fanx, fausse, false. EXERCISE IX. Is she attentive f — Catherine de Medicis was ambitious, Est-elle attentif — etait ambitieux imperious, and superstitious ; she was a native of Florence impirieux et superstitieux * natif de Joshua (brought down) the walls of the proud Jericho Josu& fit tomber mur orgudlleux Jericho f. The Italian language is svieet and harmonious. — That Htalienne Hangue f. doux harmonieux Cette news is false. — The new tower is in the old town. nouvelle f. faux ^neuf Hour f. dans vieux ville f. 47. Exception IV. — Adjectives ending in e/, eil, ien^ on, and et, form their feminine by doubling the last con- sonant, and adding an e mute after it ; as, Masc. Fem. cruel, cruelle, cruel. pareil, pareille, similar. ancien, ancienne, ancient. Masc. Fem. Chretien, chretienne, Christiatu bon, bonne, good. net, nette, clean. PrSt, ready, makes prete in the feminine. 22 OF THE ADJECTIVE. i'Vm. conipltito, complete. incomplete, incomplete. (lirtcrt'te, discreet. iiuJiscrctc, indiscreet. inquiete, uneasy. secrete, secret. chere. dear. fierc, proud. premiere, derniere, first. last. 48. The following adjectives in ct and cr follow tho general rule, but take a grjTvo accent over the c before the final t or r in tho feminine : Masc. coniplet, iiiconiplot, tli.scret, indiscret, "'^ inqnict, Hccret, clier, ficr, l)remier, ' dernier, EXERCISE X. The soul is immortal I (am reading) ancient history dme f. est immortel Je lis avt.'ancien Viistoire f. /* m. We are in the nineteenth century of the Christian Nous sommes dans dix-neuvieme siecle m. hhrHien era. — She (is not) pretty, but she is good. — That poor ^ere f. Elle n'est pas joli mais est Cette pauvre woman is dumb. — Are you ready, my dear sister ? — Your fcmme muet Etes-vous ma soeur f Voire mother is very uneasy — That person is extremely indiscreet, mere ires personnel, extr&inement 49. Exception V. — Adjectives ending in eur, formed from a participle present by the change of ant into eur^ make evse in the feminine ; as, Participle. Masc. Fern. connaissan^, connaissem*, connaisseuse, knowingyajudge. flattan^, flatteur, flatteuse, flattering , a flatterer. mentani, menteur, menteuse, lyin^i a liar. trompawf, trompeur, trompeuse, deceiving, deceitful. Observation.— Words of tills sort are real adjectives, though for tho most part nscd as substuntives. About u hundred of theta follow this rule. 50. The following must be excepted, as they form their feminine by changing eur into eresse : Masc. Fern. demandeur, demanderesse, a plaintiff. defendeur, defenderesse, a defendant. enchanteur, enchanteresse, enchanting. peel 1 our, pecheresse, a sinner. vengeiir, vengeresse, avenging, an avenger. OF TnE ADJKCTIVE. 23 How tho c bci'orc 17.— nref.hm. Christian ^chrStien lat poor te pauvre ' — Your • Voire idiscreet. formed nto eiir^ idge. flatterer, :eitful. i most part rm their r»l. Inventeur, inventor; inspcctetir, inspector; per' Si'vutcur^ persecutor, nuikc, in tiio feminine, invcntHce^', inspectricCj and persecutrice. • 7'- 52. As to the adjectives, or rather nouns used adjec- tively, ending in teu7\ whicli, though derived from verbs, are not formed from a participle present, by the cliange of a7it into eur^ they change tcur into trice for tho fcniinine ; as, Masc. accuaateur, bienfaiteur, condiicteur, instituteur, Fein, aceuaa^nce, bicnfjiiicT. de Bio- flRAPnUS.) Madame de Stael est un do nos plus grands ^crftajn*— (Boiste.) Une fcmme auteur.— (Ac ao.) Madame Dcshouli^rcs dtalt un poi'le almable.— (Acad.) EXAMPLES. Mademoiselle de Schurman, born at Co- logne in 1606, uas a painter, an en- graver, a sculptor, and a geometri- cian. Madame de Stael is one of our greatest writers. A female author. Madame Deshoulilres was an amiable poetess. Poitesse, s. f. (a female poet) is a word seldom used. — (Acad.) EXERCISE XI. ^he is a great talker and great laugher. — Is she C'est grand parleur rieur Est-elle quarrelsome f — Joan of Arc was the avenger of France. — querelleur Jeanne d'Arc fut vengeur art. f. She is the benefactress of the poor. — She is a good actress, Cest hienfaiteur pauvre pi. bon actcur and a celebrated singer Minerva was the protectress of the cilebre Minerve itait protecteur fine arts — The city of Troy was in Asia Minor. — beaux-arts. viltef. Troie daris art. Asief. Mineur (There is) a superior power. — That is ajlattering promise. Jlya ^sup^eur ^puissance {.C* * yromessef. 56. There are seven adjectives ending in c which form their feminine thus : Masc. Fern. blanc, blanche, white. caduc, caduque, tn^rm. franc, franche, frank, open. gi*ec, grecque, Greek, Grecian. Masc. Fern. public, publique, public. sec, seche, dry. turc, turque, Turkish. 57. The six following terminations in s take 8e in the feminine : Masc. Fem. has, basse. low. ^pais, epaisse, thick. expres. exprcssc, express Masc. gras, gros, las, Fem. grasse, grosse, la&se. fat. big. tired. \ rci a OP THE ADJECTlVfi. 25 58. The following adjectives forir their feminine ir- regularly : Masc. Masc. Fern. beau, belle,* fine. benin, benignc, benign. favori, favorite, favourite. fou, folle,* foolish. frais, fraiche, fresh. gentil, ^entille, genteel. jumeau, jumeUe, twin. Fern. loiiff, longue, long. mafin, maRgne, malignant mou, moUe,* soft. nouveau, nouvelle,* new. nul, nuUe, null. sot, sotte, silly. traitre, traitresse, treacherous • Remark.— The feminlncs, belle, folle, molle, nouvelle, are formed from the mas- culines, belf/ol, tnol, nouvel, which are used before a vowel, or h mute. EXERCISE XII. life is ^vief. est (Here is) a handsome white gown. — His puhli Void beau 'blanc * robe f. Sa ^publi irreproachable — This table is too low. — This board is irreprochable. Cette — f. trop bas planche f. too long and too thick This soup is too fat. ^ It is long epais soupe f. gras C'est a new discovery. — Have you seen my favourite flower, nouveau decouverte f. Avez-vous . vu ma favori \fleur t the rose, so fresh and so sweet ? — That is a fine tree. — f. si frais doux VoilcL arbre m. PLURAL OF FRENCH ADJECTIVES. ■■•>'<■.. GENERAL RULE. 59. Adjectives form their plural, like substantives, by the simple addition of an s to the singular ; as, Sinqular. Plural, grand, wiasc. grands, 1^^.^^ grande, /cm. grandes, y »"='""" savant, masc. savants, L-^^^^,^, savante,/em. savantes, j This rule is without any exceptions for the feminine, but the masculine has the three following : 60. — Exception L Adjectives ending in s or a; do not change their termination in the plural masculine ; as, graSf fat j gros, big ; heureuXj happy. Of THE ADJECTIVE. I 61. — Exception II. Adjectives ending in au take x in |the plural masculine; as, beau, handsome; nouveau, new; ■plural, beaux, nouveaux^ 62. — Exception III. Adjectives ending in al change tliis termination into aiix for the plural masculine; as, l\c(jal, equal; moral, moral; plural, egaux, moraux. A few adjectives ending In al follcgf the general rule, and take s in the plural, and others have no plural masculine^, but these are adjectives seldom used. 63. Tout, all, is the only adjective that changes t into s for the plur. masc, but it makes toutes in the plur. fem. EXERCISE Xni. Give %omQ entertaining books to those ^rc^i^i/ little girls. Donnez ^amusant Hivrem. ces joli petit fille — He has powerful enemies, but their efforts (will be) // a de puissant ennemim.mais leurs m. seront vain and useless. — These chickens are big and fat, but those vai7i et inutile Ces pouletm. sontgros gras partridges are very lean. — All the general officers were perdnx f. tres maigre Tout "geniral ^officier etaient present. — Tlie old and the new present vieux soldiers did won- soldat firent 32 mer- ilers. — I agree to all those con^jjions, they are reasonable. vcille Je consens ces — f. elles raisonnable OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 64. There are three degrees of comparison; the Positive^ tlie Comparative, and the Superlative, The Positive is the adjective itself, merely expressing the quality of an object, without any comparison ; as. Tin enfant sage et itudieux. | A well-behaved and studious chil(L EXERCISE XIV. She is satisfied with her lot. — Merit is modest. — Elle est content de son sort. art. merite m. modeste. Socrates Socrate and Plato were two great philosophers. — Platon Staient deux grand philosophe Virgil had a fine and delicate taste. — Tlie style of Virgile avait yin ""et *delicat ^goM m. — m. } «i I OF THE AtVJECTIVE. 27 e a; in new; 5 plural, g-irls. fille reneloii is harmonious. — The Alps are high and ste^ est hannonieux. Alpesi.-p\. sonihaut escarp$ ' The city ofRomeis/?*^^ oi ancient and modern monuments. ville f. rempli ^ancien ht *moderne *- -m. 65. The Comparative Degree expresses a comparison between tAVO or more objects. There are three sorts of comparatives, viz. of superiority^ inferiority, and equality. The ■ comparative of superi^dty is formed by putting the adverb plus, more, before the adjective, and the conjunction que, than, after it ; as. Atliftnes a 6i&pltts lllustre que ]^acd€l6monc Athens teas more fllustriout than Lacedoemon. N.B. — The comparative degree is often formed in English by adding r or er to the positive; as, wise, wiser / great, greater ; and as these letters stand for the adverb more^ they must be rendered in French by its corresponding adverb plus; thus, wiser^ plus sagej greater, plus grand. Plus must be repeated before every adjective. EXERCISE XV. Virtue is more precious than riches. — He ie- art. vertu f. est prScieux art. richesses pi. 11 happier than a kin^. — He is more fortunate than wise. — It is content roi. heureux sage. II more noble to forffive than to (avenge one's self). — de paraonner de se venger. The simplicity of nature is more pleasing^ than all the simpliciie f. art. — f. agreable tout embellishments of art. — London is more populous ornement m. art. — Londres m. peupl6 than Paris, but France is larger and m^e populous than main art. f. grand et England. — The Thames is deeper than the Seine. art. Angteter'^e. Tamiset. profond f. 66. The comparative of inferiority io formed by placing the adverb moins, less, before the adjective, and que^ than, after it ; as, L' Aft-ique est nwint peupl^e que TEurope. | AJrka m less populous than Europe. Moins is to be repeated before every adjective. 28 OF THE ADJECTIVE. The comparative of inferiority may also be formed by putting the verb in the negative, with 5/, so, before the adjective, and que^ as, after it ; as, L'Afriquen'cstpnsiipeuplde^McrEurope. [Africa it not so populous as Europe. EXERCISE XVI. Death is less fatal than the pleasures which attack art. mort f. est funeste plaisir qui attaquent virtue. -He is /c55 polite and oblig'ing thanXm brother. — art. vertu f. II poll ohligeant son frere. She is less amiable than her sister. — Csesar (was not) less brave Elle aimahle sa sceur. Cesar n'eiaitpas than Alexander They are less happy thaji you think — He Alexandre. lis heureux vous ne pensez. (is not) so rich as his brother-in-law — His familv is much n' est pas riche beau-frere. Sa familief. Men less numerous than ours. — He is less rich than you. nombreux la ndtre. 67. The comparative of e^'wa/^ is formed by placing the adverb aussi^ as, before the adjective, and que^ as, after it; as, Aristide ^talt autii vaiUant que Juste. | Aristides was as valiant as jutt, Aussi must be repeated before every adjective. EXERCISE XVn. Is he as clever, and as docile as his cousin? — He is as Est-il habile son m. It est tall as you. — Your niece is as pretty as that girl She is grand vous. Votre niece joli cette fille. as good as beautiful. — Socrates was as valiant a^wise, beau Socrate itait vaillant sage. — Cicero was as pious as eloquent. — It is as easy to do Ciceron pieux eloquent. II aise defaire food as to do evil. — History is as useful as ien m. art. mal m. art. histoirehm. utile agreeable. — This house is as large as yours. agreable. Cette maison f. grand la vdtre. 68. The Superlative Degree expresses the quality in the highest or lowest degree. There are two sorts of superlatives, the relative and the absolute. The superlative relative expresses a relation or com- parison with another object; it is formed by putting the article ?e, la, les, before the comparative. Ce del I by tlio I OF THE ADJECTIVE, EXAMPLES. 29 Le cliien est ranimal U plus fid61c. Ce sont Ics homines les plus sages dc Tassembldc — (Acad.) T/ie dog is tha n.oat/ait\futaaimaL They are the Vtlscst mm in the as- sembly. The superlative relative may also be formed by placing before the comparative one of the possessive adjectives, mon^ mttj mes, my ; torij ta^ tes, thy ; son, sa, ses, his or her ; notre^ nos, our ; votrCj vos, your ; leur, leurSf their. EXAMPLES. Alonplus puissant protccteur. Voire plus graud cniicmi. My most powerful protector. Your greatest enemy. EXERCISE XVIII. Gold is t7ie purest, the most precious, the most ductile, art. or m. est j-jwr, precieux, and, after platina, the heaviest of all metals. — cqjres art. platine m. pesant tout art. metal m. The least excusable of all errors is that which is art. erreur f. celle qui wilful — The elephant is the strongest of all animals. — volontaire. elephant m. fort art. animal m. I i)refer my house to the finest palace. — Our greatest Je prejere ma maison beau palais m. Nos grand interests. — Your most cruel enemies. — My prettiest rings. interet ra. Vos cruel ennemi m. Mes bague f. G9. The superlative absolute does not imply any relation to another object, but merely expresses the quality in the highest or lowest degree ; it is fonned by putting be- fore the adjective one of these words, tres,* fort^^ bierij veiy ; extremement^ extremely ; infinimentj infinitely ; ex- cessivement, excessively ; or any other adverb expressing a very high degree. EXERCISE XIX. Mr and Mrs Fox are very happy. They are botli i^ery heureux. tous deux capricious. — Dublui is a very large and very fine city. — That cupricieux. est grand beau ville f. Cette lady is very charitable. — He is a very unfortunate man. — He dame Cest ' ^malheureuxViomme II. • T';-*^, from the Greek t^/j, thrice ; tris-hcureux, thrice happy. 1 I'irt, abbreviation of/ortcment strongly. 30 OP THE ADJECTIVE. (is uot) very clever. — This soup is very hot. — The 7ie8t pas habile. Cette soupe f. chaud tea and the sugar are very bad. — That work the m. Sucre m. mauvais. Get ouvrage ra. is very much esteemed by the learned. — Madame Dacier * estime ae savant m. pi. was extremely learned. — God is infinitely Just. itait savant Dieu juste. 70. The adjectives, 5on, mauvais, and petit, and the adverbs, bien,mal, and peu, form their degrees in tho following manner : > ^ u ^< Plus mauvais, plus petit, plus mal, are also used, but never plus bon, plus bien, plus peu. Positive. Comparative. Superlat ive. hon, good. melUeur, better. le meilleur, the best. mauvnis, bad. pire, worse. le pire. the worst. petit, little. moindre, less. le moindre. the least. bicHp tcell. mleux, better. lo mleux, the best. mal, badljf. pis, worse. Ic pis, thewoi-st. peu. little. raoins, less. le moins. the least. jt^a dir th( pel ex< th( C EXERCISE XX. That wine is good, but this is better. — Lend me Ce vinm. est mais celui-ci Pritez-moi the best book in your library. — He writes well, but his livre m. de votre bibliotheque. II ecrit sa sister writes still better. — The life of a slave is worse sceur encore vie f. esclave m. than death itself. — He was a little better, but he is que art. mort f. mSme. se portait mais est now worse than ever. — She speaks little. — Speak less mairdenant que jamais. parte Parlez (It is) his least misfortune. — The remedy is worse than Cest son malheur m. remede m. est the disease. — Temperance is the best doctor. mal m. art. temperance f. medecin m. There are some adjectives which have neither compa- ratives nor superlatives, because the qualities which they express are in themselves the highest degree of perfec- tion, worth, etc. J such are e'ternel^ immorU'l^ supreme, etc. H ■- i I OP THE ADJECTIVE. 31 OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 71. The Adjectives of Number are divided into Car- dinal ind Ordinal. ' The Cardinal numbers are used to count and express the quantity or number of persons or things. The Ordinal numbers mark the order or rank which persons or things hold with regard to one another. All numeral adjectives are of both genders, with the exception of wn, premier^ and second^ which take an e in the feminine. ■i Cardinal Numbers. 1 Un. 2 Deux. 3 Trois. 4 Quatre. 5 Cinq. 6 Six. 7 Sept. 8 Huit. 9 Neuf. 10 Dix. 11 Onze. 12 Douze. 13 Treize. 14 Quatorze, 15 Quinze. 16 Seize. 17 Dix-sept. 18 Dix-huit. 19 Dix-neuf. 20 Vingt. 21 Vhigt et un. 22 Vingt-deux. 23 Ving-t-trois. 24 Vingt-quatre, 25 Vingt-cinq. 26 Vingt-six. 27 Vingt-sept. 28 Vingt-huit. 29 Vingt-neuf. 30 Treute. Ordinal Numbers. 1st Premier. 2 Quatre-vingt-quatrieme. 85^h Quatre-vingt-cmqui^me 86''» Qiiatre-vingt-sixieme. 87*** Quatre-vingt-septiSme. 88**1 Quatre-vingt-huitiSme, 89*h Quatre-vingt-neuvicme. 90**» Quatre-vingt-dixifime. 918' Quatre-vingt-onziSme. 92*^ Qiiatre-vingt-douzieme. 93*^ Qiiatre-vingt-treizieme. 94**1 Quatre-vingt-quatorziSme. 95**1 Quatre-vingt-quinzieme. 96**1 Quatre-vingt-seizieme. 97**1 Quatre-vingt-dix-septiSme. 98**1 Quatre-vingt-dix-liuitieme. 99**1 Quatrc-vingt-dix-neuvi6me. 100**1 Centieme. 1018* Cent-uni6me. 102'i Cent-deuxieme. 200**1 Deux centi5me. 1000**1 Millieme. 10,000**1 Dix milliSme. 1,000,000**1 MillioniSme. 'i ' Among the words which express number, there are some which arc real substantives ; these are divided into three sorts, called collective^ distributive^ and proportional. The collective denotes a certain quantity or collection of things ; as, une douzaine^ a dozen ; une vingtaine^ a score ; an million^ a million. The distributive expresses a part of a whole ; as, la moitie'f the half j le quart, the quarter. J Ill^lH*'^ 84 OF THE ADJECTJVn. The proportional denotes the progressive incrcftsc cf things ; as, U double^ the double ; le triple^ the triple ; le centuple^ a hundred-fold. 72. Remarks. — I. The ordinal numbers, the collective and distributive nouns take an s in the plural ; as, Los prcmlbrcB douzaincs. I cs sept liuititincs. The first dozens. The seven eighth). 73. II. Vingt and cent are the only cardinal numbers which take an s in the plural, that is, when preceded by another number which multiplies them ; as, Quatre-rin^/a chevuux. Cinq cent. soUlats. Eighty horses. Five hundred soldiers. The preceding remark holds good when the noun is understood ; as, Nous dtlona deux cs«/4. | We wei'e two hundred (pei'sons.) 74. III. But, when vingt and cent are followed by another number, or used for the date of the year, they do not take an s ; as. Q^atre-l•mflr^dlx chevuux. Cinq cent vingt soldata. L'an mil sept cent quatrc- vingt. Ninety horses. Five hundred and twenty soldiers. In the year one thousand seven hundred and eighty. 75. IV. Mille^ a thousand, never takes an s in the plural ; but, mille^ a mile, takes one : thus, dix mille is ten thousand, and dix milles means ten miles. In men- tioning the Christian era, mille is abridged into mil / as, Napoleon mourut en mil Imit cent vingt ct un. ^apuleon died in one thocsand eight hundred and twenty-one. 76. V. The French make use of the car6?/naZ numbers, , — Ist^ In mentioning all the days of the month, except the jfli^st: thus we say, le deux marSj the second of March ; le quatre mai^ the fourth of May ; and, le premier maij the first of May ; le premier juin^ the first of June. JVo/e.— Voltaire used to say, le deux de mars, le quatre de mat; and Bacinc le deux mars, le quatre mai. Witli regard to grammatical correctness, the first con- struction is certainly preferable ; but if we follow usage, which, as to language, is the rule of opinion, we must say le deux mars, le quatre mai. It is thus that our good authors almost always express themsehes, as well as those persons who pique themselves on speaking purely, and who avoid eveiy kind of affectation. i ri :f I reasc of iplc ; le 'ollective lumbers jded by noun IS •sons.) wed by they do ildiers. nd tecen f in the mille is In men- ul ; as, I0C8AND i-one. lumbers, , except Bond of premier )f June. id Bacinc Je ic first COD' anguage, Is us that our ersons who :tatioiL OP THE ADJFXTIVE. SA 2d^ In speaking of sovereigns ; as, Guillaume quatre^ William the fourth. Tlie first of the series is excepted, for wo say Jacques premier^ Henri premier^ and not Jacques uuj Henri un ; but wo say indiflferontly, deux or second. Henri deux, vol de France. Ciithorine deux, impiiratrlce do Rusaie.— (Acad.) Ffanj/ols second succdda h Ilcnrl second.— [(jI&asld.) Jlenry tho second, king of J'^ance. Catharitie tho second, empreu qf Russia. Francis tho second succeeded Henry the second. In speaking of the Emperor Charles V, and of Popo Sixtus V, we say Charles-Quint^ Sixte'Quint. EXERCISE XXI. America was discovered by Christopher Columbus, in art. Amerique f.fut dicouverte par Christophe Colomb * the year one thousand four hundred and ninety-two. — We have anm.* ♦ Nousavona eighty (men of war) ready to sail, we (shall soon have) vaisseaux de guerre prits faire voile en aurons bientot two hundred Our troops took Jive thousand prisoners. — Nos troupes firent prisonnier (It la) four miles from tliis. — Send me the 'first Hwo dozens. 11 y a mille m. ici. Envoy ez-moi — Your letter of the fifteenth of January breached rae) on Voire lettre f. * Janvier rnest parvenue * the first of February. — I arrived on the second. * fevrier. suis arrive * EXERCISE XXU. Louis the sixteenth, Louis the eighteenth, and Charles the tenth. were brothers. itaient frere Francis the first, king of France, and Frangois Frederick military, victory, favour, doctor, famous, constancy, miliiaire. victoire. ' faveur. docteur. fameux. Constance. I I I • i ^ OF THE ADJECTIVE. 37 KENCH ich are ) differ- !cnts in in their ending grimace, vice, etc. le, forti- itc. oquence, ;, absent, etc. globule, }le, spec- , ff dn^ral, probable, ible, etc. ;, collil-ge, ge, etc. , etc. ^ion, na- 3tc. our^ or, ig tlicso nre, re. r. ur. ux, ance. t ty (iiflcr a voivd) into ti, an beauty, benuU. v{tli1Ilcccllh!g)}» "' •• furj,/«nW modesty. ».!.d<»««. 79. Most proper names of women and goddesses ending in a, become French by changing that a into e mute ; as, Julia, Julie. Minerva, Minerve. Sophia, ISophie. Diana, Diane. EXERCISE XXIII. The sagacity of that animal is admirable. — That f. cet m. est instrument is very harmonious. — The history of the Royal 111. ires hmvi. * Society.— The rector of an academy.— lie has the approbation »f. f. a f. of Uie nation.— His memory is extraordinary.—The valour of f. Sa f. f. that general is regulated by prudence. — His courage ia ce reglee par art. f. Son m. invincible. — The number of stars is incalculable — nomhre m. art. 6toile Give this nosegay to Maria or Louisa.— Flora was the Donnez ce bouquet m. d . ou IX etait goddess of flowers, and Pomona, the goddess of fruits. decsse art. Jlcur art. EXERCISE XXIV. Tlie weathercock is the symbol of inconstancy — The girouette f. symbole m. art. prosperity of the wicked is not durable. — An ambitious f. mechants pi. " soul is seldom capable of moderation. — It is sometimes ^dme f. rarement quelqiiefois difficult to distinguish the copy from the original The sublimity difficile de distinguer f . ' m. f, of his sentiments is still superior to the energy of his ses m. encore f. ses expressions.— Magistrates and physicians formerly rode f. art. magistral art. medccin ^autrefois ^allaient on mules..— Thalia is the muse of comedy, Urania that surdis f. art. f. celle of astronomy. — The unicorn is a fabulous animal, art. f licorne f. " i 3B OF PRONOUNy. CHAPTER IV. OFPRONOUNS. 80. The word Pronoun is formed of the word noun^ and of the Latin preposition pro, which means for or instead of. In the French language, there arc five kinds of Pro- nouns, viz. the Personal, the Possessive, the Demon- strfitivCj the Relative, and the Indefinite. 81. § I. OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Personal pronouns are used instead of the names of persons or things, to avoid the repetition of the nouns which they represent. There are three persons : the first is, the person speak- ing ; the second, the person spoken to ; the third, the person or thing spoken of. 82. PRONOUNS OF THK FIRST PERSON. Singular. Examples. Subject, Je, J. Je donne. I give. ( mol. ( me. \ to me. Buivez-moi, follow mo. Object, dcontaz-mot, listen to inc. in,. \ me. \ to me. il me flattc, fie flatters me. \me. il me parte, fte speaks to me Plural l?ubjeet, nous, we. nous donnons, vre give. ( us. il nous volt, lie sees us. Otvect, nous, t to vt. il nous parlc, he speaks to us. The pronouns of the first and second persons are both masculine and tcminine, that is, of the same gender as the person or persons they represent. 83. Particular Observations. — The Personal Pro- nouns are generally placed before the verb, except — (1.) When tlie pronouns take a preposition before them in French ; as, il parte de nous, he speaks of us. (2.) In interrogative sentences ; as, ^arZez-vous? do you speak ? (3.) When the verb is in the first person plural, or OP PERSONAL PROXOUNS. 89 for or of Pro- Demon" ames of 3 nouns speak- rd, the no. ) me. ers me. As to mo. us. is to ns. re both nder as il Pro- re them us? do iral, or i - iSingutlar. Subject, tu, tlioti. ( toi, tliee. Object, ( *^' 1 to thee. Plural. Subject, voas, you. Object, hi cither of the second persons of the Imperative, / without a negative ; as, parlez-mo\^ speak to me. But if the Imperative is used with a negative, the personal pronouns are placed before the verb j as, ne me parlez pasy do not speak to me. EXERCISE XXV. / speak French. — I have said that — Lend me your pencil. — parte franfttis. ai dit cela, Pritez voire cray on m. Help me. — Believe me. — ,Write to me. — Do not write to me. Aidez Croyez Ecrivez — He hurts me — He sees me. — This picture pleases me II blesse voit Ce tableau m. plait more than the otlier. — We praise God. — He knows us. — plus que autre. touons Dieu. connatt We tell him the truth, but he (will not) beheve us, — ^disoiis Hui vtrit^ f. mats ne veut pas croire He related to us the history of his misfortunes. a raconte histoire h m. ses malheur 84. PRONOUNS OF THE SECOND PERSON. Examples. tu ea heureux, thou art happy, jo parle pour toi, I speak for thee. Dieu te voit, God sees thee, je ie parle, I speak to tbae. vous chantez, you sing. il vous connait, he knows you. je vovi parle, I speak to you. 85. Remark. — When from politeness we use vou» (you), instead of the singular tn (thou), the verb is put in the plural, but the adjective or participle following remains in the singular, and takes the feminine termina- tion if we speak to a female ; as. Monsieur, vous etes bien hon, Madame, vous 6tes bien bonne. Sir, you are very good. Madam, you are very good. EXERCISE XXVI. Thou fearest God He (will do) H for thee He praises crams Dieu. II ^fera He pour lovA (/iee, — He will speak to thee. — Fowhave spoiled this book.—. partera avez gdt6 ce livreva. 40 of PbRSoKAL PRONOUNS. How troublesome you are ! — How good you are ! — Ladies, Que Hmportun ^m. ^tes ^bon 'f. ' MesdamcSf how amiable you are ! — I bring you the newspaper. — You ^ahndble ^ ^ apporie journal m. (are fond of) flowers ; if yoii like, I will give you this aimez &vt./leur si voulez donnerai ce fine nosegay. — Are you pleased, my dear little friend ? beau bouquet m. Etes content ma 48 amic f. PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON. Singular. il, m. elle,/ he, it. she, it. j him. \ to hir C\u], nu 1 lul,/. (.clle,/. ( lis, m. ( ellcs,/. ( eux, m. -< ellcB,/. Meur, m. &/. =*. „»,« «„:»^« * 7^^. -77 (ii w a reason to which laquelle,/. «^/"C^.{^ trapSde\fet{ 'X' '"" '' " "" .»...^u f , .i;.h 5 Cast une de ses soeur.^ maisO'' ^^oneof Ms sisters, iaauelle,/.«.M,j je ne sals %ue/fe. | Sifh 48 OF RELATIVE PR0K0UN3. 105. DoyT is of both genders and numbers, and is used when speaking of persons or things : it supplies the place of duquel, de laquelle^ desquels, desqiielleSj de quoij but is never used in asLing a question. Nott.—Dont is never used in asliinsr a question, tlint is— 3-0U ncv^r begin a ques* tlon with dont; t>ut, in tlie body of an Interrogative plirasc, the word is perieclly correct ; aa, Oil est la/emme dont vousparkit Wliero is tlic woman qf whom you ■peak? Examples of dont. ' /■ > 1 1 !• J * ( it is an i/lness, the >. J., fcest une maladie dont on) e ui\ ■ of which. < •* 1 -< cause, of which u *' ' ( ne connait pas la cause, j , '*""*• -i of whorr, I'hommo dont vous parlez, | ^^''J^^Jl^^ ''^°™ ^°" , f la nature dont nous igno- ( nature, whose secrets *^ ' * ' \ rons les secrets, \ are unknown to us. 106. Quit Qu^) quoi^ lequel, are called relative pronouns absolute, when they have no antecedent, and only pre- sent to the mind a vague and indeterminate idea. In this case qui is employed only in speaking of per- sons, que and quoi in speaking of things. Lequel marks a distinction, and is used in interrogative sentences, when asking which person or thing among several. EXAMPLES. qui, who, ^ whom, ' qui (quelle personne J est Ik? je ne sais qui est arriv^, 'qui appelez-vous ? ■ who is there f I don't know who arrived. whom do you calif 7uu que, what, ■< consultez qui vous vou- \ ^ u \, 1 J ^ ^ > consult vrhom you please. { je ne sais que faire, I don't know what to do. quoi, what, k quoi (a quelle c/dOseH what are you thinking pensez-vous? j ofi 2tw)i de plus aimable quel what /iisrs amiable than la vertu ? j virtue f ( lequel pr^f^rez-vous ? which do you prefer f lequel, m. which, •< choisispez lequel vous ) , , . , , ^ ' ' » - ^ >• choose which you please. { voudrez, quelle de mariee ? \&qne\]^f.which,(^''^^^^f^t^^'^'^'''^^^V''^'''^ ?/,^"'« «"^«^^ ^'« -» -»' >i iYinnppi> j married? OF lifiLATXVE rUOKOUMS. 49 and IS supplies gin a ques. 8 perrcctly ' tc/iom you 'ness, the which is fhom you je secrets on to us. ■onouna ily pro- of per- ogative among 107. Oi;' THE Relative Pronoun oii. OiJ is a relative pronoun wlicn used instead of lequelj laquelle, lesquels, lesquelleSj preceded by a preposition. This pronoun is employed only in speaking of things, and is of both genders and numbers. EXAMPLES. I/Instant ou nous naissons est un pa8 vers la mort (Voltaiue.) La niaison oO je demeure. (Acau.) Les pays par oC j'ai passd. The instant in which we are bom is a step towards death. The house in which / live. The countries through which 1 have passed. EXERCISE XXXIII. The man who reasons. ■ raisonne. The lady tvhom I see. — The dame vols. gciences to which he applies. — Here is the gentleman f. pi. s'appliqite. Void monsieur of whom you speak. — With whom do you live ? — What parlez. Avec demeurez-vous f (shall we do) to-day ? — Wliich (do you like) best of those ferons-nous anjourdhuif aimez-vous three pictures? — The child to whom everything yields tableau m. enfant m. tout cede is the most unhappy. — The state in which I find myself. malheureux. Hat m. me iroiive. 108. Op the Relative Pronoun en. who 7uu llf mplease. eking f lat to do, thinking hie than if erf \i please, isters is En, a pronoun of both genders and numbers, is some- i times used in speaking of persons, although it is chiefly | said of things, and places : its principal function is to avoid the repetition of a word or phrase already ex- pressed. It signifies of him, of her, of it, from ity of them, some of it, some of them, any, &c. examples. II aiine les auteurs frangals, il en parle souvent. Cette maladie est dangereuse, 11 pourrait en mourir. A-til des protecteurs ? oui, il en a de tr^s-puissants. Vous parlez d'argent, en avez- vous? oui, r en ai. He likes French aicthots, he often speaks of them. That illness is dangerous^ he might die of it. Has he any protectors 9 yes, he has some very powerful ones. You talk of money , have you any ? yes, I have some. 50 109. OF RELATIVE PRONOUNfl, Of the Relative Pronoun y. F, a pronoun of both genders a.^d numbers, is some- times employed with reference to p». rsons, but its use is almost strictly confined to things : it corresponds to tho English to him, to her, to it, to them, in it, in them, therein, &c. EXAMPLES. Je connais cet homme, jo no m'Y fie pas. II aime I'dtude et s'y livre euti^re- mcnt. J*ai re9U sa lettre, j'v rdpondrai. Vos rnisons sont bonnes, je m'y rends. J'y ai remarqud quelqucs fautes. / knoio that man, I do not trxitt to him. lie loves study, and devotes him' self entirely to it. / have received his letter^ I shall answer (to) it. Your reasons are good, J yield to tliem. I observed some faults in it, or in them. iC9- Some Orammarians class en and y amun{{ the personal pronouns. N.B. — The pronouns en and y are always placed before tho verb, except with an Imperative affirmative. ["See, in the Chapter on the Adverb, what is said upon y, adverb.] EXERCISE XXXIV. Read his letter, and tell me what you think of it. — Lisez lettre f. dites-moi ce que pensez Give me that, 1 (am in want) of it. — Are you going to Donnez-moi ai besoin Allez-vous Edinburgh? Icome/rowiiY (Here are) strawberries, will Edimhourg viens Void 32 fraise voulez you have any? — I will give you sotne. — Take some * donnerai Prenez more. — I consent to it. — Put your signature to it davantage. consens Mettez Those arguments are conclusive; I see no reply m. sont concluant n* vols point de repfique to them. — The undertaking is difficult, but you entreprise f. difficile mats (will succeed) in it. — They will gain nothing {by it), reussirez n' gagneront rien y OP INDKriNITE PRONOUNS, 51 110. § V. OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Some pronouns arc called Indefinite^ because they de- note persons or things in an indefinite or general manner. They are the following: ow, quiconque^ quelqu'unjChacuHf aiUrui, personne, l'u7i Vautre, Vun et V autre. 111. On, onc^ ihey^ we, peopky ity &c. On is a contrac- tion of tlio Latiii word homOy man. This pronoun is of very extensive iiso in the French language; it is em- ployed when speaking in general terms, without desig- nating any particular person : it has commonly a plural j meaning, but always requires the verb to be in the I third person singular. EXAMi'LES. On no peut lire T^^maque sans devenir nieilleur. On dit que nous aurons bientdt la paix. On pense que la nouvelle est vrale. One cannot read TelemacJms with- out becoming better. They, or people, saj/ we shall soon have peace. It is thought that ^ news is true. We learn better what we under- standf than what we do not. On apprend iriieux ce que Ton com- prend, que ce que Ton no com- prend pas. Remark. — For the sake of euphony, the pronoun on jf takes an I, with an apostrophe (1'), after the words eLsL n oiit que, qui, and qu oij as, Et /'on dit, Si /'on savait, Oil /'on veut, V instead of Ce que /"on comprend, Ceux & qui ton doit, However, on remains the same when the word follow -< in g it is Ift f l^f fir 1f« ; we say : et on le dit, si on le aavaitS and not et Von le dit, si Von le savait, ] L'on for on should never begin a sentence, althoughj some authors have not always observed this rule. ' " 112. QuicoNQUE, whoever, whosoever, any person what' ever. This pronoun has no plural, and is used only with reference to persons ; as. Whoever said so, has not spoken et on dit. si on savait. oU on veut. ce qu'on comprend. ceux & qui on duit. Quiconque A dit cela n'a pas dit la v6nti. C^uicon^ue me trompera sera puni. the truth. ^Vlioever deceives [j)umshed. jm shall ht 52 OF INDEFINITE PKONOUNS. Quiconque is generally masculine; however, when it evidently relates to a female, the adjective is put in the feminine; as, I Alcsuames, o'uiconque de vous sera assez hardie pour m^dire de moi, jo Ten ferai repentir. — (Acad.) Ladies, whoever of you shall 6« hold enough to speak ill of me, I will make Jier repent it. 113. QuELQu'uN, somebody, some one. EXAMPLES. J'attends quelqu*un. Quelqu'un me I'a dit. / wait for somebody Somebody told me so. This pronoun takes gender and number; thus:- Quelques-uns, m. pi. \ some, several, out of a Quelques-unes,/. pi. j QjuelqiCuu de ces messieurs. Quelqu^une de ces dames. Quelqu'un m'a dit. J'ai lu quelques-uns de ces livres. Connaissez-vous quelques-unes de ces dames ? Oui, j'en connais quelques-unes. 114. Chacun, w., Chacune, /., everi/ one, each; with* out plural. greater number. Some one of these gentlemen. Some one of these ladies. Somebody told me. I have read some of those hooks. Do you know any of those la- dies? Yes, I know some of them. Chacun vit d sa mani^re. Chacune de ces demoiselles. Every one lives after his own way. Each of these young ladies. Un chacun, much used by old writers, is now obsolete. [See page 55, what is said on chaque, every, each.] :i lis. AuTRUi, others, other people. (From the Latin Jalterius, gen. o^ alter, other.) This pronoun is masculine, // and has no plural ; it is generally preceded by a prepo- Y sition, and is used in speaking of persons only. La charity se r^jouit du bonheur d'autrui. Ne faites pas k autrui ce que vous lie voudriez pas qu'on vous fit. Charity rejoices in the happiness q/" others. Do not to others, what you would not wish others to do to you. 110. Personne. This pronoun is always masculine and singular. When it means no person, nobody, no one, it requires the negative ne before tl verb. of mt)EriNT)E PRONOrltS. bt EXAMPLES. 'Personne ne sera assez bardi. [ Nobody will be bold enough, Je n'ai vu personne. \ I have seen nobody. When personne is used v/ithout a negative in interro- gative sentences, and those expressing doubt and uncer-| tainty, it means ani/ person, any lody^ any one, EXAMPLES. Y a-t-il personne d'assez bardi ? Je doute que personne y rdus- fiisse. — (Acad.) Is there any body bold enough f I doubt whether any one will «mc- ceed in it Personne, as a noun, is always feminine, and is used ' both in the singular and plural ; it means a person^ a man or woman, people. EXATtPLES. C'est une personne de m^rite. C'est une personne trfes-instruite. Des personnes bien intentionn^es. He is a man of merit. She is a very weH-infovned person. Well-intentioned people. 117. L'UN l' AUTRE, 7n,., l'dNE l' autre, /. ; LEg UN8 LES AUTRES, m. pl.y LES oNES LES AUTRES, /. pi, / on€ another, each other. This pronoun is employed in speaking of persons and things. L^un Vautre is used with reference to two, and les uns les autres with reference to more than two. If there be any preposition, it mast be placed between Vun Vautre, and not before, as is the case in English before one another or each other. They praise one another. ' The soldiers excited one another. EXAMPLES, lis 86 louent Vun Vautre. Les soldats s*excitaient les uns les autres. lis parient mal Vun de Vautre. They speak ill of each other. 118. L'UN ET l'aUTRE, W., l'uNE ET l' AUTRE, /. ; LES UKS ET LES AUTRES, W1. pi., LES UNES ET LEP AUTRES, /. pi. ; the one and the otiier, loth, EXAifPLES. Vun et Vautre sont bons. [fa'.c. Vvne et Cautre rapportent le nif me ll3 se rdunissaient les uns ct les autres centre iVnnemi. Both are good. Koth relate the same iircum8tanc6. They all united agaoist the ene^ ■ny. 54 OF INDEFINITE PR0N0UN3 When Vun et V autre is followed by a noun, it is no longer an indefinite pronoun, but an adjective ; as, Vun et Vautre cheval, both horses ; Vune et V autre saison, both seasons; Vune et Vautre p^^mande, both requests. i^" Many Grammarians cl.ss Tel among the Inde- finite pronouns ; but it is a real adjective, and agrees in gender and number with a noun either expressed or understood ; as, une telle action, such an action ; de tels animaux, such' animals; tel [homme understood) rit aujourd'huij such as laughs to-day ; telle [femme under- stood) se eroit belle, such a onr thinks herself beautiful. [For any further explanation respecting the Pronouns, see the Syntax.] EXERCISE XXXV. One has often need of a (person inferior) to oneself. — a souvent besoin plus petit m. que sot. Tliey say^ he is learned — Govl (will punish) lohosoever dtt qu' est Diev punira transgresses his laws. — Somebody has taken my umbrella. — transgresse loi a pris parapluie m Every one (will read) in his turn. — ^We (must not) covet lira d tour m. II ne faut pas dlsirer the property of o^Aer people. — Pride becomes nobody, bien m. art. orgueilm. convient d EXERCISE XXXVI. Fire and water destroy each other I have attfeum. art. eau f.seditruisent ai read the Iliad and the ^neid, both have delighted me. — lu Iliade f. En4ide f. ont enchants People who have (little to do) are very great talkers; art. gens m. peu d'affaires de parleur the less one thinks, the more one speaks.— iiJcc/t of them resolved moins pense plus parte. risolut to live as a gentleman — He who chooses badly for himself, de vivre en * gentilhomme. * choisit soi chooses badly for others. — Some assert the contrary. assurent contraire m. OP INDEFINITE PRONOMINAT. ADJECTIVES. 55 IS no , Vun lISON, uests. have ai 1 19. OF INDEFINITE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. Wc shall treat hero of the indefinite pronominal adjec^ ttvesj on account of iheir affinity with tVe indefinite pro- nouns ; these adjectives are : chaque^ mdy aucun^ pas Mr», vieme^ plusieurs^ tout^ quelconque^ quel^ quelque. 120. CiiAQUE, everi/j each, is of both genders, and with- out plural. This word must not bo confounded with chacu7t; chaQue is always followed by a noun ; chacun, on the contrary, Is never joined to a noun (see page 62). EXAMPLES. Every age has its pleasures. Every science imb its principles, 121. NUL, W7., NULLE, /. ; AUCUN, m., AUCUNE,/. ; PAS u.^, Tw., PAS UNE, /. ; wone, no, no one, not one, not any. These expressions have nearly the same meaning when . accompanied by the negative ne placed before the verb. EXAMPLES. Nul homme n'cst parfait. Vous n'avez avcune preuve ; non, pas une. Chaque fige a ses plaisirs. Chaque science a ses principes. No man is perfect. You have no proof; no, not one. N.B. — No, in answer' to a question, is translated by non. 122. Meme, same^ self, like, alike; plural, hemes; of both genders. examples. Cest le mime homme, la mime personne. Lea ceudres du berger et du roi sont les mimes. It is the same man, the same person. The ashes of the shepherd and the king are alike. Meme is often placed after a substantive or a pronoun, to give more energy to the expression. examples. C'est la bontd mime. Le roi im-mime ai'y opposa. Nous le ferona noxxa-memes. She is kindness itself. Tie king himself opposed it. We tvill do it ourselves. Meme is also an adverb ; then it is irvariable, and means even, also. This is the etiam of the Latin. 56 OF INDEFINITES PftONOMlNAL ADJfiCTlVES. EXAMPLE. Les femmes et meme les enfants I Women and even children were fiirent tu(!s. | killed. 123. Plusieurs, severalj mani/. It Js of both genders and has no singular. EXAMPLES. Plusieurs historiens ont racontd. En plusieurs occasions. Plusieurs de vos amis. Several historians have related. On several occasions. Many of your friends. 124. Tout. There arc various kinds of this word. (1.) Tout^ indefinite pronominal adjective, meaning every ^ eachy any^ any one ; the quisque of the Latin. In tUis sense, tout never takes an article nor a pronoun, and is always singular. — Examples : Every citizen ought to serve his country. Every labour deserves a reward. Tout ^ citoyen doit servir son "pays. Toute peine m(5rite salaire (Ac.) (2.) Tout., adjective, all^ whole; in Latin, totuSj omnis : Tout le nionde ; toute la terre ; All the world; all the earth ; all tous les hommes. tnen. Tout rhomme ne meurt pas. The whole man does not die. (3.) Tout, adverb, quite^ entirely^ however; in Latin, o'inninb, plane : EUe fut tout dtonnde. I She was quite astonished. Nos vaisseaux sont tout prcts. | Our vessels are quite ready, tes- Tout adverb, becomes adjective, or at least agrees like one, in gender and number, when Immediately followed by an acUective or partic'jlf fpminino, be- ginnlng with a consonanti or h aspirate ; aa, ~' ' ""~ "" EUe 6tait toute changde. Elle en est toute honteuse. Toutes spirituelles qu'elles sont. Slie was c[uite altered. She is quite ashamed of it. Witty as they are. (4.) Toul^ substantive masculine, the whole; the totum of the Latin : Ne prenez pas le tout. ] , Do not take the whole. 125. Quelconque, whatever^ whatsoever. When used with a negative, it is nearly synonymous with nuly aucun; it is invariable, and is always placed after a noun ; as, II n'y a homme quelconque. I There is no man whatever. II n'y a raison quelconque. | There is no reason whatsoever. When used without a negative, it admits of a plural ; as, Deux points(7«efcongt(c«.-( Acad.) [ Two points whataoQyer. n en were genders related. ord. meaning in. In oun, and ► serve his I reward. », omnis : earth; all t die. n Latin, ihed. ready. gender and unialnc, be- r. of it. he totum Die. len used , aucitn ; i; as, ever, latsoever. ral; as, er. OF INDEnNlTE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 57 126. Quel, m., quelle,/./ quels, m. pl.^ quelles, /. pL, what. This pronominal adjective is used principally in interrogations and exclamations, or to express uncer- tainty and doubt. It is always followed by a noun ex- pressed or understood, with which it agrees in gender and number. examples. Quel mattre? — Quelle dame? Quels livres, quelles brochures lisez-vous ? Quel bonh ur I Qu£l horn me vous dtes I II ne sait quel parti prendre. J'ai des nouvellts k vous apprendre. — Quelles (nouvelles) sont-elles ? What master?— What ladt/f What books, what pamphlets do you read? What happiness ! What a man you are ! He knows not what course to take. I haoe news to tell you. — What is itf 127. QuELQUE, S.J quelques, pl.j somej is of both gen- ders, and is always joined to a noun. EXAMPLES. Quelque anteur en a parld. II y a quelques difficultds. Some author has mentioned it 'ITure are some difficulties. Quelque^ in this sense, corresponds to the aliquis of the Latin.— -(-4ca(f., and the modern Grammarians.) Quelque^ with que before the succeeding verb, means whatever. This is the quantuscunquej quantacunque of the Latin. examples. Qualque soin qu'f^n prenne. Quelque raison ^'il ait. Quelques efforts que vous fassicz. Whatever care one may take. Whatever reason he may have. Whatever efforts you may make. But should quelque be followed by the verb etrej to be, it is written in two words (quel que) / in this case, quel must agree in gender and number with the subject of the verb. This expression answers to the qualiscunque of the Latin. examples. QueRe que soit votre intention. Quels que soient vos desseins. ^ufiZfesqitcsoientvosvues. (Acad.) Whatever your intention may be. Whatever your designs may be. Whatever y-^ur views may be. 88 OF INDEFINITE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. QuelquBj followed by an adverb or an adjective witlioiit a noun, fa considered as an adverb, and is invariable ; it corresponds to the English however^ howsoever, and to the Latin adverb quantumvis ; as, Quelque bien dcrits que soient ces ouvrages, ils ont peu de succfes. Quelque puissants qu'ils soient, je ne lea crains point. — (Acad.) However well written these works may he, they have little success. However powerful thei/ may be, 1 do not fear them. Quelque, when immediately followed by a cardinal number, is also considered as an adverb ; then, it means about, nearly, some, and answers to the circiter of the Latin. In this sense, quelque is of the familiar style ; as, Alexandre perdit quelque trois cents hommes, lorsqu'il defit Porns. Alexander lost some three hundred men, when lie defeated Porus. EXERCISE XXXVn. Every country has its customs No one is dissatisfied with pays m. a coutume n'est mecontent de his own understanding. — No reason can justify a # jugement m. raison f. ne pent justifier le falsehood. — It is the same sun that (gives light to) all inensongem.. Cost ■ soldi m. qui eclair e the nations of the eartli. — It is virtue itself. — ^Divide the f. pi. terrc f. art. vertu f, Divisez whole into several parts. — The whole fleet is at sea. — Every en partie * ^ flottef. est en mcr. truth (is not) proper (to he told) — Any pretext whatever. veritH. n'est pas bon a dire. Un pretexte m. EXERCISE XXXVIII. No one is satisfied with his fortune, nor dissatisfied with his n' content de f. ni own wit. — No road of flowers conducts to glory.— * esprit m. cheminm. ne conduit art. 78 What lesson have you learnt ? — (There are) some defects in leponf.avez- apprise? II y a defaut dans that picture. — Whatever your talents (may Ir you tableau m. m. pi. soient (will not succeed) without appUcation — She is quite wet. — ne reussirez pas sans mouillie. These ladies were quite surprised to see him. furent surprises de Hoir OF THE VERB. 59 CHAPTER V. OF THE VERB. 128. French Verbs are divided into fivf; kinds : ActivCy Passive^ Neuter, Pronominal, and Lvpei'sorial, or rather Unipersonal, besides the two Auxiliary Verbs, avoir, to have, and etre, to be. There are four Conjugations in French, which arc distinguished by the termination of the Present of the Infinitive. The first ends in er, as, parler, to speak. ... second ... ir, ...Jinir, to finish. ... third ... fourth OIR, "ecevoir, to receive. re, vendre, to sell. In each of these Conjugations, there are regular, ir- regular, and defective verbs. ( A verb is called regular, when all its tenses t^ke ex- actly the terminations of one of the four model conjuga- tions, which are inserted hereafter in their proper places. A verb is called irregular, when, in some of its tenses, it takes terminations different from those of the conju- gation to which it belongs ; and it is termed defective, when it is not used in some tenses or persons. As the compound tenses of all verbs are formed by the help of avoir, to have, and etre, to be, for which reason these two are called auxiliary verbs, they take precedence of the four principal Conjugations, instead of being classed among the irregular verbs to which they belong. " It may not," says Lindley Murray, " be generally proper for j'oung persons beginning the study of gframmar, to commit to memory all the tenses of the verbs. If the simple tenses be committed to memory, and the rest carefully perused, the business will not be tedious to the scholars, and their progress will be rendered more obvious and pleasing." Without wishing to dictate any particular method of tuition, we think the preceding remark of the celebrated English Grammarian peculiarly applicable to the learning of French verbs. Let the scholar be first made familiar with the simple tenses, and he will find the rest an ex- tremely easy task. The most part of Anglo-French Grammarians mix the simple and compound tenses ; in this Grammar they are kept separate, but pre- sented at one view, side by side ; so that while the student is learning a simple tense, he also fonns an acquaintance with its compound. eo AUXILIARY VEHn AVOIR. 129. CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB A VOIR, TO HAVE. PRESENT. Avou, to have. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. Ayant, having. INFINITIVE. VAST. I Avoir cu, to have had. COMPOUND OP PARTICIPLE PRESENT. I Ayant eu, having had. PARTiCffLE PAST,— Eu, m., eue,/., had. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. I'llESENT. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. J'ai,* J have. J'ai eu, I have had. 1 tu as, thou hast. tu as eu, thou hast had. il, or elle a, he, or she has. il a eu, he has had. nous avons, we have. nous avons eu, we have had. vous avez,t you have. vous avez eu, yoti have had. ils, or elles ont, tliey have. ilf ont eu, they have had. IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. J'avais, I had. J'avais en, I had had. tu avals, thou hadst. tu avais eu, thou hadst had. il avait. he had. il avait eu, he had had. nous avions, v : had. nous avions eu. we had nod. vous aviez. you had. vous aviez cu, you had had. ils avaient, they had. ils avaient en. they had had. PRETERITE DEFINITE. PRETERITE ANTERIOR. J'eu8,:{: I had. J'eus eu, I had had. tu eu£>, thov hadst. ta eu3 eu. thou hadst had. il out; he. had. il eut eu, he had had. nous e&me3.§ ice had. nous eftmes eu, we had had. vous eutes,§ you had. vous eates eu. you had had. ils eurent, they had. ils ourent eu, they had had. « We wrlte/at, nnd pronounco^'6. J All tho second persons plaral of the situple tenses end with z or s— with;;, when the preceding e '« pronounced with tho soim'. of a In the English alphabet ; as, vous avez, vous parliez—&nA with s, whca the same i Is r.c»t pronounced at all ; as, vous eiltes, vous /cites, Ac, J J^eus is pronounccd/tt. f Thn. first and second person plural of tlie Preterite Liflnite of all verbs *akc A circumflex accent over tlie vowel that t iininatcs the Inst syllable but ons 'I AUXILIAUY VKHB AVOTR. 61 Simple Tenses. FUTURE ABSOLUTE. Compound 'Tenses. BUTURB ANTERIOR. J'aurai, tu auras, il aura, I10U3 aurons, V0U3 aurez, ils auront, I shall have, thou shah have, he shall have, we shall have, you shall have, they shall have. J'aurai eu, tu auras eu, il aura eu, nous aurons eu, V0U3 aurez eu, ils auront eu, / sJiall thou shall he shall tee shall you shall they shall CONDITIONAL. J'aurais, tu aurais, il aurait, nous aurions^ V0U9 auriez, Us auraient, PRESENT. J should have. thou shouldst have, he should have. I we should have, you should have, they should have. J 'aurais eu, tu aurais eu, il aurait eu, nous aurions eu, vous auriez eu, ils auraient eu, PAST. / should thou shouldst he should we should you should they should IMPERATIVE. Aie, qu'il ait, ayons, ayez, qu'ils aient, Save (thou), let him have., let us have, have (ye), let them have. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. PRETEBITE. Quej'alc, que tu ales, qu'il alt, que nous ayons, que vous ayez, qu'Us aient, That I may >. that thoumayst \ that he may §■ that tee may 52 that you man I that they may j Que J'ale eu, que tu ales eu, qu'il ait eu, que nuus ayons cu, que vous ayez eu, qu'ils aient eu, r I ) That 1 may y that thou ntayst g" that he may ^ that we may ^ that you may ^ thcU they may j mPKBFECT. PLUFKKFECT. »— with if, when 1 alphabet ; as, accd at all ; as, iH verbs *ako A )ut onfl Que j'eusse, que tu eusscs, qu'il eQt,4s que nous eusslons, (jue vous eusslez, qu'ils eussent, That I might -. that thou mightst \ that he might g* that we migiU <£ that you might I that Viey might J Que j'eusse eu, que tu eusses eu, qu'il efit eu, que nous eussions cu, que vous eusslez eu, qu'Us eussent cu,t That I might "y that thuu migkut g" that he might | that we might $• that you might % that they might } » The third person singular of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive of all verbs takes a clrcnraflex accent over the vowel that precedes the final ^; as, qu'il exit, qu'U ehantdt, qWUfinit, qu'il ctcCt, &c. t By omitting que, this tense is also used for the Conditional paet. 62 EXERCISES ON A VOIR* 130. Remark I. In the following Exercises, the noun being used in a partitive sense, it will be necessary to place before the noun either du^ de la, de V, or f/e«, ac- cording to the directions given, Rule III., page 16. EXERCISE XXXIX. INDICATIVE. Pres.— I liave money. —He has wealth argent ni. bien m. She has patience and sweetness — We have relations and f. douceur f. parent frIendH You have gold a id silver. — Tliey have ambition ami or m. argent ra. m. f. and perseverance.— They have pomegranates and pineapples. persSvirance f. f. grenade f, ananas m. Imperf. — We had umbrellas and clopks. — You had pnrnpimem, manteaum. muskets, rifles, pistols, and artillery. — They had fusil m. carabine f . pistolet m. artillene f. Bwords, lances, pikes, pitchforks, bows, and arrows. epeet 1 piquet', fourchet'. arc lu. flechei. Preterite Defin. — I had strawberries — She had raspberries. fraise f. framboise f. We had gooseberries.— You had cherries.— They had grapes. groseille f. cerise f. f. raiainm. EXERCISE XL. w Peter has talent and experience.' — You have courage and Pierre m. experience f. m. firmness John and James have walnuts and filberts. ^ — Jane fermeti f. Jean Jacques noix f. aveline f . Jeanne had prudence and riches. — He has had good luck — We ind-2 f. richessei^X. bunheurm. shall have soup or fish. — Andrew shall have oranges and soupei'. poissonm. AndrS f. lemons. — Louisa and Martha shall have figs and plums citron m. 79 79 jigue f. prune f. That we may have had snow, raiii, and wind. — Having neige f. pluie f. vent m. eyes, see ye not? Having ears, hear ye not? 40 nevoyez- point? preillef. n'entendez-" EXERCISES ON AVOI^. 68 131. Remark II. — The addition of an adjective, after the noun, makes no difference as to the use of dii^ de la^ de l\ dee. But, the adjective must agree with the noun, in gender and number. — Soo Rules, p. 20 and 25. • EXERCISE XLI. INDIO. Pres.— I have red ^rouge just ideas. — We have ripe pears You have sincere friends. ^juate Hdief. ^mUr^poirei. Sincere * —Margaret and Sophia have g-reen parasols and purple shawl^i. Marguerite Sophie ^vert ^ m. ^violet 'chdlem. ink. —She has clear and ^encre f. ^clair FuT. Abs. —We shall have white curtains. — You will have ^blanc hideaum. true and real pleasures. — They will have new houses. 'vrui h6el ^plaisirm. hieuf ^maisonf. SUBJ. PiiES. — In order that I may have ready money— Afin ^comptant ^ Thai vou may have enlightened judges and faithful servants. 'eclaire \jugem. yidele ^domestique 132. Remark III. — But, if the adjective comes lefore the noun, then, only de^ or d\ is to be used before the adjective, instead of du^ de la, de /', des, without any regard to the gender or number of the noun. I have some good snuff. — He has good brandy, and ex- 47 tahac m. eatb-de-vie f. celleut wine. — We have beautiful walks in our town 77 vinin. beau promenade t dans She had great qualities. — ^We shall have had long sufferings iud-2 grand qualitif. 68 souffrancet. I should have tine pictures and pretty engravings. — ^You would 58 tdbleaum. joli gravuref. have great advantages — That you may have good reasons to avantage m. raison f. give him. — Have you not better pens to lend me?— . donner lui N' pas 70 plume f. d priter 1 have very good pens, but bad ink, and bad paper. ires mais mauvaii papier m. 64 EXERCISE ON AVOJJL lUcapitulatory ExiiucisE upon the three foregoing Remarks, lie liaa credit, i)ower, authoritv, a;id riches. — We cridit ra. puissance f. autoritei. richesse f. pi. shall have wine,, beer, and cider.— Let ua have politeness biere f. cidrc m. politesse f. We have white bread, delicate meat, and delicious wines.— 'blanc ^painm.'^delicat^vianaef. ^delicieux * That they may have prepossessing manners. — She has excelleufc ^privmant ^manih'ef. qualities. — They have small aj)ricots, but large peaches. peiii abricol m. yros pkhc f. 133. CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ETllE, TO BE. INFINITIVE. PRESENT. Etre, to be. PAIITICIPLE PRESENT. Etanti being. PAST. I Avoir dtd, to have been. COMPOUND OF PARTICIPLE PRESENT. I Ayant dtd, having been. PARTICIPLE PAST.— !fet($,* been. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Je suis, tu ea, il, or elle est, nous sorrmes, vous 6tes, ils, or elles sont, I am. thou art. lie, or she is. we are. you are. they are. Compound Teases. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. J'ai 4t4, tu as 6t6, il a dtd, nous avons ^t^, vous avez 4t6y ils out dtd, I have been, thou hast been, he has been, we have been, you have been, they have been. IMPERFECT. J'dtais, / was. tu ^tais, thou wast. il dtait, he was. nous dtions, we were. vous €tiez, you were. Ua ^talent, they were. PLUPERFECT. J'avais dt^, / had been. tu avals 4t4, il avait dtd, nous avions 6t4, vous aviez did, ils avaient 6t6, thou hadst been, he had been, we had been, you had been, they had been. Jt,ti ncvef clianjfcs Its termination. .'ix. MWHUaMM AUXILIARY VEKB Simple Tenses. I'RETEBITE DEFINITE. Je Tufi, / was, tu fu9, thou wast. il fut, fie was. I10U9 fiimefl, we were. vous fQtcs, you were. iU furent, they were. FUTURE AUSOLUTE. iTKE. . Compound Tenses PRETERITE ANTKRIOR. 65 J*eus 6t4, tu eus ^t^, il eut 6t6, nous edmea 6i6, vous edtes ^t^, Us eurcnt ^t^, / had been, thou hadst been, he had been, we hud been, you had been, they had been. FUTURE ANTKRIOR. Jc serai, tu seras, il sern, nous serouji, vous serez, Us seront, / shaft be. tfiou sfiuh be. he sfiafl be. we sfiall be. you sfiall be. they sfiall be. ^CONDITIONAL J'aurai dtd, / sfiall fiave tu auras 4t6, thou sfialt have il aura ^td, fie shall hai^e nous aurons did, we shall fuivERF. — I was uneasy ^Mary was tall. — She was prudent f. 48 Marie grand and discreet. — Her manners were full of dignity ^We were 48 manieref. plein 78 f. all present when the thing happened. — They were absent. taut lorsque chose f. arriva. m. Pret. Dep The country was not ungrateful to him. patrief.ne point mgrat envers —The ides of March were fatal to Julius Geesar. — f. mars Jules Cisar. Pret. Iin>EF. — Your aunts have always been good and ioujours charitable L-'^'es, you have not been disinterested enough. Mesdames, n* pa^ ^disinteressi ^assez EXERCISE XLHI. Pluperf ^he had been too hasty. ^We had been idle prompt paresseux and prodigal. — They had been economical and temperate. prodigue iconome sobre FuT. Abs. — His memory will be immortal. — ^We shall bo mSmoire f. ir.imortel f. •ttentive and more diligent. — They will be very glad to see you. plus bien aise devoir , Fur. ANT.-^She will have been proud, whimsical, and jealous. 48 fa/ntasque jaloux *-They will have been very much pleased and very grateful, f. ires * satisfait reconnaissani IMPERA — ^Let us be poor in gold, and rich in virtues. pauvre en riche — Rich people, be humane, kindhearted, and generous. m. pi. humain iendre ginercux /* OF BEOULAR VERBS. 67 OF REGULAR VERBS. PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS. 135. (1.) There are, in French, as we have already said (No. 128), but four conjugations, because all verbs terminate in the Present of the Infinitive, in one of four different manners : in er^ ir, oir, or re, 136. (2.) To coajugate, with greater faciillty, one verb by another, it is necessary to observe, that in all verbs there are radical andjinal letters. The first are like the root of the verb, and contain its meaning : these never change throughout all the different tenses and persons. The final letters constitute the termination of the verb, and vary according to tenses, and persons. Thus, in parler, to speak, the termination common to all verbs of the first conjugation being er^ the radical letters are pari, 137. (3.) Among the simple tenses of a verb, there are five which serve to form all the others, and on that account are colled primitive: these are, the Present of the Infinitive, the Participle present, the Participle past, the Present of the Indicative, and the Preterite definite, 138. From the Present of the Infinitive are formed : — 1st, The Future absolute, by changing r, air, or re, into rai ; as, Parler, je parlerai ; Finir, je finirai ; Becevoir, je recevrai; Vendre,je vendrai, 2d, The Conditional present, by changing r, oir, or re, into rais ; as, Parler, je parlerais ; Finir, je finir ais ; Becevoir, je recevrais ; Vendre, je vendrais. Some Grammarians fom the Conditional present, by adding an « to the Future, which is f he simplest way, when the Future is known. 139. From the Participle present are formed : — Ist, The three persons plural of the Present of the In- dicative, by changing ant into ons, ez, ent ; as, Parlant, nous parlons, vous parlez, ils parlent ; Finissant, nous finissons, vous finissez, ils finissent, &c. Exception — Verbs of the Third Conjugation form the third person plural of the Present of the Indicative, from the first person singular of the same tense, by changing 5 into vent ; as, Je re^ois, ils rcfoivent. K 68 OP REGULAR VERBS. 2c/, The Imperfect of the Indicative, by changing ant into aw; as, Parlant, je parlais; Finissant, Je j/inissais; Becevantyje recevais; Vendant^je vendais. Bdy The Present of the Subjunctive, by changing ant into e; &3, Parlant, que je parte; Finissant, que je finisse ; Vendant, queje vende. E^riKPTioy Verbs of the Third Conjugation form only the first and second persons plural from the Participle present , as, Becevant, que nous recevions, que vous receviez. The others are formed from the first person singular of the Present of the Indicative, by changing s into ve; as, Je re^ois, que je reyoive, que tu regoives^ qu'il regoive^ qu'ils regoivent. 140. From the Participle past arc formed all the com- pound tenses, by means of the auxiliary verbs avoir and etre ; as, avoir parte, j^aijini, j'avais requ, faurai vendu. 141. From the Present of the Indicative is formed the Imperative, by omitting the pronouns ; as, je parley parte ; nous finissons, finissons ; vous recevez, recevez, 142. From the Preterite definite is formed the Imper- fect of the Subjunctive, by changing ai into asse for the first conjugation; as, jeparlai, que je parlasse ; and, by adding se for the three others ; tLS,je finis, que je finisse ; je requs, queje requsse ; je vendis^ queje vendisse, 143. TABLE OF THE PRIMITIVE TENSES OF REGULAR VERBS. iNFiNirrvi I'reacnt Participu Present Pabticiplb rast. iNDICATTVX Present rRETERm Definite. Parl-er. | rillST CONJUGATION. T&rl-ant. | Parl-^. j Je parl-e. Je parl-a». Fin-iV. 1 SECOND CONJUGATION. Yin issant. \ Fin-t. | Je fin-M. 1 Je fin-is. Rec-ci'oiV. 1 TfllKD CONJUGATION. Rcc-cron^ | RC9-M. Jc ro^-ow. Je raq-us. Yen-dre. FOUUTII CONJUGATION. Yen-dant. | Ven-rfw. | Je ven-tfe. Je ven-e/w. ^ FIRST CONJUaATIOK UV ER. 69 144. § 1. CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. An Active verb expresses an action done by the sub- ject, and has an object, either expressed or understood. In this phrase : Jean aime DieUj John loves God, Jean is the subject, aime the verb active, and Dieu the object. MODEL OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN EH. U5. PAELERj TO speak. INFINITIVE. PRESENT. PAST. Parler, to speak. \ Avoir parld, to have spoken PARTICIPLE PRESENT. COMPOUND OF PART. PRESENT. Parlant, speaking. | Ayant parld, having spoken. PARTICIPLE PAST Parld, spokcn. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Je parle, .tu paries, il parle, nou3 parlons, reus parlez, ils parlent, / speak. * thou speakest. he speaks, we speak, you speak, they speak. o ■ J IMPERFECT. Je parlais, tu parlais, il parlait, uous parlions, you3 parliez, ils parlaient, PRETERITE Je parlai, tu parlas, il parla, nous parlamefl, yous parlates, ils parlerent, ,,, I was thou wast he was we were you were they were I. J DEFINITE. / spoke, thou spokest. he spoke, we spoke, you spoke, they spoke. Compound 'Tenses. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. J'ai parle, / have tu as parl^, thou hast il a parld, he has nous avons parl^, we have vous avez parle, you have ils out parte, they have PLUPERFECT. J'avais parl^, I had -^ tu avais parle, thou hadst ^ il avait parle, he had o nous avious parle, we had §* vous aviez parle, you had ? ils avaient parle, they had ^ PRETERITE ANTERIOR. J'eus parl^, I had "j tu cus parl^, thou hadstA il eut parle, he had o nous cumes parl^, we had « yous elites parle, you had -^ ils eureut parld, they had ' \J * I speak, I do speak, or, I am ipeakiiiK. See N. B. p. 279. 70 FIRST CONJUGATION IN ER Simple Tenses, FUTUHE ABSOLUTE. Je parlerai, I shall tu parleras, thou shalt il parlera, he shall nous parlerons, we shall vous parlerez, you shall ils parleront, they shall L?9 Cor.ipoand Tenses. FUTURE ANTERIOR. J'aurai parle, tu auras parl^, il aura parld, nous aurons parl^, vous aurez parld, lis auront parld, r •§ CONDITIONAL. PRESENT. Je parlerais, I should ] tu parleraiSj, thoushouldstl il parlerait,^ he should ^ nousparlerions,we should ^ vous parleriez, you should 'i ils parleraient, they should J PAST. J'aurais parM, tu aurais parld, il aurait parld, nous aurions par' 5j vous auriez parld, ils auraient parld, ^1 IMPERATIVE Parle, qu'il parle, parlons, parlez, qu'ils parlent, Speak (thou), let him speak, let us speak, speak (you), let them speak. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je parle, que tu paries, qu'il parle, que nous parlions, que vous parliez, qu'ils parlent, IMPERFECT. Que je parlasse, que tu parlasses, qu'il parlat, que nous parlassions, que vous parlassiez, qu'ils parlassent. 0* 1 •^1 PRETERITE. Que j'aie parld, que tu aies parld, qu'il ait parld, que nous ayons parld, que vous ayez parld, qu'ils aient parld. PLUPERFECT. OB ** 1-3 1 a : Que j'eusse parld, que tu eusses parld, qu'il ciit parld^ ^ que nous eussions parld, *f^ que vous eussiez parld, qu'ils eussent parld, •" ?^ EXERCISES ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 71 146. Conjugate in the same manner all the regular Verbs terminating in er / as, Accepter, chanter, chercher, danser, demandei'i. donner, dviter, io accept, to sing, to seek, io dance, to ask. to give, to avoid. fermer, flatter, garder, louer, montrer, porter, raconter. to shut, io flatter, to keep, io praise, to show, to carry, io relate. EXERCISE XLIV. INDICATIVE. Present.— I study geogr&phj and etudier art. giographief. histoiy. — He dines at five o'clock. — We admire the art. hisfciref.hm. diner heure admirer beauty of that landscape. — You forffive your enemies.— beautef. pay sage m. paraonnerct ennemi Your brothers and sisters sing and dance very well. 91 I&iPERF. — I was accusing my friend. — He was listening accuser ami ecouier attentively. — We were blaming our neighbours. — You were attentivem^nt. hldrr^r voisin propo.ung a salutary advice ^They were praising your prudence proposer ' ^avism. ' f. —The ancient Peruvians worshipped the sun. ancien Peruvien adorer soleilm. EXERCISE XLV. pRET. Def. — ^I ai]proved his action She sung two or three approuvcT 93 — f. songs. — He borrowed money. — ^We declined his ofter chanson emprunter 32 argent m. refuser 93 offre f. You rewarded the servant. — They declared war. recompofiser domestique m. declarer art. guerre f. pRET. Indep. — I have surmounted all the difficulties. — He surmonier tout difficultif. has ofiended his Majesty ^We have bought an estate. — They offenser McyeatSf. acheter terref. haveconsideredthe justice of his demand. — At all times, consid^er f. demandef. Dans art. gold has been looked upon as the most precious metaL art regarder comme des pi. 72 EXERCISES ON THE FlUST CONJUGATION. EXERCISE XLVI. Pluperf I had asked his consent. — The queen had demander consentement m. manifesteu her displeasure. — We had consulted men montrer micontentement m. consulter 32 of honour. — You had emptied the bottle. — They honneur h m. vider houteille f. had repaired the house. -— He had tuned my piano. reparer maison f. accorder — m. FuT. Absol. — I shall cross the river. — She will travel traverser riviere f. voyager with ua. — "We will breakfast with you. — You will shut the avec dejeuner fermer shutters. — They will bring letters and newspapers. volet m. ■ • apporter ,32 lettre {. 32 journal m. CONDIT. Present.— I would expbin the rule.— He would , expliqiier regie f. avoid his company. -^ She would prepare the ball dresses. — compagniet preparer habit dehaU We would walk faster. —They would' gaiu the victory. marcher plus vite. remporter victoiref. EXERCISE XLVn. IMPERATIVE— Give me his address and yours Let ua Donner adresse f. frequent good company.— James, carry thin letter to the friquenter art. porter .^ettrei. . pcst-office. — Ask, and it shall be ^iven you; soek, and you ^' poste f. on . ind-7 shall find; knock, and it shall be opened unto you. trouver f rapper on ouvrira • SUBJ. Present. — That I may re-enforce my party. — That r enforcer parti m.. he may appease his anger That you may f nd ' friends. . apaiser colere f. de9 Ijiperf— That I might prove the truth. —That she mighv, prouver vSriiS /. remain in town. — Thri they might takd advantage of the rester en ville. profiter circumstances. — That you might jmitate his conduct- circonstance f. imiter conduitef. SECOND CONJUGATION IN IR. tit MODEL OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN IR, 147. . FINIR* TO FINISH. Finir, INFINITIVE. PRESENT. PAST. io finish. \ Avoir fini, to have finished. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. COMPOUND OF PART. PRESE^T. Finiasant, finishing. \ Ayantfini, having finished. PARTICIPLE PAST Fini, finished. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. INDICATIVE. PRESENT. Je finis, I finish. tu finis, . tnoufmishest. il finit, he finishes. nous finissons, we finish. V0U3 finissez, you finish. ilsfinissent, • they finish. .' PRETERIFE INDEF/NITE. J'ai fini, . / have finished. tu as fini, thou hast finished. il a fini, ^ he has finished. nous avons fini, we have finished. vous avez fini, youhavefinished. ils out fini, they have finislied* i I: J . IMPERFECT. Je finiasais, / wa^ tu finissais, thou wast il finissait, he was noiis finissions, we were yous finissiez, you were ils finissaient, they were PRETERITE DEFINITE. Je fir IS, I finished. tu finio, thoujlnishedst. il finit, " he finished. nous finimes, wefinishci. yous finites, you finished. ils finirent, 1 hey finished. FUTURE ABSOLUTE. Je finirai, I shall finish. tu finiras, thou shalt finish. il finira,^ he shall finish. nousfinironSjioe shall finish. yous finirez, you shall finish. ils finiront, they shall finish. PLUPERFECT. J'avais fini, tu avais fini, il avait fini, nous avions fini, vous aviez fini, ils avaient fini, I had thou hadst he had we had you had they had J PRETERITE ANTERIOR. J'eus fini, tu eus fini, il eiit fini, nous eumes fini, vous eutes fini, lis eurent fini. / had -J thou hadst % he had we had you had ? they had J FUTURE ANTERIOR. J'aurai fini, 7 shall have ^ tu auras fini, thou shalt have'itt il aura fini, he shall have |. nous aurons fini, w« sJiall have «* VOUS aurez fini, you shall have ^ ils auront fini, they shall have J * Tho final R of the Infinitive of tbe 2d Conjugation is always sounded. 7A SECOND CONJUaATlON IN /A. Simple 2'enses. Compound Tenses, CONDITIONAL. iUESENT. Je finirais, I should tu finirais, thou shouldst il finirait, he should nous finirions, we should V0U8 finiriez, you should ils finiraieut, they should I J J'aurais fini, PAST. 1, I should ^ tu aurais fini, thoushoiddst 'g " "^ 8 il aurait fini, he should rousaurioDsfini,t{>£ should V0U8 auriez fini, you should ils auraient fini, they sucdd Finis, Su'U fiuisse, nissons, finissez, qu'ils finissent. IMPERATIVE. Finish (thou), let himjinish. let us finish, finish (you), let them finish. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. PRETERITE. Quejefiaisse, That I may "^ "e tu finisses, that thou mayst*}^^ qu'il finissej that he may s que nous finissions, that we may quevousfinissiez, that you may j qu'ils finissent, that they may J Que j'aie fini, que tu aies fini, qu'il ait fini, que nous ayons fini, que vous ayez fini, • qu'ils aient fini, BIPERFEOT. Que je finisse, que tu finisses, qu'il finit, que nous finissions, que vous finissiez, qu'ils finissent, PLUPERFECT. Que j'eusse fini, que tu eusses fini, qu'il eiit fini, que nous eussions fini, que vous eussiez fini, qu'ils eussent fini. 148. Conjugate in the same manner :- Abolir, ndoucir, aliermii*, agir, applaudir, avertir, b4tir, choisir, demolir, divertir, cmbellir, emp)ir, to abolish, to soften, to strengthen, to act. to applaud, to warn, to build, to choose, to demolish, to divert, to embellish, tofill. enrichir, j^tablir, fl>5chir, fournir, franoliir, fr^mir, garaniir, gudrir, nourrir, a obeir, punir, r^iissir, &c. to enrich, to establish, to soften, tofui-nish. to leap over, to shudder, to warrant, to cure.^ to nourish, to feed to obey, to punish, to succeed, (xa. \ I fXERCISES OM THE SECOND CONJUGATIOK. 75 enseb: mid ^ \shoiildst I lould % lould 2 should * ' Sucdd ITE. sfiui, SS JT. HI, la h. liah. I. 9h. ver. ler. mt. K to feed i i EXERCISE XLVm. INDICAT. PiUiS.— 1 shudder when I tliiiik (of it).-He quand "penser ^y fulfils his promise. — Your sister enjoys good remplir promessef. jouir d ^ health. — You act as a master. — They punis th idlers. santSf. en * niaitre. paresseux Imperp. — I was tarnishing' a picture. — i "^ ms climbing vernir tableau m. gramr the hill. — They were building a bridge d fortifications. colline f. bdtir pont m. 32 f. PiiET. Dep I warned my sister of her danger. — You averiir m. chose a pretty colour. — They succeeded in their undertaking.— jolt couleur f. reussir entreprise f. That victory strengthened him on his throne. trdne m. EXERCISE XLIX. Pret. Indef. — I have chosen it (out of) a thousand. — entre • He has enriched science with new discoveries. — You enrichir art. f. de nouveau dScouverte f. * have grown tall. — The greatest empires have perished. grandir m. pirir Fret. Ant. — I had done before him. — Wlien he had finir avant lui. Quand filled his pockets with pears and apples, he went away. remplir poche de poire de pomme s'en alia. Pluperp. — That merchant had supplied this house marchand m. fournir maison f. with wine. — The king had ennobled him. — They had disobeyed de anoblir disolHr my orders. — He had warranted my watch for six months. a ordrem. moniret mois. EXERCISE L. Put. Absol. — I will search into that aflFair. — That vnll approfondir affaire f. cure him — ^We will rebuild our country-house. — I hope gui 'r 87 rebdtir maison de campagne. espirer ^ou will succeed.— They will obey the laws of the country. ?f^^ riussir obitrd loit paysm. 76 EXERCISES ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION. Fl'T. Ant. — I shall have finished my exercise before dinner theme m. avant diner. That bad news will have cooled his ardour. nouvelle f. r^roidir 93 ardeur f. CONDIT. Pre8 I would mitigate the punishment adouoir punition f. If he (were to do) that good action. everybody would faisait 1. tout le monde 'applaud *him. — lie would stun the neighbourhood. applaudir lui itourdir voisinage m. EXERCISE LI. IMPERATIVE Let us banish vice and cherish bannir art. — m. chirir virtue Act as a man of honour. — Choose of the art. vertuf. en * honneur]\7n. two. — Reflect for a moment. — Blush with shame. Rejl6chir • m. rougir de honte h asp. SUB J. Pres. — That I may accomplish my design. — That accomplir dessein m. you may establish communications between these two towns. Uahlir 32 entre Impere That she might match the colours. — That you assortir couleur f. might enjoy your glory That they might soften his heart. jouirde gloire. attendrir ccBurm. EXERCISE LII. That we might have fathomed that mystery. — That they approfondir mysterem. might liave fed the poor, and cured the sick. — All pauvre pi. malade pi. Tout that we build is of short duration. — Let liim bless ce que court durie f. hinir art. Providence. — God will punish the ungrateful. — I shall finish f. Dieu ingrat m. pi. my translation this evening. — I have converted him. —■ That traduction f. soir m. convertir town was swallowed up by an earthquake. — The engloutir un tremhlement de terre. torpedo benumbs the hand of him who touches it. iorpillef. cugourdir celui toucher THIRD CONJUGATION IN OJH. 77 MODEL. OF THE THIRD CONJUQATIOJS IN OIR. 149. BEC^VOIIiy TO RECEIVE. INFINITIVE. rilESENT. Recevoir, to receive. rARTICLPLE PRESENT. Recevant, receiving. PAST. I Avoir rc9u, to have received COMPOUND OF PART. PKESENT. I Ayant re5u, having received. PARTICIPLE PAST.— Re^u, received. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. INDICATIVE. PRESENT. Je 1 e^ois, tu re9ois, il reyoit, nous recevons, V0U8 recevez, lis reyoiventi / receive, thou receivest. he receives, we receive, you receive, they receive. IMPERFEOT. Je recevais, tu recevais, il recevait, nous recevions, vous receviez, I was thou wast he was we were you were ila recevaient, they were ) PRETERITE DEFINITE. Je reyus, tu reyus, il reyut, nous reyumes, yous refutes, ils reyurent, I received, thou receivedsl. he received, we received, you received, they received. FUTURE ABSOLUTE. Je rocevrai, tu recevras, il recevi'a, nous reecvrons, yous recevrez, ila recevront, / shall thou shall he shall we shall you shall they shall \ J PRETERITE INDEFINITE. J'ai regu, tu as reyu, il a reyu, nous avons reyu, vous avez reyu, ils ont reyu, I have thou hast he has we have ^ you have «« they have ) s i PLUPERFECT. J'avaisreyu, J had ") tu avals reyu, thou hadst ^ il avait rcgu, he had ^ nous avions reyu, we had vous aviez reyu, you had ils avaieut reyu, they had PRETERITE ANTERIOR J'eus reyu, / had tu eus reyu, thou hadsi il eut reyu, he had nous ei^mes reyu, we had yous e(ites reyu, you had ils eurent reyu, they had FUTURE ANTERIOR. J'aurai regu, I shall tu auras regu, thou shall il aura reyu, he shall nous aureus regu, we shall yous aurez regu, you shall ils auront regu, they shall p. 78 THIRD CONJUGATION IN OIR. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenset. CONDITIONAL. PRESENT. Je recevraia, / should ^ tu recevraia, thou shouldst ^ il recevrait, he should nous recevriona, we should voua recevricz, you should ils receyraient, they should PAST. J'aurais re9U, I should w tu aurais re9U, thou shouldst | il auruit re9U, he should ;; nous aurions requ,tDe should § Tous auriez re^u, you should §* ils auraient reyu, they should^ IMPERATIVE. Re^oia, qu'il re9oive, recevona, recevez, qu'ila re9oivent, Receive (thou), let him receive, let us receive, receive (you), let them receive. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je re9oive, que tu re^oiyes, qu'il re90ive, que nous refieviona, que voua receviez, qu'ila re9oivent, IMPERFECT* Que je re9UBae, que tu re9usse8, qu'il re9ftt, que noua re9uaaions, que voua re9ua8iez, qu'ila re9U88ent, 3 1 .-J PRETERITE. Que j'aie re9U, que tu aiea re9U,*" qu'il ait re9U, que nous ayons re9U, que voua ayez re9U, qu'ila aient re9U, PLUPERFECT, Que j'euaae re9U, que tu euaaea re9U, qu'il edt re9U, que noua eussiona re9U, que voua eussiez re9U, qu'ila euasent re9U, S 3 •1 '^ 8.2 This Conjugation has only seven verbs, which are : — Recevoir, to receive, which is given as a model ; and, Apercevoir, to perceive. concevoir, to conceive. d^cevoir, to deceive. devoir, to owe. redevoir, to remain in debt; to owe still, percevoir, to collect (rents, in- come, taxes.) INDl From li Impe: were co PRE' US. — ' Pre regim r^im you fi three Fl She guin gui C< oug devi B aST In all tenses in which o comes before o or n, It takes a cedilla, in order that It may retain the soil sound of s which it has in the Inflnltlve Present us. — The besieffed assi jffed eg6 m. pi. SXBROISKS ON Til K THIRD CONJUGATION. 79 EXERCISE LIII. INDICAT. Pres 1 perceive theRtcenle of the yillaflfe.— apercevoir clocnerm. ru. From his window, ho perceives the top of a mountain. ferUtref. somrnetm. moniagnef. I.N(PEUF. — ^He owed a large sum to his partner. — You devoir grand sommef. associim. were collecting the taxes They owed a thousand pou nds. percevoir impdt m. • livrcd sterling. PitET. Def. — We perceived several men coming towards 123 qui venaxent d received succour. 32 secours pi. Pret. Indep I received a letter this morning. — That lettre f. matin m. regiment has received recruits. — We have perceived raiment m. 32 recrue f. you from afar. — The soldiers have received provisions for loin. aoldat 32 vivrera. three days. — My sister has received your parcel. paquet m. EXERCISE LIV. Fltube Absol I shall receive your letter on the fifteenth. • 76 She will receive some visits, — He will still owe thirteen visiie redevoir ifuineas. — They will owe tl.eir misfortunes to tiiQir faults. guinief. devoir malheurm. faulet COND. Pres. — I would conceive the greatest Inopes. — Yo'^ concevoir nsjirance f. ought to behave differently. —He would r»jceive a thw. devoir vousconduire autrement. » coupm. IMPERATIVE. — Receive this as a maik of mj 101 comme marque f. 92 confidence and esteem. — Let us receive his apology. — confiancef. demon estimef. 93 excuse f. Conceive the horror of his situation. — Receive hira Concevoir horreurhm. 92 f. kindly. > — Receive everybody with civility. avec bontS, tout le monde honnitetS, 80 FOURTH CONJUGATIcy IN RB. MODEL OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION IN RE, 150. VENDRE, TO SELL. INFINITIVE. PRESENT. PAST. Vendre, to sell. \ Avoir rendu, to have sold. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. COMPOUND OF PART. PRESENT. Vendant, selling. \ Ayant vendu, having sold. PARTICIPLE PAST. — Vendu, sold. Simple Tenses. . Compound Tenses. INDICATIVE. PRESENT. / sell. thou sellest. he sells, we sell. Je vends, tu vends, il vend, nous vendons, V0U3 vendez, you sell. ils vendent, they sell. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. J'ai vendu, / have tu as vendu, thou hast il a vendu, he has nous avons vendu, we have vous avez vendu, you have ils ont vendu, they have 1 Co o IMPERFECT. Je vendais, I was selling. tu vendais, thou wast selling. il vendait, he was selling. nous vendions, we were selling vous vendiez, you were selling. ils.vendaient, they were selling. PLUPERFECT. J'avais vendu, / had "] tu avals vendu, thou hadst \ il avait vendu, he had o nous avions vendu, we had ? vous aviez vendu, you had | ils avaieut vendu, they had J PRLTERITE DEFINITE. Je vend.is, tu vendis, il vendit, nous vendimes, vous vendites, ils vendiient. I sold, thou soldest. he sold, we sold, you sold, they sold. FUTURE ABSOLUTE. Je vendrai, I shall sell tu vcndras, il vcndra, nous vendrons thou shall sell. he shall sell, we shall sell. vous vendrez, yoii shall sell. ils vendront, they shall sell. PRETERITE ANTERIOR. J'eus vendu, I had tu eus vendu, thou hadst il cut vendu, he had nouB^umes vendu,tce had vous elites vendu, you had \h curent vendu, they had FUTURE ANTERIOR. J'aurai vendu, I shall tu aurns vendu, thoushalt il aura vendu, he shall nous auronf? vendu, we shall vous aurez vendu, you shall ils auront vendu, they shall Id o I II /, *■ FOURTH CONJUGATION IN RE. 81 IN RE, \o have sold. PRESENT. laving sold. to O enses. :finite. have ioM hast has have m have ey have r. had ■) ioM hadst | e had § e had .5: ^eyhad J ERIOR. m hadst \ had had I had y had .1: OR. hall u Shalt ^hall ^hall shall ' shall 2j« o H Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. CONDITION/Ii. PRESENT. Je vendrais, I should ^ tu vendrais, ihoushouldst | il vendrait, he should $ nous vendrions, we should ?= youb vendriez, you should Us veudraient, they should J PAST. J'aurais yendu, I should ^ tu aurais vendu, ihou shouldsl ^ il aurait vendu, he should nousaurionsvendu,to<;5AouZ(2 § vous aui'iez veudu, you should ^ ils auraient rendu, they should J IMPERATIVE. Vends, qu'il vende, vendons, vendez, qu'ils vendent. Sell ^ihou). let him sell, let us sell, sell (you), let them sell. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je vende, que tu vendes, qu'il vende, que nous vendions, que vous vendiez, qu'ils vendent, IMPERFECT. Que je vendisse, que tu vendisses, qu'il vendlt, que nous vendissions, que vous vendissiez, qu'ils vendissent. la 8^ PRETERITE. Que j'aie vendu, que tu aies vendu, qu'il ait vendu, que nous ayons vendu, que vous ayez veudu, qu'ils aieut vendu, PLUPERFECT. Que j'eusse vendu, que tu eusses vendu, qu'il edit vendu, que nous eussions vendu, § ^ que vous eussiez vendu, S^S' qu'ils eussent vendu, ' ^ 151. Conjugate in the same manner : — Attendre, con-espondre, d^fendre, d^'pendre, descendre, entendre, fendre, fondre, mordre, to wait for. to correspond, to defend, to depend, to descend, to hear, to split, to melt, to bite. pendre, perdre, pr^tendre, rendre, r^pandre, r^pondre, suspendre, tordre, &c. to hang, to lose, to pretend, to render, to spread, to answer, to suspend, to twist. 6Sc. 82 EXERCISES ON THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. EXERCISE LV. INDIOAT. Present.— I hear the children.-— That depends enfant ou circumstancea He understands English (a little.)— That des circonstancef. entendre H* anglais * dog" bites. — He defends his sister. — We expect several chien m. attendre friends to dinner. — You claim a half. — They confound d, diner. pritendre moitiei. ccnfondre the arts with the sciences. — He is splitting some wood. — m. f. bois m. Imperf. — 1 was waiting for the steam-boat. — He was attendre * bateau d vapeur m. coming down with David. — They were wasting their time. descendre perdre temps m. EXERCISE LVI. Pret. Def — I alighted at the hotel de France — He descendre h m. answered in a few words We aimed at an honest end en pen de mots. ^ tendre ^honnUe "^but m. They lost their lawsuit. — The storm burst upon the io\m. proces m. orage m. fondre Pret. Indef. — I have heard that musician. — He has entendre musicien m restored the money The sun has melted the snow. —The rendre fondre neige f. thermometer has fallen four degrees since yesterday. thermometrem. descendre de degrim. depuis hier. —You have defended him with much talent. — Ladies, defendre beaucoupde Mcsdames have you heard the music of the new opera ? musiquef. nouvel opiram. my EXERCISE LVII. Future. — Make haste, I will wait for you. — It t' . a Dep6chez-vous attendre * C tiling to which ho will never condescend — You wll chose f. . ne ^jamais ^condescendre wait a long time They v/il] shear their sheep. attendre * longtemps. tondre brebts pi VERB WITH A NEGATIVE. 88 depends 5.)-That ft several Jonfound \cnfondre )d. m. He was 1. time. temps m. e — He end e ^butm. 'he to^vn. He has . -The f. sterdaj. hier. jadies, :sdames It r. a C )u \yjlj COND. Pres.— I.would correspond regiilarly with correspondre riguiUrement my friends. — Your hens would lay eggs every day. poule f. ponare tous les jours. IMPERATIVE.— Let us answer their letter. — Wait rSpondre cl Attendrif. tiU to-morrow. — Hang up your hat and your jusqu'd demain. Pendre * chapeauia. cloak. — Render unto Ceesar (the things which are Cajsar's.) manteau m. d Cisar ce qui appartient d Cisar. 152, CONJUGATION OF A VERB WITH A NEGATIVE. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 153. The English negatives no and not are rendered in French by ne, which is placed immediately after the subject or nominative, whether it be a noun or pronoun, and pas or point after the verb in simple tenses, and be- tween the auxiliary and the participle in compound tenses. " When the verb is in the Present of the Infinitive,^ it is optional to place pas and point before or after the I verb. Pour ne point souffrir. — Pour ne souffrir point. 1 The first manner of speaking, however, is more used." — t (Fa. Acad. •' Diet crit de Firaud," Ac.) The same rules are applicable to other negatives, such as, ne jamais f never; nerien^ nothing; nepluSj no more, not any more, no longer. 154. When the negative is followed by a noun, de is used instead of the definite article ; as, Je riai pas de llvres^ I have no books ; elle via point de place^ she has no room. 155. The words do or didy which precede an English verb in some tenses, arc not expressed in French, '\ 84 if fm ■1 |fcff| Vi V ^ij^ ^ ^ ^# li VERB WITH A NEGATIVE. 156. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OF A VERB USED NEGATIVELY. INFINITIVE. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. PRESENT. PAST. Nc pas parler, not to ^jaeaAr.jN'avoirpas parl^, no< to have spoken. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. COMPOUND OF PART. PRESENT. Ne parlant pas, not speaking. [N'ay ant pas parl^, not having spoken. INDICATIVE PRESENT. Je ne parle pas, tu ne paries pas, il ne parle pas, nous ne parlous pas, tons nc parlez pas, ils ne parlent paa, IMPERFECT. Je ne parlais pas, tu ne parlais pas, il ne parlait pas, nous ne parlions pas, V0U3 ne parliez pas, ils he parlaient pas, PRETERITE DEFINITE. Je ne parlai pas, tu ne p&^las pas, il rt! PQ" apas, nous i-.'i parUmes pas, vous ?iQ parlates pas, ils ne ^jarlerent pas, FUTURE ABSOLUTE. Jo no parlerai pas, tu ne pai'leras pas, il ne parlera pas, nous ne parlerons pas, vous ne i)arlerez paa, ils ne parleront pas. ^ a. •§ N 2 S & Q ?^a«i 1 «". s s «ca o • es. s I St o a a PRETERITE INDEFINITE Je n'ai pas parl^, tu n'as pas parl^, il n'a pas parl^, nous n'avons pas parl^, vous n'avez pas parl^, ils n'ont pas parld, PLUPERFECT Je n'avais pas parl^, tu n'avais pas parle, il n'avait pas parl^, nous n'avions pas parM, vous n'ayiez pas parle, ils n'avaient pas parl^, PRETERITE ANTERIOR. Je n'eus pas parl^, tu n'eus pas parl^, il n'eut pas parle, nous u'eumes pas parl4, vous u'eutes pas parle, ils n'eurent pas parl6, FUTURE ANTERIOR. Je n'aurai pas parle, tu n'auras i)as jiarl^, il n'aura pas parld, nous n'aurons pits parl^, vous n'aurez pas parle, Us n'aui ont pas parl^. ^ t >• a ^ p ;3 S. »S| '§ >« ^ n ^^ s. o «* s K§ &< Q u ^S- § a • o 'e%ireux sans le sou argent. EXERCISE LIX. Pret. Dep. — 1 did not receive his note in time. — He billet m. d temps. did not forget his promise. — She did not hear him. oublier promesse f. entendre Pret. Indef. — I have not yet received his answer. — encore reponse f. He has never spoken to his colonel Yoa have no< hrought apporter the parcel. — Your brothers have not passed this way. paquet m. passer par ici. Pluperp. — I had not finished my exercise when you came. tfieme m. quand vtntes. EXERCISE LX. Fur. — 7 shall not speak to him any more. — ^We will not travel 86 voyager this year. — You will never succeed in that undertaking. anndef. riussir entrepriset. COND. Pres. — I would owe nothing. — You would not devoir wait long. — They would never pardon him. attendre longtenips. pardonner lui IMPERA — ^Let us Pot imitate his conduct. — Do not lose imiter conduite f. perdre your time. — DonH shut the window. — Don't wait for me. temps m. fermer fenitref. attendre — Never yield to the violence of thy passions. — Let us f ahandonner f. f . not act against him. — Receive no more of his letters.— Do agir lui. not cpread that bad news. — I>o not be so idle. r^artdre m^uvais nouvellef. paresseuas ras not ire not Imonej. iargent. is. im. rer. ^ nsef. rouglit pporter t. came. vtntes. travel "ioyager ng. ief. lid not m. It lose perdre ■ me. 5 iCt US VERB CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVELY. 87 157. CONJUGATION OF A VERB INTERROGATIVELY. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 158. (I.) To conjugate a verb interrogatively^ which can bo done only in the Indicative and Conditional Moods, we place the pronoun, which serves as the sub- ject or nominative, after the verb, connecting them by a hyphen; as, Avez-vousf have you? Jouez-vousf do you play ? 159. (2.) In compound tens •■), ti e pronoun is placed between the auxiliary and the participle, joined to the former by a hyphen ; as, Ai-je parle't have I spoken ? Ont-ils dm4t have they dined ? 160. (3.) When the third person singular of a verb ends with a vowel, for the sake of euphony, we placo. between the verb and the pronoun, the letter f, preceded and followed by a hyphen ; as, Aura-t-il f will he have ? Dame-t'elle ? does she dance ? 161. (4.) When the subject or nominative of a verb is a noun, that noun comes first, and one of the pronouns «7, elle^ t&, elleSj is placed after the verb, and joined to it by a hyphen ; as, Mesfreres parlent ils ? do my brothers speak? Votre soeur auraii-elle chante? would your sister have sung ? 162. (5.) When the first person singular of a verb ends with an e mute, an acute accent is placed over that «, which is a sign to pronounce it ; as, Parle-je ? do I speak ? Chante-je ^ do I sing ? 163. (6.) Questions are often asked by Est-ce que^ and then the subject or nominative prer:edes the verb j as, Est-ce que vous lisez Horace ? do you read Horace ? — This mode of interrogation is also used with verbs that have but one syllable in the first person singular of the Present of the Indicative ; so instead of saying, Vends-je f rends'je f mens-je f perds~je ? fonds-je ? pavs-je ? and the like, we say, Est-ce que je vends i esi-ce que je rends f &i^i:^ By employing the former mode of expression, wW ••■•iMomann "^1 ■**.<., 88 TEftB CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVELT. sometimes could not even be understood ; as, for instance, Vends-je ? rends-je ? mens-je ? might be mistaken for the Imperative venffe, range, mange. Usage, however, per- mits us to say, Ai-je ? suis-je ? dis-je ? fais-je ? dois-je ? vois-je ? vais-je ? because there is no ambiguity nor any harshness of sound. 164. MODEL r03. THE CONJUGATION OF A VERB USED INTERROGATIVELY. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Donn^-jc ? Do I aive f donnes-tu ? dost thou give f donnc-t-il ? does he give f donnons-nous ? do we giire f donnez-voua ? do you give f donnent-ils ? do they give f Compound Tenses. rnETERITE INDEnNlTE. Ai-je donnd ? Have I ] as-tu donnd ? hast thou (^ a-t-ildoune? has he «• avons-nous donnd ? have we s avez-vous donne ? have you *]• ont-ils donnd ? have they J IMTERFECT. Donnais-je ? Was I donnais-tu ? wast thou (lonnait-il ? was he donnions-nons : were we donniez-vou8 ? v^ere you donnaient-ils " were they r PLUPERFECT. Avais-je donnd ? Had I arais-tu donnd ? hadst t/uiu avait-il donnd ? had he aTi(»ns-nous donnd ? hcd we aviez-Yona donnd ? had you avaient-ijii donud ? had they PRETERITE DEFINITE. Donnai-je ? Did I give f donnas-tu ? didst thou give f donna-t-il ? did he give f donnames-nous? did we give? donndtes-vous ? did you give f donn^rent-ila ? did they give f pr;cterite anterior. Eus-je donnd ? Had I "| eus-tu donnd ? hadst thou^ eut-il demnd ? had he S* enimes-rous donne ? had we s eutes-vous donne r had you I* eurent-ils donne ? had they j FUTURE absolute. Donnerai-je ? donnerer?— Have they not been here signer ieif [MAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 Ef"^ I I.I 125 1^ m 12.2 us u L25 iU 11.6 I V] <^ /J 'c-l .-^ />J^ >^ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WIST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) S72-4S03 d •4 '^ \ \ \ « k \ IU'. 92 CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. FuT. Abs ^Will he not betray your confidence ? —Will you trahir confiance f. not consult your lawyer ? — ^WiU she not invite your sister ? consulter avocat ? inviter 166. § 11. CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. The Passive verb expresses an action received or suf- fered by its subject or nominative. There is only one mode of conjugating passive verbs ; it is by adding to the verb etre through all its tenses, the past participle of the active verb. tl67. Every past participle employed with the verb etre., must agree in gender and number with the subject of etre. To form the feminine, an e is added, and to form the plural, an s. 168. It has already been said (page 39), that the participle must be put in the singular, when the pronoun vous is used instead of tu ; thus, we must say, in speak- ing to a man, vous etes loue; and, in speaking to a female, vous etes louee, 169. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. INFINITIVE. PRESENT. PAST. * Etre loud, to he praised. | Avoir i\A loud, to have been praised. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. PA.ETICIPLE PAST. Etant loud, being praised. | Ayant did loud, having been praised. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. Je suis tu 63 il or elle est nous sorames vous 6tes ils or elles sout PRESENT. loud, tn. loude, f. louds, r/i. loudes INDICATIVE. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. J'ai dtd tu as dtd il or elle a dtd nous avons dtd vous avez dtd .1 floud, m. <>• (,Ioude,/ M >, C louds, m. 2 § k ils or elles ont dtd (^ loudes, /. ^ J CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. 93 ter? Simple Tenses. IMPERFECT. J'^taia tu dtais 11 or elle ^tait nous etions vous dtiez ils or elles ^talent loU^, 771. Jou^e,/. g ^ ( louds, 77J. §* I I ^J { loudes, /. PKETERITE DEFINITE. Je fuS riuud, 772. tu fus -( *^ 1 11 or elle fut ( lou^e,/. |.^ nous fumes ( louds, 771. ^ a vous futes •< Us or elles furent (^ loupes, /. FUTURE ABSOLUTE. ( lou^, m. o< J Compound iTenses. rLUPERFECT. J 'avals 4t4 tu avals 4t4 < * | 11 or elle avait ^t^ (^ lou^e, /• t^ Zj nous avlons 4t6 ( loues, 771. 2 a vous aviez 4t6 [4t4-< §' j ils or elles avaient (^ loupes, /. ?" PRETERITE AKTERIOR. J'eus ^te tu eus 4t4 il or elle eut 4t4 nous eftmes 4t4 vous elites 4t4 lou4. m. ©- lou^e,/. *« '1 ^ "^ Je serai tu seras il or elle sera nous serons vous serez ils or elles seront loud, 772. loude,/. "^ 00 ' loues, 772. §. o* loupes,/. "' louds, 771. a n ils 07' elles eurentdtd (^ loupes,/. '^ FUTURE ANTERIOR. J 'aurai etd ( loud, 772. (s- ^ tu auras 4t4 < | eo il or elle aura 4i4 [ loude, /. »^ |] nous aurons 4t4 I louds, tti. | "^ vous aurez 4t4 < ils or elles aurontdtd ( loudes,/. - . as- PRESENT. Je serais tu serais il or elle serait nous serions vous seriez ils or elles seraient loud, 772. "j CONDITIONAL. PAST. J'aurais 4t4 tu aurais 4t4 il or elle aurait 4i4 nous aurious dtd vous auriez dte [dtd ils or elles auraient ( loude3,y*. loude,/. "^ §. louds, 772. S. s loudes,y. * J BIPERATIVE. Sois ( loud, 772. qu'il or qu'elle soit | loude, /. soyons ( louds, 772. soyez < qu'ils or qu'elles soient ( loudes, /. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je sois ( loud, 772. ^^ que tu sois < «" 3 qu'il or qu'elle soit ( loude, /. ^ ^ que noua soyons \ louds, 7n. |. **** que vous soyez I §^ | qu'ils or qu 'elles ( loudes, /. ' "^ soient j aicut did loud, 772. O' Ki loude,/. •« e louds, 772. & ^ a -^ Co s:. « o ?> a PRETERITE. Que j 'ale dtd ( loud, 772. que tu aies dtd [dtd < ^ „ qu'il 07' qu'elle ait ( loude,/. § i^ que nous ayons dtd \ louds, 772.*^ 3 que vous ayez dtd f g-«5 qu'ils or qu'elles I loudes,/. S, ^ s 94 EXERCISE ON PASSIVE VERBS. Simple Tenses. IMPEBFECT. Queje(\isse que tu fusses qu'il or qu'elle fflt que nous fussions que Tous fussiez qu'lls or qu'ellcs fus- sent / lou^, m. Uou6e,/. lou^s, m. } loupes,/. 1= Compound Tenses. PLUPEBFECT. Que j'eusse feW / lou6, m. que tu cusaes 6t6 •( qu'U or qu'elle eflt 616 { loude, /. ?* s que nous eussions 6t6 ^ louds, m. "^ 1. que vous enssiez 6t6 { ^."^ qu'ils or qu'elles eussent nouses,/. S,S 616 J ' I EXERCISE LXV. LNDICAT. Pres.— He is loved and esteemed by everybody. aimer estimer detoutlemonde. Pret. Dep. — The citv of Rome was several times sacked. villef. foist, saccage He was saved from a gpreat danger by (his youngest son. ) delivrer m. par le plus jeune de sesjfils. She was accused of theft by her mistress. — The Gauls accuser vol m. par Oaulesf.yi. were conquered by C»sar The two generals were wounded. conquis par blesser Pret. Indep Your work has been praised in a very ouvrage m. d* ^fort delicate manner by an academician The J'ews have been * hnanieref.par academicien Juif punished by God She has not been well rewarded. de ricompenser FuT. Abs You Y^ be recognised Your conduct will reconnu conduiie f. be approved by wise and enlightened people. de art. * ^6clair$ ^ersonne f. pi. 170. § m. OF NEUTER VERBS. The Neuter verb expresses merely the state of its sub- ject; as, J^eornstCy I exist; or else an action limited to the subject which produces it ; as, Je marche^ I walk. A neuter verb may be easily known by its not ad- mitting immediately after it the words queJ.qu'un, some- body, or quelque chosej something. We cannot say : Je CONJUGATION OF NEUTER VERBS. 95 S )dy. londe. will I marcTie quelqu*un, je languis quelque chose ; marcher aud languir^ therefore, are neuter verbs. There are, in French, nearly six hundred neuter verbs ; } about five hundred take the auxiliary avoir in their com-j pound tenses. ■ 171. The following form their compounds with etre: — Aller, arriver, d^c^der, d^choir, devenir, to go. to arrive, to die. to decay, to become. diseonvenir, to deny^ to disown. echoir, eclore, entrer, mourir, naitre, partir, to become due» to bloWf to be hatched, to come in. to die. to be born, to set out. parvenir, to attain. provenir, to come from. redevenir, to become again. rentrer, to come in again. repartir, to set out again. Tester, to remain^ to stay, retomber, to fall again. retourner, to go back. revenir, survenir, tomber, venir, to come back, to happen, to fall, to come. 172. The following neuter verbs take avoir or etre in their compound tenses, according to the idea one wishes to express. Avoir is used when we consider, the action, and etre when regard is had to the result of the action. Aborder, ace arir, accroitre, apparaitre, croitre, debordei, demeurer, to land, to run to. to increase, to appear, to grow, to overflow, to remain. descendre, disparaitre, ^chapper, grandir, monter, passer, remonter. to go down. to disappear to escape. to grow. to go up. to pass. to go up again. 173. § IV. OF PRONOMINAL VERBS. Pronominal Verbs are those which are conjugated with two pronouns of the same person ; as, je me repens, I repent ; il se propose^ he intends ; nous nous flattonsj we flatter ourselves. 174. Pronominal Verbs are called reflected^ when they express an action or a state which relates only to the subject of the verb ; as, se hlesser^ to hurt oneself; 96 CONJUGATION OP A PRONOMINAL VERB. , se rejouir^ to rejoice. They are called reciprocal, when they express a reciprocity of action between two or more subjects ; as, s^entr'aimery to love each other ; s'entr^aiderj to help one another. 175. Pronominal Verbs have no conjugation peculiar to themselves ; they follow the one to which they belong, which is known by the termination of the Infinitive. In their compound tenses, they take the verb etre, to be, contrary to tie English expression, which requires have. 176. CONJUGATION OF A PRONOMINAL VERB. INFINITIVE. rRESENT. Se promener, to walk, to take a walk. PAST. S'etre promen^, ) . » » , ^ J y to have walked. or promende, rARTICIPLE PRESENT. Se promenant, walking. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Je me prom^ne, / walk. tu te promfenes, thou walkest. il se prom^ne, he walks. nous nous promenons, we walk. vous vous promenez, you walk. Us se prominent, they walk. IMPERFECT. Je me promenais, tu te promenais, il se promenait, nous nous promenions, vous vous promeniez, ils se promenaient, PRETERITE DEFINITE. Je me promenai, tu te promenas, il'se prom ""n a, nous nous promen&mes, vous v'^us promenates, ils se promen^reut, PARTICIPLE PAST. S'dtant promen^, ) t . 7, , or promenge,/ \^^^^^rig walked. Compound Tenses. INDICATIVE. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. Je me suis promen^, ^ tu t'es promen^, g j^ il s'est proraen^, £^ nous nous sommes promenas, ^ a vous vous dtes promends, • ? ils se sont promenas, •' Co & PLUPERFECT. Je m'^tais promen&, tu t'dtais promend, il s'^tait promend, nous nous dtions promenas, vous vous dtiez promends, ils s'etaient promenas, PRETERITE ANTERIOR *Je me fus promend, tu te fus promend, il se fut promend, nous nous fumes promenas, vous vous fiites promen^ ils se furent promenas, I ^ •=■5- CONJUGATION OP A PRONOMINAL VERB. 97 Simple Tenses. FUTURE ABSOLUTE. Je me promdnerai, tu te prombneras, il se promenera, nous nous promfenerons, vous vous prom^nerez, ils se promeneront, PRESENT. Je me promfenerais, tu te promfenerais, il se promenerait, nous nous promenerions, vous vous promeneriez, ils se promcneraient, §- a Compound I'enses. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Je me serai promen6, tu te seras prom en 6, il se sera promen6, nous nous serons promencs, vous vous serez promenfis, ils se seront promen6s, CONDITIONAIj. PAST. Je me serais promend, tu te serais promen($, il se serait promen6, nous nous serious promends, vous vous seriez promen6s, ils se seraient promencs, IMPERATIVE. Promene-toi, Co o e qu'il se promftne, promenons-nous, promenez-vous, qu'ils se prominent, SUBJUNCTIVE. Walk(iliou\. let him walk. let us walk, walk (you), let them walk. •^:v^ PRESENT. Que je me prom^ne, que tu te prom^nes, qu'il se promene, que nous nous promenions, que vous vous promeniez, qu'ils se promenent, IMPERFECT. Que je me promenasse, que tu te promenasses, qu'il se promenat, que nous nous promenassions, que vous vous promenassiez, qu'ils se promenassent, 177. Co a a 9 PRETERITE. Que je me sois promen6, que tu te sois promen6, qu'il se soit promen6, que nous nous soyons promencs, o^ "^^ que vous vous soyez promenes, ^ - qu'ils se soient promends, PLUPERFECT. Que je me fusse promend, que tu te fusses promend, qu'il se filt promen6, [men^s, « [" r^ue nous nous fussions pro- a^ V^ que vous vous f ussiez promenes, ^ ? . qu'ils se fussent promends, ?- ^ « SI a =53 c a Conjugate in the same manner : — S'accorder, to agree. s'adresser, to apply. s'avancer, to come or go forward. ae bftig-iier, to bathe. se b.aisser, to stoop. se d^pecher, to make haste. ee determiner, to resolve upon. s'emporter, to fly into a passion. s'enrnumer, to catch cold. s'envoler, to fly away. se facher, to be angry. se hater, to make haste, s'imaginer, to fancy. se lever, &c. to riscy be. I 1 98 EXERCISES ON PRONOMINAL VERBS. ( EXERCISE LXVI. INDIO. Pres.— That woman nurses herself too much , ' s'ecouter trop. You wonder at that "We take a walk (every day). s'Stonner de 101 se promener tons les jours. Imferf. — I was ridingf (on horseback). — "We were se promener d cheval. fatiguing ourselves (to no purpose). — You were amusing sefatiguer inutilement. s*amuser yourself in the garden. — They quarrelled with everybody. dans se disputer tout le monde. Pbet. Def. — I presented myself to the assembly. — He seprisenter assembleef. lost himself in the crowd.— She laughed at his advice.*— seperdre foulei. semoquer de avism. We applied to the prime minister. — You perceived s'adresser premier ministre. s*apercevoir de the snare. — They met several times in the street. piSge m. se rencontrer 123 fois me f. EXERCISE LXVn. Pret. Indep. — ^I have exposed myself. — He has amused s'exposer s*amuser himself.— She has revenged herself.— Where did you stop ? se venger s*arriter Plupbrf. — I had fallen asleep. — They had grown rich s*endormir s^enrichir at your expense. — He had got up at four o'clock. depens pi. se lever heures. FuT. Abs. — I shall bathe to-morrow. — You will se haigner demain, catch cold I shall warm myself.— He will grow bold — a'enrhumer se chauffer s*enhardir They will defend themselves well.— They will fly away. se dSfendre BfPERA Let us rest under the shade of this se reposer d, ombre f. tree. — Rise from there, that i^ not your place. arhrem, se lever Id ce f. s RBPLECTED VERB CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY. 99 178. MODEL OF A REFLECTED VERB CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY INFINITIVE. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. PRESENT. PAST. K^ n»c o^ Uir/.,. i ^^i to '^^^j wo< Ne s'etre pas lev^, ) not to have JNe passe lever, I to get up. or levee, f. / risen. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. PARTICIPLE PAST. Neselerantpa. .otr>nng. 1^1^?;,^ }"nt"™' INDICATIVE. PRETERITE INDEPINITE. Je ne me suia pas leve, ^^ tu ne t'es pas lev^, ^ il ne s'est pas lev6, [leves, §• nous ne nous sommes pas p vous ne vous ^tes pas lev^s, * lis ne se sont pas leves, s ». o (« PRESENT. Je ne me leve pas, tu ne te leves pas, il ne se leve pas, nous ne nous levons pas, vous ne vous levez pas, ils ne se levent pas, IMPERFECT. Je ne me levais pas, k* tu ne te levais pas, ^ * il ne se levait pas, g* | nous ne nous levions pas, ^g" "^ vous ne vous leviez pas, ils ne se levaient pas. PLUPERFECT. s o PRETERITE DEFINITE. Je ne me levai pas, tu ne te levas pas, ^ 11 ne se leva pas, 2. |; nous ne nous lev^mes pas, «> ^ vous ne vous levates pas, ils ne se leverent pas, FUTURE ABSOLUTE. Je ne me ISverai pas, ^^ tu ne te l^veras pas, eo il ne se levera pas, 2. a* nous ne nous leverons pas, » ^ vous ne vous leverez pas, | ils ne se leveront pas, '^ Je ne m'^tais pas lev^, tu ne t*4tais pas lev^, il ne s'^tait pas lev^, [levds, ^ nous ne nous ^tious pasp ^ vous ne vous ^tiez pas lev^s, ' | ils ne s'^taient pas lev^s, •* PRETERITE ANTERIOR. Je ne me fus pas lev^, >^ tu ne te fus pas lev^, il ne se fut pas lev^, [lev^s, §• a nous ne nous fdmes pas§ ^ vous ne vous fdtes pas lev^s, * ^ ils ne se furent pas lev^s, •* FUTURE ANTERIOR. Je ne me serai pas lev€, jj, k^ tu ne te seras pas lev^, § ee il ne se sera pas lev^,[leves, * §* nous ne nous serons pasg.sa vous ne vous serez pas lev^s § | ils ne se seront pas lev^s, • ** 100 REFLECTED VERB CONJUGATED NEGATIVEI.V, CONDITIONAI. J. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Co O Je ne me levcrais pas, tu ne te leverais ])a3, il ne s" Icvcrait paa, ^. ^ nous nc nous leverions pas, ?> g vous ne vous leveriez pas, a ils nc se 15veraient pas, Compound Tenses. PAST. Je ne me serais pas levd, >. s tu ne te serais pas leve, § g^ il ne se serait pas leve, [levda ** § nous ne nous serious pas^.^;; vous ne vous seriez pas leves § 3 ils ne se scraient pas levcs, ' S. IMPERATIVE. Ne te leve nas, qu'il ne se leve pas, ne nous levons pas, ne vous levez pas, qu'ils ne se levent pas. JJo not rise, let him not rise, let us not rise, do not rise, let them not rise. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. That I may not rise^ ^c. Que je ne me leve pas. que tu ne te 15ves pas. qu'il ne se leve pas. que nous ne nous levions pas. que vous ne vous leviez pas. qu'ils ne se Invent pas. IMPERFECT. That I might not rise, 8;c. Que je ne me levasse pas. que tu ne te levasscs pas. qu'il ne se leviit pas. que nous ne nous levassions pas. que vous ne vous Icvassiez pas. qu'ils ne se levassent pas. PRETERITE. That I may not have risen, (^c. Que je ne me sois pas leve. que tu ne te sois pas lev^. qu'il ne se soit pas levr que nous ne nous soyons pas Icves. que vous ne vous soyez pas levcs. qu'ils ne se soient pas leves. PLUPERFECT. That I might not have risen, ^c. Que je ne me fusse pas leve. que tu ne te fusses pas leve. qu'il ne se fut pas leve. que nous ne nous fussions pas leves. que vous ne vous fussiez pas loves, qu'ils nc sc fussent pas levef . >» REFLECTED VERB, INTERROGATIVELY. 101 179. REFLECTED VERB, INTERROGATIVELY. la A < ^ Cq C»«J s ••« ^ e^ PLUPERFECT. M'etais-je coupe? t'etuis-tu coupe? s'dtait-il coupe? nous dtions-nous coupds ? vous etiez-vous coupes ? s'dtaient-ils coupds? PRETERITE ANTERIOR. Me fus-je coupe ? te fus-tu coupd ? se fut-il coupd ? nous fClmes-nous coupes ? vous f utes-vous coupes ? se furent-ils coupds? FUTURE ANTERIOR. Me serai-je coupd ? te seras-tu coupe ? se sera-t-il coup^? nous serons-nous coupes ? vous serez-vous coupes ? se seront-ils coupdsr I o Co Co s:a CONDITIONAL PRESENT. Me couperais-je ? te couperais-tu ? se couperait-il ? nous couperions-nous ? vous couperiez-vous ? se couperaient-ils ? PAST. Me serais-je coupe ? te serais-tu coupd ? se serait-il coupd ? g 5: nous serions-nous coupds ? 1 »^ vous seriez-vous coupes ? SI »* se seraient-ils coupds ? "^ g 102 REFLECTED VEUB. 180. REFLECTED VERB CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVELY AND NEGATIVELY. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. PUESENT. • Ne mo flatt^-je pas ? Do I not flatter myself f ne te flattes-tu pas ? &c. doat thou not flatter thyself f Sfc, IMPERFECT. Ne mo flattais-je pas ? &c. Was I not flattering myself 1 d'c. PRETERITE DEFINITE. Ne me flattai-je pas ? &c. Did I not flatter myself? dkc. FUTURE ABSOLUTE. Ne me flatterai-je pas ? &c. Shall I not flatter myself? cheval m. You must speak to him How much do you want ? — They Combien must answer. — M'lst I show you my work? — It repondre montrer ouvrage m. was necessary to consent to that bargain. — It would be * consentir marche m. r.ccessary (to inquire about it.) — I want a, French grammar. s'en informer * * < • ' EXfiftClSfiS ON UNIPERSONAL VEKBS. 107 as, n the rb to 'sonal to be U me want, EXERCISE LXXI. Go and sec if it rains. — It does not mm, but it will rain Allez * voir mais soon. — It does not snow. — It will snow to-morrow Do you bientot. demain. think it freezes?— It is freezing yery hard. — I do not think so; croyez- subj-1 tres fort. ^crois He it seemSf on the contrary, that it thaws.— It often hails in this d 78 ''souvcnt * country. — There arrived some persons whom we did not paysm. II ind-3 personne que expect. — /if appears that you (have not attended) to that attendre ind-2 ne votis ites pas occupe de business It is not becoming in you to contradict your father. affaire f. * de contrarier —There are crocodiles in the Nile and in some other rivers 32 Nilm. quelques fleuve EXERCISE LXXU. Is there anyone here? — There is nobody Were there any quetqu'un 116 cavalrjr at the review? — There would be more happiness cavaleriei, revue f. plus de bonheur if everyone knew how to moderate his desires. — There would chacun savait * * modirer desir not be so many duels, if people were to reflect that tant de Von * * reflechir ind-2 one of the first obligations of a Christian is to forgive f. f. Chretien de paraonner art. ii]Juries. — I wish that there were more order in his conduct. injure voudrais subj-2 d' conduitef. — It is not necessary to be a conjurer to guess his motives.— * * sorcier pour deviner motif Somebody asked Diogenes at what hour people should On ind-2 d Diogene it falloir ind-2 dine : If one is rich, replied he, when one likes ; if one is Von ripondre quand on veut poor, when one can. pent. 108 CONJUGATION OF VEUBS ENDING IN QER. Before giving the conjugation of the Irregular Verhs^ we shall give examples of several verbs, which, although regular in their conjugation, present a peculiarity in the orthography of some of their tenses. 189. § I. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OF VERBS ENDING IN GER. MANGER^ TO EAT. Part. Pres. mangeant. Fart. Past, mangf6. Ind. \ I*res. j Imp. Pret. Fut. COND. Imper. Je mange, nous mangeons, Je mangeais, nous mangions, Je mangeai, nous mange^mcs, Je mangerai, nous mangerons, Je mangerais, nous mangerions, tu manges, vous mangez, tu mangeais, vous mangiez, tu mangeas, vous mangeates tu mangeras, vous mangerez, tu mangeraisj il mange ; ils mangent. il mangeait ; ils mangeaient. il mangea ; ils mang^rent. il mangera ; ils mangeront. lu mangerais, il mangerait ; vous mangeriez, ils mangeraient. mange, qu*il mange ; mangez, qu'ils mangent. tu manges, il mange ; vous mangiez, ils mangent. mangeons, SuBj. \ g je mange, Pres. j c? nous mangions, „- , „ Imp. ^ je mangeasse, tu mangeasses, il mangent ; O'nous mangeassions, vousmangeassiez, ils mangeassent. 190. Conjugate in the same manner: — Abreger, arranger, bonder, corriger, deranger, diriger, I to abridge, to arrange, to stir, to correct, to disorder, to direct. encourager, to encourage. Remark. — Verbs ending after the a. when engager, to engage. gfager, to bet. juger, tojudae. ndgliger, to neglect. partager, to diviaCy to share. songer, to think. venger, to revenge, i^c. in aer, require nL«*i.)i.ic^i^Kl.l|Udir3.lM53^ as, mangeantj mangeons, mangeais ; but we write withou t e mute, mangions, mangerentj b ecause tne cr is no^^ ^y l- lowecl bv the vo-^ ' art. EXERCISES ON VEIIBS ENDING IN 0£IL 109 lough the 3RBS EXERCISE LXXm. The eye judges of colours ; the ear judges of csil m. art. couleur f. orcille f. sounds. — Where do you direct your steps ? — He disturbed art. «o»m. pa^m. diranger everybody. — The example of the general encouraged the tout le monde. exemple m. army. — Have you corrected your exercise ? — I would wager armie f theme m. gager a hundred francs (that it is not so.) — Abridge your speech. — * m. que cela rC est pas. discours m. Don't stir. — We protect the widow and the orphan. proteger veuve orphelin 191. § H. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OF VERBS ENDING IN ilEB. AGREER^ TO ACCEPT, to please. Part. Pres. agrdant. Ind. ) J'agr^e, Pres. } nous agreons, Imp. J'agr^ais, nous agr^ions, Ih'et. J'agreai, nous agr^^es, Fut. J'agreerai, nous agr^erons, CoND. J'agrderais, nous agr^erions, Imper. agr^ons, SuBJ. \ § j'agr^e, Pres. j o»nous agrdions, Imp. «j*agr^asse, O'uous agreassions, Part. Past, agr^e. tu agrees, vous agr^ez, tu agrdais, vous agr^iez, tu agr^as, vous agr^&tes, tu agrderas, vous agr^erez, tu agr^erais, vous agr^eriez, agr^e, agrdez, tu agrees, vous agr^iez, tu agreasses, vous ugreassiez, il agrde ; ils agrdent. i! agrdait ; ils agrdaient. il agrda ; ils agrdftrent. il agrdera ; ils agreeront. il agrderait ; ils agreeraient qu'il agrde ; qu'ils agrdent. il agrde ; ils agreent. 11 agrd&t ; ila agreassent 192. Conjugate in the same manner : — Order, to create. | supplder, to supply. rdcrder, to divert, \ &c. &c. no CONJUGATION OF VERBS ENDING IN CEX, Remark. — The Past Participle of verbs in e'er requires an additional e to form the feminine. In the Future and Conditional where there are two, the poets usually suppress one. Votre coeur d'Ardaric agrSrait-il la flamme? — (Gorneille.) No8 botes agr^ront les soins qui leur sont dus.--(LA Fontaine.; . In prose, that suppression would be an error. 193. § m MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OP VERBS ENDING IN CEB. • A VANCER, TO ADVANCE. Part. Fres. avanyant. Tnd. ) J'avance, i^'es. ) nous avanQons, Imp. J'avangais, nous ayaD9ions, Fret. J'avan5ai, nous avanQames, J'avancerai, nous avancerons, J'avancerais, Fart. Fast, avance. tu avances, il avance ; nous avancerions. Fut. COND. Imfer. ayan9ons, SuBJ. ) Sj'avance, Fres. j"<^nousavancions, Imp. gj'avan9asse, C^nous aYan9a8sions, Yous avancez, tu ayan9ais, vous avanciez, tu aYan9as, YOUS aYan94tes, tu ayanceras, YOUS ayancerez, tu ayancerais, YOUS ayanceriez, ayance, ayancez, tu ayances, YOUS ayanciez, tu ayan9as3es, vous ayan9assiez, lis a^ncent. il ayan9ait ; lis aYan9aient. il ayan9a ; ils ayanc^reut. il ayancera; Us ayanceront. il ayancerait ; ils ayanceraient. qu'il ayance ; qu'ils ayancent. il ayance ; ils ayancent. il avanf^t ; ils aYan9assent. 194. Conjugate in the same manner : — ^noncer, Amercer, to bait. annoncer, to announce. bercer, to rock, commencer, to begin. deyancer, to outrun. enfoncer, to sinkf break open. percer, pincer, rincer, Bucer, &c. to express^ utter, to pierce, to pinch, to rinse, wash, to suck. &c. Remark. — In all these verbs the c takes a cedilla, I when followed by the vowel a or o. EXERCISE ON VERBS ENDING IN isR AND CER. Ill [uires 'uture mally m.) . OF The same rule applies to those verbs in which it is followed by w, whenever it is required to give the c the soft pronunciation of s ; as, xl requtj il a aperqu, EXERCISE LXXIV. God created man after his own imagfe God has created art. d * f. heaven and earth His proposal wb& accepted art. cielm. art. proposition f. agrier I shall make up the rest. — ^He announced that news to all supplier nouvellef. his friends It was beginning to rain when we set out A quand parttmes. hall pierced his clothes. ^ Wash these glasses. balle f. habit m. pi. Bincer v&rre m. 195. § IV. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OF VERBS ENDING IN UEB. JOUER, TO PLAY. Part. Pres. jouant. Ind. \ Je joue, Pres. i nousjouons, Imp. Je jouais, nous jouions, Pret. Je jouai, nousjou&mes, Fui. Jejouerai, nous jouerons, CoND. Je jouerais, nous jouerions, Imper. jouons, SuBj. > g je joue, Pres. jo'nous jouions, Imp. gjejouasse, (^nous jouassions, Part. Past, joue. tu joues, vous jouez, tujouais, vous jouiez, tu jouas, vous jou^tes, tu joueras, vous jouerez, tu jouerais, vous joueriez, joue, jouez, tu joues, vous jouiez, tu jouasses, vousjouassiez, il joue ; lis jouent. iljouait; ils jouaient. iljoua; ils jouerent iljouera; ils joueront. iljouerait; ils joueraient. qu'iljoue; qu'ils jouent. il joue ; ils jouent. iljouM; ils jouassent 112 CONJUGATION OF VEKBS ENDINO IN UEK. 196. Conjugate in the same manner : — J. ■ i Avoucr, to avow 3 confess. attribuer, to attribute. ciouer, to nail. contribuer, to contribute. d^nouer, to untie. distribuer, noiier, secouer, tuer, &c. to distribute, to tie. to shake off. to kill. &c. I Remark. — In verbs of tlie first conjugation, when the termination er of the infinitive is preceded by a vowel, as mjouer^ prier^ avouer, etc. the e of the termination may be preserved or suppressed, in poetry, in the Future and Conditional ; but, if it be suppressed, a circumflex accent is placed over the vowel preceding. So poets write jsjouerai or je jourai; favouerai or f avourai ,' Je prierais or je prirais. 197. § V. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OF VERBS ENDING IN ELER. APPELER, TO CALL. Part. Pres. appelant. Part. Past, appele. Ind. ) J'appelle, Pres. ) nous appelons, Imp. J'appelais, nous appelions, Pret. J'appelai, nous appelamcs, J'apy'"-orai, tu appellcs, vous appelez, tu appelais, vous appeliez, tu appelas, VOUS appelates, il appelle ; ils appellent. il appelait ; ils appelaient. il appela ; ils appel^rent. il appellera ; Fut. J'apy "-orai, tu appelleras, nous" appellerons, vous appellerez, ils appelleront. CoND. J'appellerais, tu appellerais, il appellerait ; nous appellerions, vous appelleriez, ilsappelleraient Imper. appelle, qu*il appelle ; appelons, appelez, qu'ils appellent. SuBJ. ) § j'appelle tu appelles, il appelle ; Pres. j O'nous appelions, vous appeliez, ils appellent. Imp. § J'appelasse, tu appelasses, il appelat ; O'nous appelassions, vous appelassiez, ils appelassent. 198. Conjugate in the same manner : — Amonceler, to heap up. atteler, to put horses to. chanceler, to totter, stagger. detoler, to unyoke. epeler, to spell. nivelcr, to level. rappeler, to recalls renouveler, &c. to renew, ^c. KEMARKS ON VERBS ENDING IN ELBh 113 iistrihute. \hake off. iill Ic. when tlio a vowel, *mination he Future [ircumflex So poets 'ouraii Je )N OF ele. )elle ; 'pellent. 3elait ; ►pelaient. )ela; pel^rent. lellera ; pelleront. ellerait ; >elleraienfc. ippelle ; appellent. elle; pellent. Dlat; Delassent. pell, evel. ecalH enew, ^c. 199. Remarks. — As has been exemplified In appeler^ verbs ending in cZer, double the / before an e mute : J'appelky tu nivelles, it etincelle^ Us renouvelleraient^ etc. ;i but we write with a single I: nous appelonSj vous nivelezA Us etincelaient^ etc., because the vowel which follows the! I is not an e mute. 200. Geler^ to freeze: de(;/eler, to thaw; Aar^<^Zgr . to Tlegelera^} fiarcele^ je peTe\ lispeleraient^ etc. 201. Recehr ^ to receive and conceal stolen things, to contain ]~r^mei\ to reveal, &c. being terminated by e'ler* and not c/er, never double the / ; Je recele, tu reveleSj etc. EXERCISE LXXV. Do you play on the violin ? — The children are playing at de violonm. d Windman's buff. — He was killed by a (cannon shot). — The colin-maUlard. de coup de canon m. bells call to church. — Call them (as you please.) — cloche f. art. iglisef. comme U vous plaira. He is (near falling"), he staggers. — We have renewed pres de tomber acquaintance. — Spell that word. — She is peeling an apple. connaissance. motm. 202. § VI. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OF VERBS ENDING IN ETER. JETEBj TO throw. Part. Fres. jetant. Ind. Pi'en. Je jette, nous jctons, Imp. Je jetais, nous jetions, Pret. Je jetai, nous jetames, ^\t. Je jetterai, nous jetterons. Part. P«5i?, jete. tu jettes, vous jetez, tu jetais, vousjetiez, tu jetas, vous jetates, tu jetteras, vous jetterez, il jette ; lis jcttent. il jetait ; lis jetaient. iljeta; lis jeterent. il jettera ; ils jctteront. 114 CONJUGATION Oy VEllBS ENDIN'O IN KTAR. GoNDt Je jetterais, uoua jetterioufl, Imper. jctonSy SuBJ. ) gje jette, Pres. ) o»nous jetions, Lnp. gjejetasse, O*nous jetassions, tu jettemis, vousjetteriez, jette, jetez, tu jettes, vous jetiez, tu jetasses, vous jetassiez, il jetterait ; ils jetteraicut qu'il jette ; qu'ila jetteut. il jette ; ilsjettent. il jet&t ; ils jetassent. Conjugate in the same manner : — Cacheter, to seal. \ Projeter, to project j &c. 203. AcheteVj to buy; etiqueter^ to ticket, make fachete^ facheteraiy ils etiquetent^ &c. andnotfachetteyfachetteraij Us etiquettent, — (Acad.) 204. § VII. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OP VERBS ENDING IN YrU, EMPLOYER^ TO employ. Part. Pres. employant. Part. Past, employe. Ind. \ Pres. ) J'emploie, nous employons, Imp. J'employais, nous employions, Pret. J'employai, tu emploies, il ernploie ; vous employez, ils emploient. tu employais, il employait ; vous employiez, ils employaient. tu employas, il employa ; nous employames, vous employates, ils employerent. Fut. J'emploierai, tu emploieras, il emploiera ; nous emploierons, vous emploierez, ils emploieront. COND. Imper. J'emploierais, tu emploierais,, il emploierait ; nous emploierions, vous emploieriez, ils emploieraient. employons, empToie, employez, qu'il emploie ; qu'ik emploient. SuBJ. ) gj'emploie, Pres. /©"nous employions. Imp. gj'employasse, tu emploies, il emploie ; vous employiez, ils emploient. tu employasses, ilemploy^t; O*nous employ assions, vous employassiez, ils employas- sent. CONJUGATION OF VEIIB8 ENDING IN YER. 115 ^ Balayer, eflrayer, essaycr, payer, io sweep, to frighten, to try. to pay. k 205. Conjugate in the same manner verbs in yer^ and in general all those whose Present Partici[)le ends in yant; as: — nettoyer, to clean. appuyer, to prop ; to rest upon. essuyer, to wipe. ennuyer, to tire. 206. Envoyer^ to send; and renvoyer, to send back, deviate from the preceding model of conjugation in the Future and Conditional, making — J'enverrai, fenverrais ; je renverraif je renverraisj instead of fenvoieraij &c. ^ 207. Remark. — In the preceding verbs, the y is pre - served in every part of theveijjjexceDt betorouieS2ie fer m i natlons ei^es^M}L.W}}^^'^ it is qjoj^eo. mtp. i / Je paiBf* lu"netioieSj its appuient. Moreover, these verbs take a y and an i in the two first persons plural of the Imperfect of the Indicative and Present of the Subjunc- tive ; that is, the y of the radical part (as employ) ^ and the i of the final part ions^ iez. EXERCISE LXXVI. That throws me into a great dilemma He threw himself dans embarras m. into the midst of the enemy. — Have you sealed your d milieu m. ennemi m. pi. letter? — He is cleaning his ^un. — All that he lakes, he fusil m. ce qu* prend pays (ready money). — I sliall endeavour to persuade le argent comptant. essayer de persuader them. — He will support you with all his credit. — He appuyer de crSditm. employs everybody to obtain that place. — That tires me io^^t le monde pour — — f. to death— Don't yr/grA^en the child I shall send a man. art. mort f. enfant. * Tlio French Academy leaves the choice of writing H paye, or il pate; je] payerai, or je paierai, or even ;e patrat ; but the best modern Grammarians are agreed on the change of the y into t, and present usage is conformable to their j opinion. 116 CONJUGATION OF VERBS ENDING IN lER, 208. g VIII. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OP VERBS ENDING IN lER. PRIER^ TO PRAY, TO REQUEST. . ) Je prie, r. j nous prions, Part. Pres. priant. Ind. Lnp. Je priaia, nous priions, Ptet. Je priai^ nous pri&mes, Fut. Je prierai, nous prierons, CoND. Je prierais, nous prierions, Imper. prions, SuBJ. ) g je prie, Pres. >c?nous priions. Imp. g je priasse, Ci>uous priassions. Part. Past, prid. tu pries, vous priez, tu priaia, vous priiez, tu priaa, vous priAtcs, tu prieras, vous prierez, tu prierais^ vous prienez, prie, priez, tu pries, vous priiez, tu priasscs, vous priassiez. il prie ; ils prient il priait ; ils priaient. il pria ; ils priSrent. il priera ; ils prieront. il prierait ; ils prieraient. qu'il prie ; qu'ils prient. il prie ; ils prient. il priat ; ils priassent. 209. Conjugate in the same manner all verbs ending in ier; as, Certifier, crier, ^tudier, lier, manier. to certify, to cry. to study, to tie. to handle. nier, oublier, plier, relier, remercier. to deny, to forget, to hind, to bind, to thank. Remark. — Prier and all verbs whose Present Parti- ciple ends in iant, take ii in the first and the second person plural of the Imperfect of the Indicative and Pre- sent of the Subjunctive ; that is, the t of the radical part (as pri)j and the i of the termination : I^ous priions^ vous priiez ; que nous liions, que vous liiez. EXERCISE LXXVII. I thank you for the honour you do me. — He studies de que faites night and day. — The plank was bending under him.— planche f. sous .. OP EXERCISE ON' VEUnS ENt)[NO iN lER. llf 1 shall never forget (wlint I owe you). — Request him to ce queje vous dois. d« come and (speak to me). — One (does not become) learned * vie parler. On ne devient pas without studying.— In handling that vase, ho broke it. sans inf-1 m. briser indA ling rti- 3nd *re- )art ms. lies OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 210. IIoA'cvcr irregular a verb may be, its irregula- rities never occur in the compound tenses, for which rctason we shall, except in a very few instances, dispense with these tenses in the various conjugations of irregular verbs. S I. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. The only irregular verbs of this conjugation arc alter^ to go ; s'cn aller^ to go away; envoyer^ to send ; and renvoyer, to send back. / 211. ALLEB, TO GO. Part. Pres. allant. Part. Past, alld. Ind. ) Je vais, Pres. ) nous aliens, tu vas, vous allez. il va; ils vont. Imp. J'allais, nous allions, tu allais, vous alliez. il allait ; ils allaient. Pret. J'aUai, nous all&mes, tu alias, vous allMes, ilalla; ils all^rent. Fut. J'irai, nous irons, tu iras, vous irez. il ira; ils iront. CoND. ) J'irais, Pres. } nous irions, tu irais, ^ vous iriez. il irait ; ils iraient. Lmper. allons, va, allez, qu'il aille ; qu'ils aillent. SuBj. ) ® j'aille, Pres. j G^nous allions, tu allies, vous alliez, il aille ; ils aillent. Imp. gj'allasse, Qf nous allassions, tu allasses, vous allassiez, ilaMt; ilsallassent 118 CONJUGATION OF THE VEBB S'Ji^f ALLEH. 'Nf 212. Remarks. — Aller is conjugated with the auxil- iary etre^ in all its compound tenses ; Je suis aUe\ fetaii aUe\ &c. The Imperative va takes an 5, when followed by en or y ; as, vas en savoir des novvelles; vas-y. We sometimes say, jefus^fai e'ie, favm's ete,faurais ete\ instead of j'allai, je suis alle, fetais aUe\ je serais alU. These expressions, however, have this difference, that avoir ete implies the return, and etre alle does not. Thus : il a ete a Rome^ means, that he went to Rome, and is returned, or that he has been in Rome, and has left it ; but il est alle a Rome means only, that he is gone to Rome. — (Acad.) 213. S'EN ALLER, to go away. INFmiTIVE. PRESENT. PAST. S*en r^\^r, to go away. \ S*en etre alle, to have gone away. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. COMP. 01 VRTICIPLE PRESENT. S'enallant, going away. \ ^^eu^ivkViiaM, having gone away PARTICIPLE PAST. — ^En alle, gone away. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Je m'en vais, tu t*eii vas, U s'en va, nous nous en allons, V0U8 vous en allez, ils s'en vent, IMPERFECT. Je m'en allais, tu t'en allais, il s'en allait, nous nous en allions, vous vous en alliez, ils s'en allaient, PRETERITE DEFINITE. Je m'en allai, . tu t'en alias, 11 s'en alia, nous nous en aMtnes, vous vous en aMtes^ ils s'en all^rentj I* S S I Compound Tenses. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. Je m'en suis aM, tu t'en es alld, il s'en est alle, nous nous en sommes alles, vous vous en ^tes alles, ils s'en sont all^s, PLUPERFECT. Je m'en ^tais alle, tu t'en ^tais alle, il s'en 6tait aU^, nous nous en etions all^s, vous vous en ^tiez all^s, ils s'en ^taient all^s, PRETERITE ANTERIOR. Je m'en fus all^, tu t'en fus all^, il s'en fut aU^, nous nous en f{imes all^s, VOUS vous en fiites all^s, ils s'en furent all^s. s r «* A i Si. ;> Jt • 2 i • COiJJuaATION OF THE VERB S'iJ^" AJ.LT.H. \\% Simple Tenses. FUTURE ABSOLUTE. Je m*en irai, tu t*en iras, il s'en ira, nous nous en irons, vous vous en irez, ils s'en iront, I- o ' Compound Tenses, FUTURE ANTERIOR. Jo m'en serai alle, tu t'en seraa alle, il s'en sera alle, nous nou i en serons all^s, | vous vous en serez alles, ~ ils s'en seront alles, V5 o re CONDITIONAL. PRESENT. Je m'en irais, tu t'en irais, il s'en irait, nous nous en irions, vous vous en iriez, ils s'en iraient, CO *§! .a 2 PAST. Je m'en serais alle, tu t'en serais alle, il s'en serait alle, nous nous en serious alles, | ^ vous vous en seriez alles, ^| >* ils s'en seraient allds, * § o » IMPERATIVE. Affirmaiwely. Va-t'en, qu'il s'en aille, allons-nous-en, allez-vous-en. qu'ils s'en aillent, 8 Negatively. Ne t'en va pas, qu'il ne s'en aille pas, ne nous en allons pas, ne vous en allez pas, qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas, a o SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. PRETERITE. va S C» ft r* a S '^ JS PLUPERFECT. a a>- Que je m'en fusse alle, que tu t'en fusses all^, qu'il s'en fClt all^, ouous nous en fussions §vou3 vous en fussiez qu'ils s'en-^j^ent 1^ w.a SH 214. When S'en aller is used interrogatively, we say, M^en irai-je^ fen iras-tu^ s^en ira-t-ilj nous en irons-noui^ vom en irez-vous. s'en iront-ih ? 120 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 215. Envoy er^ to send, and renvor/er, to send back, to dismiss, are regular, except in the Future and the Con- ditional, which, as we have already said (p. 115), make fenverrai^ fenverrais ; je renverrai^ je renverrais. I EXERCISE LXXVIII. I am going to pay some visits. — ^Ile goes from town to town. * faire visited. en They are going to the country. — Blue and pink go campagnef. axt.bleum. art. rose m. well together.— "We went by land. — She is gone to church. — terre. art. eglisef. Let us go away from here. — Why do you go away so soon ? Pourquoi t6t —I will send my servant to the post-office.— She would domestique m. poste f. dismiss her chambermaid. — They would send back their horses. femme de chamhre. 216. § n. IREEGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. Abstenir (S'), to abstain^ is conjugated like ^e»ir, wliich is exemplified farther on. AccouRiR, to run to^ is conjugated like Courir^ with this diflference, that its compound tenses are sometimes formed with avoir y and sometimes with etre^ according as it denotes state or action. (See No. 172.) AccuEiLLiR, to receive ; see Cueillir. r 217. ACQUijRIB, TO AcquiViE, Part. Pres. acqu^rant. Part. Past, acquis. Ind. ) J'acquiers, tu acquiers, 11 acquiert ; 2Ves. ) nous acqu^rons, Imp. J'acqu^rais, nous acqu^rions, Pret. J'acquis, nous acquimesi Fut, J'acqueiTai, nous acquerroDS, vous acquerez, ils acqui^rent. tu acqu^raiS) il acqudrait ; vous acqu^riez, ils acqu^raient. tu acquis, il acquit ; vous acqultes, ils acquirent. tu acquerras, il acquerra ; vous acquerrez, ils acquerront. i IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 121 ^i ) i CON'D. ) JVes. j Imper. Jacquerrais, nous acquerrions, acqu^rons, SuBJ. \ gj'acquiere, iVc5. j O'nous acqudrions, Imp. gj'acquisse, Cnou3 acquissions, tu acquerrais. voua acquerriez, acquiers, acqudrez, tu aequieres, vous acqueriez, tu acquisses, vous acquissiez, ilacquerrait; ils acquerraicnt. qu'il acquiere ; qu'ils acqui^rent. il acquiere ; ils acquierent. il acquit ; Lis acquissent. 218. Conjugate in the same manner: — C seldom used but in the infinitive, the pre- Conquerir, to conquer A terite definite, the imperfect of the sub- ( junctive, and the compound tenses. Querir, to fetch, is used after the verbs aUer, venir^ en- voyer ; as, allez querir, go and fetch; envoyez qtieriry send for. It Is confined to familiar conversation, and is getting obsolete. {Querir is better than Querir,) 219. ASSAILLIR^ to assault. Part Frea. assaillant. Part. Past, assailli. LvD. 1 [nd. \ ^res. j Imp. Fret. Fut. COND. \ Pres. j Imper. J'assaille, nous assaillc 9, J'assaillais, nous assaillions, J'assaillis, il assaille ; ils assaillent. il assaillait ; ils assaillaicnt. il assaillit ; tu assailles, vous assaUlez, tu assaillais, vous assaiUiez, tu assaiUis, nous assailhmes, vous assaillites, ils assaillirent. J'assaillirai, tu assailh'ras, il assaillira ; nous assailHrons, vous assaillirez, ils assailUront. J'assaiUirais, tu assaillirais, il assaillirait ; nous assaillh'ions, vous assaiUiriez, ils asaailliraieut assaille, qu'U assaille ; assaillons, assaillez, qu'ils assaillent. SuBJ. ") g j'assaille, tu assailles, il assaille ; Pres. j O'nous assaillions, vous assailliez, ils assaillent. /mjo. gj'assaillisse, ^ tu assariisaes, il assaillit; O'nous assaillissions, vous assaillissiez, ils assailhssent. 122^ lUftEGULAll AKD DEI*ECTIVE VEtlt?3 Conjugate in the same manner tressailHr, to start, A'ote„—J. J. Rousseau, and other writers, have. for the sake of euphony, written In tho present of the Indicative, il tressaUlit, Instead of t7 tressaiUe. EXERCISE LXXIX. lie had acquired great influence over liis contemporaries une f. sur contemporainm. He would acquire honour and reputation.— 32 honneur m.hm. 32 reputation f. Alexander conquered a great part of Asia.— A conquered ind-3 partiet art. - province. — We were overtaken by a furious storm. — At * f. ind-3 assaillir a' temp$tef. every word they said to him about his son, the good chaque qu* on disait * de old man leaped for joy. — She started with fear. vieillard tre^saillir ind-2 de jote. ind-3 de peur. 220. B^NiR, to hiess, is conjugated like/mr (see p. 73), and is only irregular in its past participle, which makes benitf henUe; and heni^ henie, BenUy hmiUy is used only in speaking of things con- secrated by a religious ceremony ; as, du pain henitj consecrated bread ; de Veau henitCj holy water. 221. BOUILLIB, to boil. Ind. Pres .} Imp. COND. Fres Part. Pres. bouillant. Je bous, nous bouillons, Je bouillais, nous bouillions, Je bouillis, nous bouillimes, Je bouillirai, nous bouillirous, Je bouillirais, Part. Pastf bouilli. Fret. Fut. Imper. tu bous, vous bouillez, tu bouillais, vous bouilliez, tu bouillis, vous bouillitesj tu bouilliras, vous bouillirez, tu bouillirais, nous bouilliribns, vous bouilliriez, bouillons, bous. bouilleK. 11 bout ; lis bouOlent. 11 bouillait ; lis bouillaient. il bouillit ; ils bouillirent. il bouillira ; ils bouilliront. il bouillirait ; ils bouilliraient. qu'il bouille ; qu'ils bouillent. OP THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 123 rittcn SuBJ. \ g je bouille, tu bouilles, il bouille ; iVe*. j O*iiou8 boumions, vous bouilliez, ils bouillent. Imp. § je bouillisse, tu bouillisses, ilbouillit; O*nous bouillissions, vous bouillissicz, ils bouillissent. This verb is seldom used in French, except in the third persons singular and plural ; as, L'<2au boutj the water boils ; ces choux ne houillaient pas^ these cabbages did not boil. But when to boil has a noun or pronoun for its object, the French then make use of the different tenses of the verb /aire before the infinitive bouillir; as, Je fais bouillir^ nous faisons bouillir ^ &c. Therefore say, Je fais bouillir de la viande^ I boil some meat, and not je bolts, , ♦ ' * JRebouilUry to boil again, is conjugated in the same manner, and follows the same rules. Ebouillirj to boil away, is seldom used but in the In- finitive and past participle Sbouilliy m ; ebouilUe^ f. ^ 222. COURIR, TO run. Part. Pres. courant. Part. Past, couru. Ind. ) Je cours, Pres. \ nous courons, Imp. Je courais, nous courions, Pret. Je courus, nous courClmes, Fut. Je courrai, nous courrons, CoND. j Je courraig, Pres. \ nous courrions, Impeb. courons, SuBJ. ) g je courc, Pres. ) O'nous courions, Imp. g je courusse, G^nous courussions, tu cours, vous courez, tu courais, vous couriez, tu courus, vous cour(ites, tu courras, vous courrez, tu courrais^ vous courriez, cours, courez, tu coures, vous couriez, tu courusses, vous courussiez. 11 court ; ils courent. ilcourait; ils couraient. il courut ; ils coururent. ilcourra; ils courront. il courraif. ; ils courraient. qu'il coure ; qu'ils courent. il coure ; ils courent. ilcouriit; ils courusseni 223. Conjugate in the same manner : — Accourir, concourir, discourir, to run to. to concur, to discourse. encounr, parcourir, secourir, to incur, to run over to succour I i\ 124 IRREGULAR AKD DEFECTlVlS VtRBS EXERCISE LXXX. God had blessed the race of Abraham Does the water f. boilf — We were boiling some potatoes. — Boil that meat again, it is not (done enough). — You run faster viande f. assez cuite. plus vite than I. — Will men always run after shadows ? moi. ai't. 32 chimhre f. pi. — Socrates passed the last day of his life in discoursing passer d inf-1 on the immortality of the soul You would incur the immortaliti displeasure of the prince. — I have run over the whole town disgrdce f. * * to find him This sauce has ^boiled away Hoo much pour trouver 87 f. est f. trap CouvRiR, to cover; see Ouvrir. 224. CUEILLIR^ to gather. Part. Pres. cueillant. Part. Past, cueilli. Je cueille, tu cueilles, il cueille ; [nd. ) *res. ) nous cueillons, vous cueillez, ils cueillent. Ind. Pr Imp. Je cueillais, tu cueillais, il cueillait ; nous cueillions, vous cueilliez, ils cueillaient. Fret. Je cueillis, tu cueillis, il cueillit ; nous cueillimes, vous cueillites, ils cueillirent. Fut. Je cueillerai, tu cueilleras, il cueillera ; nous cueillerons, vous cueillerez, ils cueilleront. CoxD. \ Je cueillerais^ tu cueillerais, il cueillerait ; Pres. j nous cueillerions, vous cueilleriez, ils cueilleraient. Iaiper. cueille, qu'il cueille ; cueillons, cueillez, qu'ils cueillent. SuBJ. \ § je cueille, tu cueilles, il cueille ; Pres. j O*nous cueillions, vous cueilliez, ils cueillent. lup. g jo cueilliase, tu cueillisses, il cueillit; O'nous cueillissions, vous cueillissiez, ils cueillissent. 225. Conjugate in the same manner : — Accueillir, to receive, to welcome \ recueillir, to collect. / Pri OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 125 rater that iter vite Pl. sing the own uch ^ 226. LORMIR^ to sleep. Pari. Fres. dormant. Fart. Fasty dormi. Qt. tu dors, Youa dormez, tu dormais^ vous dormiez, tu dormis, vous dormites, tu dormiras, vous dormirez, tu dormirais, nou3 dormirions, vous dormiriez, dors, dormez, tu dormes, vous dormiez, , tu dormisses, O'nous dormissions, vous dormissiez. Je dors, nous dormons, Je dormais, nous dormions, Je dormis, nous dormimes, Je dormirai, nous dormii'ons, Je dormirais. Ind. ) /Ve*. / Imp. Fret. Fut. COND. ) Fres. } Imper. dormons, SuBJ. \ gje dorme, Fres. j crnous dormions. Imp. g je dormisse. il dort ; ils dorment il dormait ; ils dormaient. il dormit ; ils dormirent. il dormira ; ils dormirunt. il dormirait ; ils dormiraient qu'il dorme ; qu'ils dorment. il dorme ; ils dorment. il dormit ; ils dormissent. 227. Conjugate in the same manner : — Endormir, to lull asleep. I se rendormir, to fall asleep s'endormir, to /all asleep. | again. 228. Faillir, to fail. This verb is used only in the piiBsent of the Infinitive ; in the Participle past faiUi ; in the Preterite definite, Je faillis^ tu faillis^ il fdillit; nous faillimesy vous faillites^ ils faillirent; and in the compound i^nsQ^^ faifailli^f avals failli^ &c. r Its derivative defaUlir^ to faint, to fail, is scarcely ever used but in the first and third persons plural of the pre- sent of the Indicative, nou^ defaillons^ ils defaillent ; in the Imperfect, je defaillais^ &c. ; in the Preterite definite, je defailliSf &c. ; in the Preterite indefinite, fai defaillij &c. ; and in the Infinitive defaillir, 229. Fleurir, to blossom^ in its literal sensCj is regular; but used figuratively^ signifying to be in a prosperous state, to flourish, to be in repute, it msLkes fiorissant in the present Participle, and florissait^ fiorissaient^ in the Imperfect of the Indicative. 126 irtllEGULAll AND DEFECTIVE VERBS EXERCISE LXXXI. I will gather you some fine flowers. — We shall collect in fleur f. dans ancient history, imp art. a 1 32 t important and valuable facta. — ^pricieux Yait m. The hare generally sleeps with its eyes open lievre m. ^rainairement ^ * * art. ouvert That song lulls one asleep. — I fell asleep about three o'clock. * . ihd-4 vers art. — ^Ile (was near) losing his life. — His strength faillir ind-3 inf-\ • art. /orce f. pi. fails (every day). — Athens flourished under Pericles. defaillir tons les jours. Athenes ind-2 sous Piricles. ^ 230. FUIHj TO FLY, TO RUN AWAY, TO SHUN. Fart. Fres. fuyant. Fart. Pasty fui. Ind. ) Je fuis, Fres. j nous fuyons, Imp. Je fuyais, nous fuyions, Fret. Je fuis, nous fuimes, Fut. Je fuirai, nous fuirons, CoxD. ) Je fuirais, Fres. ) nous fiiirions, LUPER. fuyons, SuBJ. \ g je fuie, Fres. j^nous fuyions, Imp. gje fuisse, C?nous fuissions, tu fuis, vous fuyez, tu fuyais, vous fuyiez, tu fuis, vous fuites, tu fuiras, vous fuirez, tu fuirais, vous fuiriez, fuis, fuyez, tu fuies, _ vous fuyiez, tu fuisses, vous fuissiez, ilfuit; ils fui^nt. il fuyait ; ils fuyaient. ilfuit; ils fuirent. ilfuira; ils fuiront. il fuirait ; ils fuiraient. qu'il fuie ; qu'ils fuient. il fuie ; ils fuient ilfuit; ils fuissent. 231. Conjugate after the same manner, s^enfuir^ to run away. In the Imperative we say, enfuis-toiy and not enfitis-fenj nor fuis-t'en. 232. GtiisiR, to lie^ toliedoion^ is obsolete. "We, however, still say, II gttj notis gisons^ vous gisezj iU gisent. Je gi- OP THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 127 in dans a. — m. n srt ilock. fch f. pi. es. les. run not 7er, sats^ tu glsaisy il gisait; nous gisionSj vous gtsiezj Us gisaient. OisanL — (Acad.) Ci-git (here lies) is the usual form by which an epitaph is begun. 233. HAIR, TO HATE. Fart. Pres. haissant. Part. Past, hai. Tnd. > I'res. ) Je hais, nous haissons, Imp. Je haissais, nous haissions, Pret. Je hais, nous haimes, Fttt. Je hairai, nous hairons, CoND. ) Je hairais, Fres. j nous hairions, Imfer. halssons, SuBJ. > g je haisse, Pres. j ^nous haissions, Imp. g je haisse, C^nous haissions, tu hais, vous haissez, tu haissais, vous haissiez, tu hais, vous haites, tu hairas, vous hairez, tu hairais^ Tous halnez, hais, haissez, tu haisses, vous haissiez, tu haisses, vous haissiez. il halt ; ils haissent. il haissait ; ils haissaient. il halt ; ils hairent. ilhalra; ils ha'iront. il hairait ; ils halraient. qu'il haTsse ; qu'ils haissent. il haisse ; Us haissent. il hiirt ; ils haissent. 234. Remarks. — Tl\e h is aspirated in this verb, and a diaeresis (••) is placed over the i, throughout all the tenses, to show that it is to be pronounced separately from the preceding vowel a; as, ha-i; except, however, the three persons singular of the present of the Indicative, and the second person singular of the Imperative, which, forming only one syllable, are written without the diaeresis, thus : Je hais, tu hais, il hait ; haisy and pronounced — Je he, tu he, il he ; he. This verb is seldom used in the second person singular of the Imperative, the Preterite definite, or the Imperfect of the Subjunctive, and in these two last tenses, instead of making use of the circumflex accent: nous hatmes, ^ ,! I 128 lUREQULAll AND DEFECTIVE VERBS vous haites ; qu^il hatty we use the diseresis, notts haimei^ vous haites ; qu'il hait, Mentir, to lie^ to utter falsehood^ is conjugated like tentir. Ind. ) IVe*. J Imp. Pret. Fut. COND. ) Prea. ) 235. MOURIR, to die. Part. Pres. mouraut. Part. Pastf mort- tu meurs, Je meurs, nous mourons, Je mourais^ nou3 raounona, Je mourns, nous mouriimes, Je mourrai, nous mourrons, Je mourrais, nous mourrions, mourons, SuBj. ) g je meure, Pres. j o?nous mourions, Imp. gje mourusse, vous mourez, tu mourais, vous mouriez, tu niourus, il meurt ; lis meurent. 11 mourait ; lis mouraient. il mourut ; vous mouriltes, lis moururent. tu mourras, il mourra ; vous mourrez, tu mourrais, vous mourriez, meurs, mourez, tu meures, vous mouriez, tu mourusses, ils mourront. il mourrait ; ils mourraient. qu'il meure ; qu'ils meurent il meure ; ils meurent. il mourCit ; O'nous mourussions, vous mourussiez, ils mourussent. Mourir is conjugated with the auxiliary etre in its compound tenses. — The double r of the Future and Conditional must be sounded strongly. When this verb takes the reflected form, se mourir^ it means to he at the point of death ; but, in this sense, it is seldom used except in the present and impeifect of the Indicative. — (Acad.) 236. OuiR, to hear. (Active and defective verb.) Part, pasty oui*. Ind. pret, j'ouis, tu ou'is, &c, Subj. imperf. qae j'oui'sse, qu tu ou'isses, qu'il ouit, &c. This verb is chiefly used in the compound tenses^ which are generally followed by another verb in the infinitive; as, Je I'ai oui pr6cher, — (Acad.) I I "have heard him preach, Je I'avais oui dire. ' I had heard it said. OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 129 EXERCISE LXXXII. (Let us make haste)» iimeflies — I cannot meet hiin, Hdtons-nous art. nepuis rencontrer he shuns me.— I Jiaie falsehood. — Let us hate vice. — art. mensongem. art. m. He died some time after. — - John Calvin, the celebrated 127 c6lebre reformer, died at Geneva, on the 27th May 1564. — He riformateur * is dying. — All the witnesses have been heard. — Anger se mourir timoin ra. art. collre f. soon dies in a kind heart. — Here lies an honest man. ^promptement * bon honnite v^ 237. OUVRIR, TO open. Part. Prcs. ou\tant. Ind. ) J'ouvre, Pres. } nous ouvrons, Imp. J'ouvrais, nous ouvrions, Pret. J'ouvris, nous ouvrimes, Fut. J'ouvrirai, nous ouvrirons, CoND. ) J'ouvrirais, Pi'es. ) nous ouvririons, Imper. ouvrons, SuBJ. ) § j'ouvre, Pres. j c?nou8 ouvrions. Imp. gj'ouvrisse, Q?nous ouvrissions. Part. Pa&i, ouvert. tu ouvres, vous ouvrez, tu ouvrais, vous ouvriez, tu ouvris, vous ouvrites, tu ouvriras, vous ouvrirez, tu ouvrirais, vous ouvririez, ouvre, ouvrez, tu ouvres, vous ouvriez, tu ouvrisses, vous ouvrissiez. il ouvre ; ils ouvrent. ii ouvrait ; ils ouvraient. 11 ouvrit ; ils ouvrirent. il ouvrira ; ils ouvriront. il ouvrirait ; ils ouvriraient. qu'il ouvre ; qu'ils ouvrent. il ouvre ; ils ouvrent. il ouvi'it ; ils ouvrisssent. 238. Conjugate in the same manner : — Couvrir, to cover. d^couvrir, to discover, to uncover. offrir, to offer. recouvrir, to cover again. rouvrir, to open again. soufFrir, to suffer. v-/ 239. PAHTIHy TO SET out, to go away. Part. Pres. partant. Part. Past, parli. Je pars, tu pars, il part ; Ind ) Pres. ) nou» p pent, lent. Pret. Jo sentis, nous senttmcs, Fui. Jb Bontirai, noua sentirons, Je sentirais, nous sentirionSi COND Pres Impfu. seutons, SuBj. ) §je sente, Pres. j callous scntiona, Imp. gjo sentisse, tu sentia, vous Bcntites, tu scntirns, voua scntircz, tu sentirais, vuus sentiricz, sens, sentez, tu sentes, vous sentiez, tu sentisses, il Bcntil ; lis seutirent. il scntira ; ils scntirout. il scntirait ; ils sentiraient. qu'il sente ; qu'ils senteut. il sente ; ils senteut. il sentit ; ils sentiascut. O'nous sentiaaiona, voua sentisaiez, 242. Conjugate in the same manner : — Conaentir, to consent. mentir, to lie. preasentir, to foresee. ressentir, to resent. se repentir, to repent. 243. SERVIR^ to serve, to help to. Part. Pres. servant. Part. Pasty servi. Inu. 1_ Pres. j" Je sera, nous servons. tu sers, vous servez, il aert ; ils seiTent. Imp. Je servais, nous servions. tu servais, vous serviez, il aeiTait ; ils servaient. Pret. Je servis, noua servimes, tu servis, voua aervitea, il servit ; ila servirent. Fut. Je servirai, noua aervirons, tu aerviraa, voua aervirez, il aervira ; ila aerviront. CoND. ■> Pres. j Je serviraia, noua servirions. tu aervirais, voua aerviriez. il aervirait ; ila serviraicnt. Iaiper. servens, sera, servez, qu'il serve ; qu'ils servent. SuBJ. ) gje serve, ^ Pres. j c?nous servions, tu serves, vous serviez, il serve ; ila aervent. Imp. gje servisse, C?nous aerviasions, tu serviases, voua aerviaaiez, il servit ; ils servissent. 244. Conjugate in the same manner, desservir, to clear the table. Asservir, to enslave, to subject, is regular, and conju- gated like Jl7iir, 132 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS EXERCISE LXXXIV. lie who scn?C5 well his country (has no need) of ancestors.— * w'a pas besoin 40 You will feel the effects of it. — Smell this rose Shall wc effetm. 108 ^ f . consent to that hargain ? — Never (tell a falsehood).— I foresaw marchem. mentir all those misfortunes. — He repents of his bad conduct. — malheur m. mauvais conduiie f He serves his friends with warmth. — Help the gentleman chaleur. 'd * ^monsieur to some partridge. — Shall I have the honour to help you to * yerdrix f de a wing of a chicken ? — Clear the table, ailet * I V 245. SOBTlJRy to go out, to come out. Part. Pres. sortant. Ind. ) Je Pres. ) noi Part. Past, sorti. sors, nous sortons, Imp. Je sortais, nous sortions, Pret. Je sortis, nous sortimes, Fut. Je sortirai, nous sortirons, CoND. \ Je sortirais, Pres. } nous sortirions, Imper. sortons, Suiu. \ §je sorte, Pres. j"o*uou3 sortions, Imp. § je sortisse, O*nou3 sortissions, tu sors, vous sortez, tu sortais, vous sortiez, tu sortis, vous sortites, tu sortiras, vous sortirez, tu sortirais, vous sortiriez, sors, sortez, tu sortes, vous sortiez, tu sortisses, vous sortissipz. il sort ; ils sortent. il sortait ; ils sortaient. il sortit ; ils sortirent. il sortira ; ils sortiront. il sortirait ; ils sortiraient. qu'il sorte ; qu'ils sortent. il sorte ; ils sortent. il sortit ; ils sortissent. 246. Conjugate in the same manner, ressortir^ to go out again. OF THE SECOND CONJUGATIOW. 133 EXERCISE LXXXV. I go out every morning' before breakfast. — The tout art. matin m. pi. avant fox comes out of his hole. — We went out of the town reiiardm. , terrier m. after him. — Everybody is gone out. — I shall go out in half ap7'es Tout le monde an hour K I were as ill as you, I would not go out malade Do not go out to-day. — He (is just) gone ow^.— He went aujourd hui. vient de iuf-1 out again immediately I will not go out again tliis evening. ' sur-le-champ. soir m. V" Ind. 1 Pres. > Imp, Prct. 247. TENIR^ to hold, to keep. Part. Pres. tenant. Part. Past, tenu. Je tiens, nous tenons, Je tenais, nous tenions, Je tins, nous tlnmes, Je t'endrai, nous tiendrons, Je tiendrais, nous tiendrions, tenons, SuBJ. ) g je tienne, Pres. j cynous tenions. Imp. gje tinsse, ©•nous tinssions. Fut. COND. ) Pres. j" Imperf. tu tiens, vous tenez, tu tenais, vous teniez, tu tins, vous tiutes, tu tiendras, vous tieudrez, tu tiendrais, vous tiendriez, tiens, tenez, tu tiennes, vous teniez, tu tliis.ses, il tient ; ils tienuent. il tenait ; ils tenaient. il tint ; ils tinrent. il tiendra ; ils tieudront. il tiendrait ; ils tiendraient. qu'il tienne ; qu'ils ti^nnent. il tienne ; ils tiennent. il tint ; ils tinssent. vous tmssiez, 248. Conjugate in tLe same manner : — S'abstenir, to abstain. appartenir, to belong. contenir, to contain, [verse, entretenir, to keep up; to con- maintenir, to maintain. obtenir, to obtain, [retain. retenir, to get hold again; to soutenir, to sustain. Observe that in these verbs the n is doubled, whenever it is followed by e mute ; but in no other case. 134 lUnEGDLAll AKD DEFECTIVE VtRBS I EXERCISE LXXXVI. I hold it fast, it shall" not escape from me. — Liberality bien ichapper * art. holds a medium between prodigality and avarice le milieu m. entre art. art. f. This garden is well k^t He abstained from drinking on jardin m. boire * that day. — These horses belong to our general — England cejour-ld. art. and the principality of Wales contain fifty two count^'ea. — principautef. Oallest com^em. They conversed about trifles. — I shall maintain it s* de bagatelles. everywhere. — Do not maintain so absurd an opinion. — Has partout. hi 'absurde * f. he obtained permission ? — Detain not the wages of a f. retenir gages m.^ii. servant. — That column supports all the building. domestiqueva. colonnef. soutenir bdtimentuu sT 249. YENIR, to come. Part. Pres. venant. Ind. ) Je viens, Pres. \ nous venous, Imp. Je venais, nous venions, Je vina, nous vinmes, Part. Past, venu. Pret. Fut. COND. ) Pres. \ Imper. Je viendrai, nous viendrons, Je viendrais, nous viendrions, venous. SuBj. ) § je vienne, Pres. \ O'nous venions, Imp. g je vinsse, ^ O'nous vinssions, tu viens, vous venez, tu venais, vous veniez, tu vins, vous vintes, tu viendras, vous viendrez, tu viendrais, vous viendriez, viens, venez, tu viennes, vous veniez, tu vinsses, vous vinssiez. il vient ; ils viennent. il venait ; ils venaient. il vint ; ils vinrent. il viendra ; ils viendront. il viendrait ; ils viendraient. qu'il vienne ; qu'ils viennent. il vienne ; ils viennent. il vint ; ils vinssent. 250. Venir is conjugated like ienh; but with this or THE SECOKt) CONJUGATION. 135 fcrality ice f. Iff on * Igland lea. — m. in it difference, that in its compound tenses it always takes the auxiliary etre, 251. Conjugate in the same manner: — Conrenir, to agree ; to suit. devenir, to become. disconvenir, to deny, [terfere. intervenir, to intervene; toin- parvenir, to attain. prevenir, to anticipate f to pre- se ressouvenir, to recollect, [vent. revenir, to come hack. se souvenir, to remember. subyenir, to relieve. 252. Prevenir and Suhvenir are conjugated in their compound tenses with the auxiliary avoir, Convenir^ when it signifies to- agree., takes etre; but avoir ^ when it signifies to suit. V 253. VETIR, TO clothe. Part. Pres. vetant. Part. Pasty vetu. Ind. ) Je v^ts, Pres. j nous vetons, Imp. Je vetais, nous vetions, Pret. Je vetis, nous vetimes, Fut. Je vetirai, nous Tetirons, CoND. ■) Je T^tirais, Pi'es, j nous y^tirions, Imter. yetons, SuBJ. ) § je vete, Pres. jO'nous vitious, Imp. g je vetisse, cynous yetissions, tu yets, yous yetez, tu yetais, yous yetiez, tu vetis, vous vetites, tu v^tiras, yous vetirez, tu vetirais, vous v^tiriez, vets, vetez, tu vetes, vous yetiez, iu vetisses, yous vetissiez. ilvSt; ils y^tent. il y^tait ; ib vetaient. il vetit ; ils vetirent. il vetira ; ils vetiront. il v^tirait ; ils vetiraient. qu*il v^te ; qu'ils vetent. ilvi^te; ils vSteut. il vetit; ils v^tissent. 254. Vetiry in the singular of the Present of tho Indi- cative, and in the singular of the Imperative, is seldom used. It is most frequently reflected, and then it signi- fies to dress oneself. In this sense it is conjugated in its compound tenses, like all other pronominal verbs, with the auxiliary etre : Je me suis vetu ; nous nous sommes vetm. Conjugate in the same manner : — Ddvetir, to divest, to strip. \ Rev^tir, to clothe, to invest. 136 mUEGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS EXERCISE LXXXVU. I come from LonJon You come verj' seasonably. — He fort d propos. came on foot.— Come on Saturday morning, at ten o'clock — He ind-4 dpied. * heures. will come back before the end of this month. — We have agreed finf. moism. about the conditions. — That she might become more prudent.— de f. Do you deny the fact ? — He will not interfere with that de faitm, dans affair. — We shall attain our end. — Remember your affaire f. d, butm. w«3 promises. — They have relieved all his wants. — He only promessef. On 111 d besoinm. ne Ijasaed for a traveller, but lately he has assumed the ind-2 que voyageur depuis peu revitir character of an envoy He dressed himself in hasie. cai'acterem. * envoy em. aoxi, hdtethtu Je noi 255. § HI. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTR^E VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 256. As sEOiR j to set, is an active verb ; but it is prin- cipally used as a reflected verb, and is conjugated as follows : — / S'ASSEOIR, TO SEAT ONESELF, TO SIT, TO SIT DOWN. Part. Pros. s'a?seyant. Part. Past, assis. \ Ind. ) Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds, il s'assied ; ) Pres. j nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, ils s'asseient. ^^ Imp. Je m'asseyais,^ tu t'asseyais, il s'asseyait ; \ nous nor sasseyions, vous vous asseyiez, ils s'asseyaient. Pret. Je m'assis, tu t'assis, il s'assit ; nous nous assimes, vous vous aasites, ils s'assirent. . ±'ut. Je m'assi^rai, tu t'assieraa, il s'assi^ra ; Y nous nous assierous, vous vous assi^rez, ils s'assi^ront. Ln«»- OP' THE TII[RD CONJUGATION. 137 the Je m'assieraia, nous nous assierions, asseyons-nous, g je m'asseie, C? nous nous asseyions, « je m'assisse, iM^^ 1«8 ifttlEGtjLAn A^'D t)F.t*ECTtVE VfiRCS on this form. — I (had risen) to go out, but he made me sur banc m. m'etais leve pour 'Jit sit down again, — He is much fallen in the esteem of the fort aichoir esiimef. public. — Tliis bill of exchange is due to-day. m. lettref. change avjourd hui. ^ 259. MOUVOIR, to move. Tart. Pres. mouvant. Part. Past, mu. V Ind. ) Vres. r Imp. Pret. Fut. Je mens, nous mouvons, Je mouvais, nous mouvions, Je mus, nous mClmes, Je mouvrai, nous momTons, Je mouvrais, nous mouvrions, mouvons, SuBJ. ) gje meuve," Pres. jo'nous mouvions. Imp. g je musse, C^nous mussions, COND. ") Pres. ) Lmper. tu meus, vous mouvez, tu mouvais, vous mouviez, tu mus, vous mfites, tu mouvras, vouz mouvrez, tu mouvrais, vous mouvricz, meus, mouvez, tu meuves, vous mouviez, tu musses, vous mussiez. il meut ; ils meuvent. i! mouvait ; ils mouvaient. 11 mut; ils murent. il mouvra ; ils mouvront. il mouvrait ; ils mouvraient. qu'il meuve ; qu'ils meuvent. il meuve ; ils meuvent il mClt ; ils mussent. 260. Conjugate in the same manner, emoxivoir^ to stir up, to move ; and promouvoir, to promote. This last verb is seldom used but in the Infinitive, and in the compound tenses. Pleuvoir, to rain; sec page 104. \ ^ 261. POUHrOIB, TO PROVIDE. Part. Pres. pourvoyant. Part. Past, pourvu. Ind. \ Je pourvois, tu pourvois, il pourvoit ; Pres. ) nous pourvoyons, vous pourvoyez, ils pourvoient. Imp. Je pourvoyais, tu pourvoyais, il pourvoyait ; nous pourvoyions, vous pourvoyiez, ils pourvoyaieut. 01^ TttE TtllllD CONJUGATION iTie the it. It. stir last the tit. Fret. Fut, COND. ) Ties, i Impeb. SUBJ. j Firs, j Imp. Je pourvus, nous pourvumes, Je pourvoirai, nous pourvoirons, Je pourvoirais, nous pourvoh'ions, pourvoyons, 2je pourvoie, (^nous pourvoyions, § je pourvusse, O*nous pourvussions, tu pourvus, vous pourvCltes, tu pourvoiras, vous pourvoirez, tu pourvoirais^ vous pourvoiriez, pourvois, pourvoyez, tu pourvoies, vous pourvoyiez, tu pourvusses, vous pourvu&aiez, n9 il pourvut ; iis pourvurent. il pourvoira ; ils pourvoiront. il pourvoirait ; ils pourvoiraient. qu'il pourvoie ; qu'-Jspourvoient. il pourvoie ; ils pourvoient. il pourvClt ; ils pourvussent. 262. POUrOIE, TO BE ABLE. (To cm.— Walker.) ) Part. Pres. pouvant. Ind. ) Je puis, or je peux, tu peux, vous pouvez, } Part. Past, pu. Pres. } nous pouvons, Imp. Je pouvais, nous pouvions, Fret. Je pus, nous p^mes, Je pourrai, nous pourrons, Je pourrais, nous pourrions, (No Imperative.) SuBJ. ) gje puisse, Pres. fcnous puissi Fut. COXD. ) Pres. ) tu pouvais, vous pouviez, tu pus, vous pfltes, tu pourras, vous pourrez, tu pourrais, vous pouniez. il pent ; ils peuvent. il pouvait ; ils pouvaient. il put ; ils purent. il pourra ; ils pourront. il pourrait ; ils pourraient. j o^nous puissioiis, Imp. g je pusse, ©•nous pussions. il puisse ; ils puissent. il p^it ; ils nussent. tu puisscs, vous puissiez, tu pusses, vous pussiez, 263. Remarks. — In the Future and Conditional of this verb, one r only is pronounced, although written with two. In the Present of the Indicative, we say je puis or Je peux ; however, Je puis is much more used, and ought to be preferred, since interrogatively we always say puis-Je / Quels vcBXix puis'je former? — (La Harm.') QaQpuisJe igouter & cet 61oge? — (C. JDelavigne.') 140 inUEGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS / Moreover, je puis^ and not Je peux, is the expression [employed in the writings of the best French authors. , . . Enfin je puis parler en liberty ; Je puis dans tout son jour mettre la v^rit^. — (Jtacine.') Je ne puis bien parler, et ne saurais me taire. — (Boiteau.) . . , Je ne puis so^ger Que cette horloge exibte, et n'ait point d'f -loger. — {Voltaire.) Je puis 6tre un strviteur inutile. — {Massillon.) We say : je ne puis^ and je ne puis pes. In the first phrase, the negative is less strong : Je ne puis implies difficulties. Je ne puis pas expresses impossibility. PRty ALOiii J to prevail ; see Valoir, T*ROMouvoiR, to promote ; see Mouvoir, 264. Ravoir, to have again, to get again^ is only used In the Present of the Infinitive. Figuratively, and familiarly, we say se ravoir^ in tho sense of to recover^ to gather new strength : Allons, monsieur, tdchez un peu de vous ravoir. — (J. /. Hotuiseau.) EXERCISE LXXXIX. The spring which moves the whole machine is very ressortm. mouvoir ^ ^ f. iiiffcnious ^He moved the heart of that unfeelinff man. — emouvoir coeur m. Hnsensible He has been promoted to the dignity of chancellor. — chancelier. He will provide for all your wants. — I cannot answer you. — a besoin m. Can I be useful to you ? — Save himself who can. — Can you utile Sauve * lend me an umbrella ? — I could not foresee that event. — prMer ind-2 prevoir evenement m. 1 shall never he able to persuade him. — We would be able ^ * persuader to go out. — Try to get it again, • 245 Tdcher de ^ > OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. in ession rs. •^ I 265. SA VOIR, TO know. Part. Pres. sachant. Part. Past, su. Ind. ) Je sais, Prcs. j nous savons, Imp. Je savais, nous savions, I^et. Je sus, nous si^mes, Je saurai, nous saurons, Je saurais, nous saurions, saclions, g je sache, O'nous sacliions, Imp. § Je susse, QPnous sussions, Flit. CONI). ) Pres. ) Imter. SUBJ. Pres. tu sais, vous savez, tu savais, vous saviez, tu sus, vous siites, tu sauras, vous saurez, tu saurais, vous sauriez, saclie, sachez, tu saches, vous sacliiez, tu susses, vous sussiez, il salt ; ils savent. il savait ; ils savaient. il sut ; ils surent. il saura ; ils sauront. il saurait; ils sauraient. qu'il sache ; qu'ils saeheut. il sache ; ils sachent. il sdt ; ils sussent. I Aole.—We find savoir wri(ten sqavoir In some old and esteemed works ; but now, the French Academj, and ali the modem Grammarians, suppress the letter ; as useless, because it docs not aft.>.ct the pronunciation of the word, nor does It even serve to point out Its Latin lerlvation, since all the best French etymologi3ta derive savoir from sapere, and not from scire. 266. We sometimes employ the Subjm:ctive of aavoir instead of the Inc icative, but never without a negative ; as, Je ne sache rien de plv4 digne d'eloge^ I know nothing more praiseworthy. 267. Jene saurais is often used for^e nepuis (I cannot) ; yet we do not say, Je ne saurais for Je ne pourrais^ nor je saurais for Je puis, 268. The student must not confound savoir with connaitre, which also signifies to know. We do not say savoir quelqu^un^ but connattre quelqiCun^ to know, or be acquainted with some one. 269. Seoir, to become^ to hefit., is never ul^ed in the present of the Infinitive. It has only the participle < a««i j Miw gagi e s iij.^ . 142 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS present seyanty and the third persons of some of the simple tenses : il sied^ Us sieent ; it seyait^ ils seyaient ; il sie'ra^ ils sieront; il sieraitj ils sieraient; qu'il iie'e^ qWils sie'ent. 270. When seoir signifies to sit, it has only the two Participles, seant and sis, which last is used in law as an adjective, and generally translated into English by situate or situated. SuBSEOiR, to suspend, to put of; see No, 275. EXERCISE XO. I know that he is not yom* friend, but I know likewise de pi. auiisi that he is a man of probity The wise man knows hov/ to * hien. sage * •> * regulate his taate, his labours, and his pleasures. — Do you regler goat pi. travail know French ? — They do not know their lessons. — Milton art. le^on knew Homer almost by heart. — I shall know well how to Homere presque cceur. • • (defend myself) (In order) iJiat you may know it The me dSfendre. Afin head-dress which that lady wore became her very well coiffure f. que porter ind-2 ind-2 lui Colours that are too gaudy will not become you. art. couleiirL * * voyant 271. VALOIR, TO BE WORTH. Fart. Pres. valant. Part. Past, valu. Ind. ) Pres. ) Imp. Pret. Put. >ND. \ ^es. } COND. Pr Je vaux, nous valons, Je valais, nous valious, Je valus, nous valumes, Je vaudrai, nous ^audrons, Je vaudrais, nous vaudrions. tu vaux, vous valez, tu valais; vous valiez, tu valus, vous valutes, tu vaudras, vous vaudrez. tu vaudrais^ vous vaudriez, il vaut ; ils valent. il valait ; ils valaient. il valut ; ils valurent. il vaudra ; ils vaudront. il vuudrait ; ils \uudraient. [simple sie'raj sie'ent. le two as an 3h by you. OF TUE THIRD CONJUGATION. 143 Imper. valonR, SuBJ. \ § je vaille. Pres. j (^nous valions, Imp. gjevalusae, O?nou8 valussions, vaux, valez, tu vailles, voua valiez, tu valusses, voua valuasiez, qu'il vaille ; r "' '^illent. A vuu-^ ; ils vaillcnt. il val(!it ; ils valussent. In the compound tenses, valoir takes the auxiliary avoir^ Conjugate in the same manner : — ijquivaloir, to he equivalent. \ revaloir, to return like for like. 272. Prevaloir^ to prevail, follows the same conjuga- tion, excepting that in the Subjunctive Present it makes, que je prevalCj que tu prevaleSy qu'il prevale ; que nous pre'valionSj que vous prevaliez^ quHls prevalent; and not, quejeprevaille^ que tu prevailles^ etc. EXERCISE XCI. This cloth is worth twenty shillings a yard Actions drap m. schelling V aune. art. effet m. are better than words. — His horse was not worth ten vahir art. parole t, guineas. — That victory procured\\\m i\iQ staff of a marshal guinSe victoiref. valoir lui bdtonxn. ^marechal of France One ounce of gold is equivalent to fifteen ounces once f. or of silver. — That answer will he equivalent to a refusal argent. riponse f. refus m. Favour often prevails over merit. — His advice art. 2 1 sur art. mirite m. avis m. prevailed. — That consideration has prevailed over all consideration f. art others. — Doubt not that truth will prevail at last. douter art. • ne subj-1 d la longue V 273. VOIE. TO SEE. Part. Pres. voyant. Je vols, nous voyons, Imp. Je voyais, nous voyious, Part. Pastf vu. Ind. ) Pres. ) tu vois, vous voyez, tu voyais, vous voyiez, il voit ; ils voient. il voyait ; ils voyaient. 144 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVK VERBS iVtf/. Jo vis, nous vimea, tu vis, vous vitcs, il vit ; ils virent. Fut. Je verrai, nous verrons, tu verras, vous verrez, il verra ; ils verront. CoNi). ) Je verrais, rj-es. j nous verrions, tu verrais, vous verriez. il verrait ; ils verraient. bU'EIl. voyons, Siinj. ) §je voie, Prcs. jCuous voyions, vois, voyez, tu voies, vous voyiez. qu'il voie ; qu'ils voient. il voie ; ils voient. Imp. gje visse, Cnous vissions. tu visses, vous vissiez, ilvit; ils vissent. 274. Conjugate in the same manner, entrevotr^ to have a glimpse of; revoir^ to see again; and, />?e'yo/r, to fore- see. Observe, however, that this last verb makes in the Future, je prevoirai^ tu prevoiras^ &c., and in the Con- ditional, je prevoiratSj &c. /fote.—Ali\ny poets, ancient and modern, (br the sake of rliymo, vrrlte without I, fe voi, faperfoi, Je pr^voi, etc 275. Surseoir^ to put off (a law term), though a com- pound of seoirj is conjugated like voir, except in the Future, je surseoirai, and in the Condi tional,ye surseoirais. EXERCISE XCII. I see it now. — I saw it with my own eyes. — That maintenant. ind-4 de propre reform (will take place), but we shall not see it You shall riforme f. aura lieu see what I can do. — Let us see your purchases. — See the ce que sais faire. empleite f. admirable order of the universe: does it not announce a * ^ordrem. universm. annoncer supreme architect? — When shall we see your sisters again f Quand — To finish their affairs, it would be necessary that they Pour affaire f. falloir should see each other. — W'.se men foresee events. ■— s'entrevoir subj-2 art. * * art. I shall not put off the pursuit of that affair. poursuite f. pi. 2 v/ In OF THE THIRD COVJUGATION. ltd 27C. VOULOIR^ TO will; to nc willing; to wish. ^ Part, Pres. voulant. Part. Past, voiilu. Ind. ) J're3. j Imp. Pret. Fut. COND. Pres. Je veux, nous voulons, Je voulaifl, nous vouliona, Je voulua, nous vouldmea, Je voudrai, nous voudrons, Je voudrais, nous voudrions, tu veux, voua voulez, tu voulaiH^ vous vouliez, tu voulus, V0U9 vouliites, tu voudras, voua voudrez, tu voudraia, vous voudriez, il veut ; ils veulent. il voulait ; ils voulaicut. il voulut ; ils voulurent. il voudra ; ils voudront. il voudrait ; ils voiidraient. Imteu. Vcuillez, Tlio second pcrs. pi. is tlio only one used, aiiU sig* nlflcd, be to good as, be so kind as to.* SuBJ. ) gje veuille. tu veuilles, il vcuille ; Pres. jo'iious vouliona, vous vouliez, ils veuillent. Imp. g je voulusae, tu vouluaaes, il voulilt ; O*nou8 voulussions, voua voulussiez, ils voulussent. Observe that the Subjunctive Present is que je veuille; but the plural ii que nous voulions, que vous vouliez; and not que nous veuillions, que vous veuillief, as some writers have it. EXERCISE XCIII. I can and mill tell the truth. — He wishes to set out pron. dire v6rii6f. * to-morrow. — If you are vnlling, he will be willing ako • demain. le le aussi. We wish to be free. — He wished to accompany me. — They * litre * accompagner On will give you whatever you toish. — I should wish (him to come). tout ce que ind-7 qu'il vint. — He would wish to speak to you in private. — * * en particulier. Have the goodness to read this letter. — Heaven wills it so. Vouloir' * lire art. ainsi. • Some admit of a second Imperative, veux, voulons, voulez, but they use it only in very rare Instances, as in this phrase, Vodu)ns, e( nous powTon*. % 146 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS § IV. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 277. ABSOUDRE, to absolve. Part. Pres. absolvant. Part. Past, absous, m. ; absoute,/. Ind. .} J'absous, nous absolvous, tu absous, vous absolvez, il a'osout ; ils absolvent. Imp. J'absolvais, nous absolvions, il absolvait ; ils absolvaient. il absoudra ; tu absolvais, vous absolviez, C^o Preterite Definite.) Fut. J'absoudrai, tu absoudras, nous absoudrons, vous absoudrcz, ils absoudront. J'absoudrais, tu absoudrais, il absoudrait ; nous absoudrious, vous absoudriez, ils absoudraieiit. absous, absolvons, absolvez, SuBj. ) g j'absolve, tu absolves, Pres. j O'nous absolvions, vous absolviez, (No Imperfect qf the SvXdunctiveO COND. ]_ Pres. } Imper. qu'il absolve ; qu'ils absolvent. il absolve ; ils absolvent. 278. Conjugate in the same manner, dissoudre^ to dissolve. Abstraire, to abstract^ is conjugated like tratre^ but is little used ; it is more customary to say faire abstraC' tion de, AccROiRE is used in the Present of the Infinitive only, with any of the tenses of the verb faire^ when it signifies, faire croire ce qui n'est paSj to make one believe what is not tiue, to impose upon one. AccroItre, to increase^ is conjugated like crotli'e, Admettre, to admitj like mettre. Atteindre, to reach. See Peindre. 279. Attraire, to attract^ to allure^ is used only in the Infinitive : Le sel est bon pour attraire les pigeons^ salt is good for attracting pigeons. Attirer often sup- plies its place, and is more harmonious. OF THE FOUETH CONJUGATION. m 280. BATTRE^ to beat. Part. Pres. battant. Part. Past, battu. Ind. ) Je bats, Pres. ) nous battons, Imp. Je battais, nous battious, Pret. Je battis, nous battimes, Fut. Je battrai, nous battrons, CoND. ) Je battraia, Pres. } nous battrions, lurER. battons, SuBj. ) gje batte, Pres. Jo*nou3 battions, Imp. gje battisse, Snous battissions, tu bats, vcus battez, tK battais, Yous buttiez, tu battis, vous battltes, tu battras, vous battrez, tu battrais, vous battricz, bats, battez, tu battes, vous battiez, tu battisses, vous battissiez. il bat ; ils battent. il battait ; ils battaient. il battit ; ils battirent. il battra ; ils battront. il battrai t ; ils battraieut. qu'il batte ; qu'ils battent. il batte ; ils battent. 11 battit; ils battissent. 281. Conjugate in the same manner: — Abattre, to pull down. I rabattre, to abate. combattre, to fight. rebattre, to beat again. d^battre, to debate. j se d^battre, to straggle. EXEROISE XOIV. I pardon you in consideration of your repentance. — ahioudre faveur repentir. She was acquitted These acids dissolve metals. — After the ixA-Z absoudre acide art. death of Alexander, his empire was dissolved. — ^Why do you m. beat my dog ? — Our left winsr beat the right wing chien m. ^gauche ^aile f. ind-3 ^droit ^ of the enemy. — Believe me, general, we shall beat them. — pi. Croyez-moi 87 The cannon beat down the walls of the fortress. --' canon m. abattre ind-3 muraille f. forteresse f. They fought bravely on both sides. — They have On ind-4 vaillamment de part et d'autre. Ils discussed that question. — Beat these mattresses again, d^battre f. matelas m. 148 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 282. BOIRE^ TO drink. Tart. Pres. buvaiit. Part. Past, bu. ) Te bois, Tnd. Pres. / nous biivons, Imp. Jebuvais, nous buvions, Pret. Je bus, nous biimes, Je boirai, nous boirons, Je boirais, nous boirions, Put. COXD. ) Pres. } Imper. buvons, SuBJ. ) 2je boive, Pres. j cynous buvions, Imp. §je busse, Qi-nous bussions, tu bois, vous buvez, tu buvais, vous buviez, tu bus, vous b6tes, tu boiras, vous boirez. tu boirai'S vous boir: ez, bois, buvez, tu boives, vous buviez, tu busses, vous bussiez, il boit ; ils boivent. il buvait ; ils buvaient il but ; ils burent. il boira ; ils boiront. il boirait ; ils boiraient. qu'il boive ; qu'ils boiveut. il boive ; ils boivent. il bM ; ik bussent. 283. CONCLURE^ to conclude. Part. Pres. concluant. Part. Past, conclu,f/£. ; con clue,/. Ind. ) Je conclus, Pres. j nous concluons. Imp. Je concluais, nous concluions, Pret. Je conclus, nous conclClmes, Fut. Je conclurai, nous conclurons, Je conclurais, nous conclurions, COND. ) Pres. j Imper. concluons, SuBj. ) £ je conclue, Pres j O'nous concluions, Imp. gje conclusse, C?nous conclussions, tu conclus, vous conclut z, tu concluais, voas conclu'iez, tu conclus, vous conclutes, tu concluras, vous conclurez, tu conclurais, vous concluriez, conclus, conciuez, tu conclues, vous concluiez, tu conclusses, vous conclussiez, i'. conclut ; ils conclueiiit. il concluait ; ils concluaient. il conclut ; ils conclurent. il conclura ; lis concluront. il conclurait ; ils concluraieiit. qu'il conclue ; qu'Jls concluent il conclue ; ils concluent. il conclut ; ils conclussent. Conjugate in the same manner, exclure^ to exclude. OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATIOlf. EXERCISE XCV. 149 I hare the honour of drinking your health. — His best de inf-1 d santii. wiiic is drunk. — ^This paper blots They drank tv/o bottles vin m. hoire houteille of champaign. — I shaV. drink a glass of white wine Let us champagne. verrem. * ^ drink to the health of our friends Come, drink I never sante f. Aliens drink mne. — Since he has not arrived, I conclude that he will 154 Puisqu' eat en not come. — What do you conclude from all this ? — They have Qwe 101 concluded the bargain. — He was excluded from the assembly. marcM m. assemblie f. e,/. it. lit. nt t. 284. CONDUIRE^ to conduct; to lead. «). ) Je conduis, tu conduis, il conduit ; res. j nous conduison&, vous conduisez, ils conduisent. Fart, Pres. conduisant. Par^. Pas^, conduit, m.; conduite,/. Ind. Pn Imp. Je conduisais, tu couduisais, il conduisait ; nous conduisions, vous conduisiez, ils conduisaient. Fret. Jeconduisis, tu conduisis, ilconduisit; nous couduisimes, vous conduisltes, ils conduisirent. Fut. Je conduirai, tu conduiras, il conduira ; nous conduirons, vous conduirez, ils conduiront. Je conduirais, tu conduirais, il conduirait ; nous conduirions, vous conduiriez, ils conduiraient. conduis, quil conduise ; couduisons, conduisez, qu'ils conduisent. SuBJ. ) g je conduise, tu conduises, il conduise ; rres. j ©"uous conduisions, vous conduisiez, ils conduisent. Imp. § je conduisisse, tu conduisisses, il conduisit ; O'nous conduisissions, vous conduisissiez, ils conduisissent. CoND. j Pres. j Imper. 285. Conjugate in the same manner :— Construire, cuire i d^duire, d^truire, instnure, to construct, to cooki to bake, to deduct, to destroy, to instruct. introduire, produire, reconduire, r^duire, traduire, to introduce, to produce, to reconduct, to reduce, to translate. ^ / 150 intlEGtLAtl AND DEFECTIVE VfeRfiS 286. Nuire, to hurt, is conjugated like condutre ; but its past participle is nuty which has no feminine. EXERCISE XCVL This road leads to the town Moses conducted the cliemin ra. Mo'ise people of Israel. — They huilt several ships. — This peuplem. Israel. construire vaisseaum. bakei> bakes twice a day — Deduct what you have boulanger deuxfois par ce que received. — Time destroys everything". — The overflowing art. tout. d&hordement m. of the river destroyed his crop. — Tliose who instruct riviere f. recoit p. — kef. art. youth, (must arm themselves) with patience ^I shall inform jeunesse f. doivent s'armer de instruire his fam^'ly of his conduct. — Ke introduced me into the king's familhf. conduitef. dans ^ closet. — This country has produx:ed many great men. — ^cabinet m. pays m. beaucoup de What book at'e you translating f— This is well translated livrem. 101 Translate thia That affair has hurt his reputation. 96 affaire f. d 287. CONFIRE, Part. Fres. confisant. Ind. Pr D. \ Je confis, _ _ _ y nous coniisons, Imp. Je confisais, nous confisions, Fret. Fut. Coin).) Fres. r Je confls, nous confimes, Je confirai, nous confirons, Je confirais, nous confirions, TO PICKLE, TO PRESERVE. Fart. Fast, confit, m. ; confite,/. tu confls, vous confisez, tu confisais, il confit ; ils confisent. vous confisiez, tu confis, vous confites, tu confiras, vous confirez, tu onfirais^ vous confinez, il confisait ; ils confisaient. il confit ; ils confirent. il confira ; ils confiront. 11 confirait ; ils confiraient OF TH£ POtlRTIl COKJUGATlOK. 151 I Lmter. confis, qu'il confise ; confisons, confisez, qu'ils confident. R[JBJ. \ * je confise, ^ tu confises, il confise ; Fres. jO'nous confisions, vous confisiez, ils confisent. Imp. %]& confisse, tu confisses, il confSt ; Cnous confissions, vous confissiez, ils confissent. 288. Suffire^ to suffice, to be sufficient, is conjugated like confire ; but its past participle is suf^. which has no feminine. EXERCISE XCVII. ^ I shall preserve some fruits this year. — Will you preserve annee f. these cherries with sugar or with brandy? — Preserve cerise f. d art. art. eau-de-vie f. some apricots and peaches. — Haye you pickled any abricotm. 32 piche f. cucumbers ? — Little sv^lces to the wise. — A hundred concombre m. Peu de Men a. * pounds a year suffice him for his'maintenance. — livres sterling par an subsistance f. If he lose that lawsuit, all his property will not suffice.-^ perd proces m. bten m. y That would not suffice me. — That sum is not sufficient to somme f. pour pay your debts. — Here are three thousand francs, will Uiat dettef. Void he enough f — That is enough. — Do you Uke pickled walnuts ? svffire aimer art. ^ ^noix f. • 289. CONNAITRE, to know. Part. Pres. connaissant. Part. Past, connu. \ Je connais, tu connais, il connait ; . j nous connaissons, vous connaissez, ils connaissent. Imp. Je connaissais, tu connaissais, il connaissait ; nous connaissions, vous connaissiez, ils connaissaient. Pret. Je connus, tu connus, il connut ; nous connClmes, vous connCltes, ils connurent. LXD. Pres 152 IRHEQULAR AKD DEFECTIVE VERBS Ind. Fut COND. Fres, Imper. SUBJ. Fres. Imp. Je connaltrai, nous connaltrons, Je counaitrais, nous connaltrions, connaissous, g je connaisse, O»uous connaissions, g je connusse, ©•nous connussions, tu connaitras, vous connaitrez, il connaitra ; ils connaitront. tu connaltrais^ il connaitrait ; Yous connaitricz, ils connaitraient- qu'il connaisse ; qu'ils connaissent. connais, conraissez, tu connaisses, yous connaissiez, tu connusses, vous connussiez, il connaisse ; ils connaissent. il connClt ; ils connussent. tf^r* See No. 2G8, for Remark on Savoir and Connattre. ^ 290. Conjugate in the same manner : — Disparaitre, to disappear. I reconnoitre, to know again. paraitre, to appear. \ reparaltre, to appear again. EXERCISE XCVm. I know him perfectly. — He knows his (weak side.) — parfaitement. faible m. We know nobody in tliis neighbourhood. — Do you know our 116 voisinage m. house? — He knew me by my voice. — I would know him d * art. voix f. among a thousand. — The compass was not known to the entre • houssolei. de ancients At the approach of our troops, the enemy disappeared. approchef. pi. — It seems you are wrong. — You do not appear paraitre que avoir tort. convinced. — ^Do you not recognise me? — I recognise you. — convaincu reconnattre Do they acknowledge their errors ? — He knew his horse again, rtconnaitre CoKTUEDiRE, to contradtct ; see Dire. Olr THE FOURTU CONJUGATION. 153 291. COUDRE^ TO sew. f. Part. Pres. coiisant. Part. Past, cousu. il coud : il3 cousent. il cousait ; il» cuiisaient. il couiit; ils cousirent. il coudra ; ils coudront. il coudrait ; ils coudraient. qu*il couse ; qu'ils cousent. 11 couse ; ils cousent. il cousit ; ils cousissent. 292. DecoudrCy to unsew, and recoudre, to sew again, are conjugated in the same manner. Ind. Pres. Je couds, tu couds, nous cousons, V0U3 cousez, Imp. Je cousais, tu cousais^ nous cousions, vous cousiez, Pret. Je cousis, nous couslmes, tu cousis, vous cousites, Fut. Je coudrai, nous coudrons, tu coudras, vous coudrez, COND. Pres. Je coudrais, nous coudrions, tu coudrais, vous coudriez, Imper. couds, cousons, cousez, SUBJ. Pres. §je couse, O'nous cousions, tu couses, vous cousiez, Imp. § je cousisse, C?nous cousissions, tu cousisses, vous cousissiez. 293. CRAINDRE, to fear. Part. Ind. ) Pres. ( Imp. Pret. Fut. CoND. [ Pres. ) Imper. SUBJ. Pres. Imp. Pres. craiguant. Je craina, nous craignons, Je crai^ais, nous craignions, Je craignis, nous craignimes, Je craindrai, nous craindrons, Je craindrais, nous craindrions, craignons, g je craigne. Part. Past, craint, m.; crainte,/. tu crains, vous craignez, tu craignais, vous craigni^z, tu craignis, il craint ; ils craignent. il crai^ait ; ils craignaicnt. il crai^nit ; vous craignites, ils craignirent. tu craindras, il craindra.; vous craindrez, tu craindrais, vous craiudriez, crains, craignez, tu craignes, vous craigniez, tu craignisses, ils craindront. il craindrait ; ils craindrtiient. qu'il craig-ne ; qa'ils craignent il crai^e ; ils craignent O'nous craignions, gje craignisse, Cuous craignissions, vous craignissiez, ils cralgiiissent 11 crai^nit ; 154 IIIUKOULAU AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 294. Conjugate after tlic same manner, all verbt ending in aindre and oindre ; as, plaindrey to pity, and joindrCy to join. — When plaindre is used reflectcdly, it signifies to complain : Je vous plains^ mats je ne mf plains pas de vouSf I pity you, but I do not complain of you. EXERCISE XCIX. That girl sews well. — My sisters were sewing all yesterday. ind-3 hier. Sew a button on this waistcoat. — That is badlv sewed. boutonm. d , giletm. mac His coat wa;=» ton;, but his tailor sewed it again very habit m. dAcJrre tailleur neatly. — Re is afraid of bein^ discovered.- -He was a man propremeni. craindre d* inf-1 dScouvert. C* who feared nothing. — I pity his family. — He complains ind-2 familte f. se plaindre without cause They were always comjo>laining. — They united sujet. Houjours 4nd-2 joindre their efforts. — Let us unite prudence with courage. m. art. f. d art. ra. f 295. CBOIREj to believe. Fart. Prcs. croyant. Fart. Fast, cru, m. ; crue, /. tu crois, il croit '; vous croyez, ils croient. tu croyciS, il Ind. Fres. Imp. Fret. Je crois, nous croyons, Je croyais, nous croyions, Je crus. nous erumes. Fut. Je croirai, nous croirons. COND. Fres. Je croirai&j nous croirions, Imper. SlTBJ. I Pres.\ croyona, 2^je croie, O'nous croyious). Imp. gje crusse, O?nou3 crussions, vous croyie/2, tu crus, vous crutes, tu croiras, vons croire.'!, td croiraid, vous croiriez, crois, croyez, tu croies, vous croyiez, tu crusses, vous crusLiez, >yait ; ils croyaient. il crut ; ils crurent. il oroira ; ils croiront. il croirait ; iis croiraient. qu'il croie ; qu'ils croient. il croie ; ils croient. il cr At ; ils crussent. OF TUE f OURTll CONJUGAtlON. 155 mding tndrey nifies l^s pas g^ 296. Remark. — Some people put the preposition de after the verb crotre^ wlicn followed by an infinitive ; but this is contrary to the practice of the best writers ; we must say : fat cru bien faire^ and not fai cru ni: bien faire^ I thought I was doing well. rday wed. — in very i a man iplains laindre united joindre urag'e. -ra. int. fc. it. jnt. > 3nt. Lnd. Pres 297. CROITRE, to grow. Part. Pres. croissant. Part. Past, cr(i, m. ; crAc,/. .} Je crois, nous croissona, Imp. Je croissais, nous croissions, Pret. Je cils nous crtimes, Fut. Je croltrai, nous croitrona, Je croltrais, nous croitrions, COND. Pres ■■} Imter. croissons, SuTJj. ) gje croisse, Pres. jc^nous croissions, Imp. gje crAsse, O»nous crAssions, tu crois, vous croissez, tu croissais, vous croissiez, tu crAs, vous crAtes, tu croltras, vous croitrez, tu croitrais, vous croitriez, crois, croissez, tu croisses, vous croissiez, tu criisses, vous crAssiez, il crolt ; ils croisscnt. il croissait ; ils croissaieut. il crdt ; ils crArent. il croitra ; ils croltront. il croltrait ; ils croitraient. qu'il croisse ; qu'ils croisscnt. il croisse ; ils croisscnt. il edit ; ils crilsaent. t. 298. Conjugate in the same manner, accroUrej to in- crease, and decrottre^ to decrease. Accru and ddcru, paat Participles of aecroUre and ddcroUre, are written with- out any accent— (^corf.) EXERCISE C. I believe you. — She believes only what she sees. — Do ne que ce qu* you think that I wish to deceive you? — He thought croire vouloir subj-1 * tromper ind-2 to gain his lawsuit They thought they heard some cries * gagner ind-3 * inf-l crim. 1 should think (I would he wanting) in my duty. — Believe manque d devoir m. nothing of all that. — He thought he was doing well The ind-4 UQ lllREGULAR AND DEriiCTlVE VEIIB8 vine does not grow in cold countries. — Tliese plants vignet art. ' ^j)aysm. plantet grow on the margin of streams. — His fortune increases bord m. art. ruisscau m. f. s' every day. — The river has fallen two inches. -~. tous lea jours. riviere f. decroitre de pouce m After Midsummer, the days beg'in to shorten, la Saint- Jean dScroUre. 299. DIRE^ TO SAY, to tell. Fart. Pres. disant. Part. Past, dit, m. ; dite, /. Je dis. nous aisons, Je disais, nous disions^ Je dis. nous dimes, Je dirai, nous dirons, Je dirais, nous dirions, disons, SuBJ. ) gje disc, Pres. J O'Jious disions, Imp. gje disse, <5*nous dissions, Jnd. \ Pres. ) Imp. Pret. Put. COND. ) Pres. j Impeu. tu dis, vous dites, tu disais^ vous disiez, tu dis, vous dites, tu diras, vous direz, tu dirais, vous diriez, dis, dites, tu discs, vous disiez, tu disscs, vous dissicz. il dit ; ils disent. il disait ; lis disaieut. ildit; ils dirent. il dira; iis diront. il dirait ; ils diraicnft. qu'il disc ; qu'ils disent. il disc ; ils disent. ildlt; ils dissent. 300. Eedire, to say ngain, is conjugated like dire; but contredire, to contradict, dedirc, to disownj interdlre, to i^rohibttf inedire, to slander, predire, to foretell, make in the 2d pers plur. of the prco. of the Ind. and of the Imper. 'contredisez. d^disez. interdisez. m^disez. prddisez. 301. Maudire, to curse, is conjugated like dire, except that it takes double s in the Part. pres. maudissant ; in tho Ind. pros, nous maudissons, vous maudissez^ ils maudiasent; in the Imperf. je maudissais, etc. ; in the Imper. qu'il maudisse^ maudissons^ etc., and in the Sudj. que je mau- disse^ que tu maudisses, etc. "•cm OP THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. EXERCISE CI. 157 He tells all he knows Those who say : I shfJl not ce qu* savotr Ceux work, are the most miserable.— 2'e:/2 us which you would iravailler prefer. —You always contradict mc— That physician prohibitt pr^/erer * a i midecin wine to all his potients He slanders everybody. art. malade de tout le monde. — The makers of almanacs foretell rain and fine faiseur almanack art. pluie f. art. weather. — Do not say : That man is of one people, and temps ra. Celui-ld peuple m. I am of another people : for all peoples have had on moi car art. earth the ^ame father, who was Adam, and have in art. ind-2 Iicaven the same father, who is God. art. del m. DissouDRE is conjugated like absoudre; see p. 146. 302. EcLORE, to he hatched^ as hirdSj or to blow like a flower^ is used only in the present of the Infinitive : in the Part, past, e'cloSj f. eclosCy and in the tliird persons of the following tenses: — Ind. pres. il e'clot, its e'closeni/ Fut. '*' eclora^ its e'cluront ; Cond. il e'cloraity ils ecloraient ; Sub J. pres. qyHil e'close^ qu'ils e'closent. But its compound tenses, which are formed with etre^ are much in use. The primitive of e'clore is clore, to close, to shut. Another compound is enclore^ to enclose. 303. iCRIRE^ TO WRITE. part. Pres. ^crivant. Part. Pasty ^crit. Ind. ) J'ecris, Pres. nous ecrivons, tu ecris, vous dcrivez. il ^crit ; ils ^crivent. Imp. J'ecrivais, nous ^crivions, Pret. J'^crivis, nous dcrivlmes, il ^crivait ; ils ^crivaient. tu ecrivais, vous ^criviez, tu ^crivis, il ^crivit ; vous dcrivites, ils ^crivirent. 158 lUUEGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERDS Fui. J'^crirai, nous ^crirons, OoND. ) J'dcriiaia, Pres. > noua (jcrhions, Impeu. ^crivons, Bum. \ gj'6crive, Pres. J o?nou8 ecrivions, Imp. gj'6crivis9e, tu dcriras, vous ^crirez, tu dcrirais^ V0U3 ^cririez, ecria, dcrivez, tu derives, V0U9 dcriviez, tu ^crivisses, il ^crira ; ila dcriront. il dcrirait ; ils ^criraicnt. qu'il derive ; qu'ila 6criveut. il derive ; ils ^criveut. il dcrivlt ; O*nous dcrivission^, vous ^crivissicz, ils ^crivissent. 304. Conjugato in tho same manner : — Circonscrire, to circumscribe. d^crire, to describe. inscrire, to inscribe. prescrirOi to prescribe. proscru'e, recrire, souscrire, transcrire, to proscribe, to write aaain. to subscribe, to transcribe. EXERCISK Cn. Silk-worms are hatched in the beffinnin^r of art. ver d, soie ind-1 d. commencement m. art. spring. — These flowers will soon blow. — That man prtntemps m. ^bientdt ^ speaks well, but he writes badly. — Saint John wrote his mat. ind-3 gospel at the age of ninety, and joined the quality of an ivangilem. ans ind-3 qualitif. • evangelist to that of an apostle and a prophet. — I shall • apdtre de • write to you from Naples Write that on a sheet of paper. — feuille f. This poet describes a battle well His physician has * ^bataillef. ^ mMecin prescribed to him another regimen. — ByWa proscribed three or 86 rigimem. ind-3 four thousand Roman citizens. — He is not writing again, it is domain ^citoyen m. c' a sig-n that he is comin[;. — I shall subscribe for that atlas • signe — m. I have transcribed several passages from Cicero and Tacitus. Ciceron de Taciie. Ensuivre (s'), to follow froMj to ensue; see Suivre, A Etre, to hCy is conjugated at length, p. 64, ■*IK-*- OP THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 159 305. FAIRE, Part. Pres. faiaant. TO DO, TO MAKE. Part. PasL fait. Ind. \ Jc fais, Pres. ) nous faisons, Imp. Pret. Put. Je faisais, nous faisioiis, Je fis, nous flmcs, Je ferai, nous ferons, Je feraia, nous ferions, faisons, SuBJ. ) §je fasse, Pres. j o»nou8 fassions, Imp. § je fisse, Q^nous fissions. COND Pres :} iMrER. tu faifl, Yous faitcs, tu faisaia, voua faisicz, tu fis, vous fltcs, tu feras, vous ferez, tu ferai», vous feriez, fais, faites, tu fasses, vous fassiez, tu fisses, vous fissiez, il fait ; ils font. il faisait ; ils faisaicnt. ilfit; ils fiient. il fera ; ils feront. il ferait ; ils feraicnt. qu'il fasse ; qu'ils fassent. il fasse ; ils fassent. ilflt; ils fissent. Note.—1\iQ diphthong ai having tito sound of « mute, in /auanf, nous /cdmns, je /'aiiais, as well as in the derivatives bier^faitant, bin\fauance, eontrifaUant, t' . Voltaire, and many writers, after his example, have substituted e mute Instead of at. But DumartaU^ CondUlae, Qirard, Beauxie^ D'Oiivet, and Domergue, have con- stantly opposed the adoption of this change, and the French Academy, the best Judges In this matter, have formally rejected it 306. Conjugate like /aire: — contrefaire, ^0 counterfeitf to [mimic. (lefaire, to undOf to defeat. refaire, to do again. satisfaire, to satisfy. surfaire, to exact, to overcharge. EXERCISE cm. I do my duty; do yours.— Everything she does, she devoir m. Tout ce qu* does well. — Pliny relates that Cffisar took above le Pline rapporter faire ind-3 plus de 800,000 prisoners. — The emperor has made him a knight * chevalier of the legion of honour.— She mimics everybody. — What tout le monde, Ce que "ii 160 IRRRGULAB AND DEFECTIVE VERBS the one does, the other undoes.— Fenelo^e undid^ at n'^-ht, le FenSlope ind-2 * art. the work she had done during the day The fleet ouvrage m. qu* * flotte f. of the enemy was completely defeated. — If it were pi. ind-3 comptetement c* ind-2 to do againy I would not do it That scholar pleases all d satisfaire his masters You ask too much for your goods. , surf aire * marchandiscf. Feindre, to feigny is conjugated like peindre. 307. Frire, tojryy besides the Present of the Infinitive, is used only in the singular of the Present of the Indica- tive, Je frisy tu fris, il frit ; in the Future, Je frirai, tu frirasy ilfrira^ nous frirons, vousfrirezj ilsfriront; in the Conditional, JefriraiSj tufi'iraisj ilfrirait^ nous fri'tnons, vomfririez, ilsfnraient; in the second person singular of the Imperative, fris ; and in the compound tenses, which are formed with the Participle past, frit, frite. To supply the persons and tenses which are wanting, we make use of the verb faire prefixed to the Infinitive frire ; as, Nov^ faisons fHre^ vous faites frire^ ils font frire ; je faisais frire^ etc. 308. LIRE^ TO READ. LvD. ) Pres. } Imp. Fret. Fut. COND. > Fres.i Imper. Fart. Fres. lisant. Je Us, nous lisons, Je lisais, nous lisions, Je lus, nous liimes, Je lirai, nous lirons, Je lirais, nous lirions, lisons, Fart. Fast, hi. tu lis, vous lisez, illit; ils Hsent. tu lisais, vous lisiez. 11 lisait ; ils lisaient. tu luj, vous Kites, illut; ils lurent. tu liras, vous lirez. il lira ; ils lii-ont. tu lirais, vous liricz, il lirait ; ils liraient. lis, lisez, qu*il lise ; qu'ils lisent. OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 161 art. |he fleet flotte f. it were c' ind-2 neases all Us/aire Ids. mdise f. nfinitive, e Indici- frirai^ tu ^t; in the frh^nt. ngular of 3S, which wanting, Mnitive iU font nt. t. • tt. nt. SiTiiJ. X § je Use, JPre*. J ^nous lisions, Imp. gje lusse, O'nous lussions, tu Uses, Yous Usiez, tu lusses, YOUS lussiez, il Use ; ils Usent. illdt; ils lussent. JVbf«.— The regular mode of interrogation is, lis-je bient and not lisi-je hUn J ir lU-je bien be thought harsh to the ear, another turn of expression may be adopted. —(Acad., Th. ComeUle.) See page 87, Item. 6th. 309. JSlcve, to elect, and relirey to read again, arc con- jugated like lire. 310. LUIRE^ TO SHINE. Part. Pres. luisant. Part. Pasty hii, m. No feminine. Ind. } Fres. 1 Imp. Fut. COND. Pres. SUBJ. Pres. Je luis, tu luis, nous luisons, yous luisez, Je luisais, tu luisais, nous luisions, yous luisiez^ (Xo Preterit^ D O*nous plaisions, Imp. § je plusse, O'nous plussic'iis. Put. COND. \ Pres. f Imper. tu plais, vous plaisez, tu plaisais, vous plaisiez, tu plus, vous phites, tu plairas, vous plairez, tu plairais, vous plairiez, plais, plaisez, tu plaises, vous plaisiez, tu plusses, vous plussiez, Pas.\ plu. ilpUit- lis plaisent. il pla>sait ; lis phisaicnt. ilplub; lis plurent. il plaira; ils plairont. il plairait; ils plai'aient. qu'il plaise ; qu'ila 'plaisent. il plr*ise ; ils plaisent. ilpTdt; ilb ^ilusseni. , OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 167 se 323. Conjugate in the same manner, de'plaire^ to displease, and comptaire, to humour. 324. PRENDRE^ to take. Part, Pres. prcnant. Part. Pasty pris. Ind. ) Jcprends, Pres. ) nous prenous, Imp. Je prenais, nous prenions, Pret. Jepris, nous primes, Fut. Je prendrai, nous prendrons, CoND. ) Je prendrais, "•} tu prends, vous prencz, tu prenaiS; vous preniezji tu pris, vous prites, tu prendras, vous prendrez, tu prci^uraisj 11 prend ; lis prennent. il prenait ; iis prenaient. il prit ; lis prirent. il preiidra ; lis prendront. il prendrait ; Pres. j nous prcndrions, vous prendriez, ils prendraient. Imper. prenons, SuBJ. ) gje prenne, Pres. j o»nous prenions, Imp. g je prisse, prends, prenez, tu prennes, vous preniez^ tu prisscs, vous prissiez, quMl prenne ; qu'ils prennent. il prenne ; ils prennent. il prit ; ils prissent. cynous prissions, 325. Conjugate in the same manner : — se m^prendre, to mistake. Apprendre, to learn. [prehend. comprendre, to understandy to cowr- d^sapprendre, sophy and OF THE POURTU CONJUGATION. 328. RIRE^ TO LAUGH. 169 Part. Pres. riant. Part. Past, ri, m. No feminine Ind. ) Pres. j Jeris, nous nons; tu ris, vous riez. il rit ; ils rient. hnp. Je riaisj, nous riions, tu riais, vous riiez, il riait ; Us riaicnt. Pret. Je ris, nous rimes, tu ris, vous rites, il rit ; ils rireut. Fut. Je rirai, nous rirons. tu riras, vous rirez, il rira ; ils riront. COND. \ Pres. j" Je rirais, nous ririons, tu rirais, vous ririez, il rirait ; I riraient. Imper. rions, , x'is, riez. • il rie ; qa lis rient SuBj. ) « je rie, Pres. jO'iious riions, tu ries, vous riiez. ilrie; ils rient. Imp. gJerisse, O*nous rissions; tu risses, vous rissiez. il rit ; ils rissent. Mire is also used with a double prcnoun, in the sense of to laugh at, to ridicule ; as, Je me ris de ses menaceij 1 laugh at his threats. Sourire^ to smile, is conjugated in the same manner. SuFFiRE, to suffice^ to he sufficient ; see No. 288. i, EXERCISE CIX. We resolved to set out immediately. — Have they resolved ind-3 de sur-le-champ. A-t-on on peace or war? — Everybody is laughing at his * art. art. Tout le monde d expense. — She was laughing most heartily. — They were dipens m. pi. de tout son cceur. laughing (in their sleeves). — They laughed even to tears sou,s cape. • art. larme You make me laugh. — Fortune smiles on him. — She smiled art. f. * lui ind-2 at my embarrassment. — He smiled to him, in sign of approbation. de embarrasm. md-3 en — — — He came up to me smiling, ind-3 ait-devant de moi en 170 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 329. SUIVRE, TO tollow. Part. Pres. suivant. Part. Past, suivi. Ij^. ) Je suis, Pres. ) nous suivons, Imp. Je Buivais, nous suivions, Pret. Je suivis, nous suivimes, Je Buivrai, nou3 suivrons, Je Buivrais, nous suivrions, Put. COND. 3ND. "I Pres. j Imper. BUivons, SuBJ. ) g je suive^ ^ Pres. jo»nou8 suivions, Imp. §je suivisse, Ci*nou3 suivissions, tu suis, vous Buivez, tu suivais, vous Buiviez, tu suivis, vous suivites, tu suivras, vous Buivrez, tu suivrais, vous Buivriez, suis, Buivez, tu suives, vous Buiviez, tu suivisses, vous suifissicz. il suit ; ils suivont. il suivait ; ils suivaient il Buivit ; ils suivirent il Buiyra ; ils suivront. il suivrait ; ils suivraient. qu'il suive ; qu'ils Buivent. il suive ; ils Buivent. il Buivit ; ils Buivissent. Conjugate in the same manner, poursuivrc, to pursue, lio prosecute. tS'ensuivre, to ensue, to result, follows the same con- jugation, but is used only in the third peisons singular and plural of every tense ; as, Un grand bien s*ensuivit. — (Acad.) ( Much good resulted from it. SuRViVRE, to survive, is conjugated like Vivre, 330. TAIRE, TO Part. Pres. taisant. Ind. \ Pres. j" Imp. Pret. Put. CoND. ■) Pres. } Imper. Je tais, nous taisons, Je taisais, nous taisions, Je tus, nous t^lmes, Je tairai, nous tairons, Je tairais, nous tairions, taisons, CONCEAL, TO KEEP SECRET. Part. Past, tH, m. ; tue,/. tu tais, vous taisez, tu taisais, vous taisiez, tu tus, vous tiites, tu tairas, vous tairez, tu tairais, vous tairiez, tais, taisez, il tait ; ils taisent. il taisait ; ils taisaient. il tut ; ils turent. il taira ; ils tairont. il tairait ; ils tairaient. qu'il taise ; qu'ils taisent. OK THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 171 SuBJ. ) §je taise, tu taises, il taise ; Pres. j o^nous taisionSi vous taisiez, ih taisent. Imp. g je tusse, tu tusses, il t6t ; Ofnous tussions, vous tussiez, Us tussent. Conjugate in the same manner, se taire^ to be silent, to hold one's tongue. EXERCISE ex. An ass- driver said: I am not what I follovoy for if I were dnier m. ct que car itaia what I follow, I would not be what I am. — Trouble art. embarras m. attends riches. — Several princes of Germany suivre art. richesses f. pi. AUemagne follow the doctrine of Luther. — I shall follow you very f. de fort closely. — Always follow the advice of your father.— pres. * * avism. monsieur Let us pursue our journey. — Well 1 what {is the consequence)? chemin m. Eh bieni que s'ensuivre I shall not conceal from you my way of thinking After ♦ fapon f. inf-1 having said that, he held his tongue. — Let us be silent mf-1 331. TRAIRE^ to milk. Part. Pres. trayant. Part. Past, trait, m. ; traitc,/. Ind. ( Je trais, Pres. \ nous trayons, Imp. Je trayais, nous trayions, (No Preterite D^nite.) Fut. COND. ) Pres. ! Imper. Je trairai, nous trairons, Je trairais, nous trairions, trayons, SuBJ. J g je traie, Pres. ) O'nous trayions, vous trayiez, tu trais, vous trayez, tu trayais, vous trayiez, tu trairas, vous trairez, tu trairais, vous trairiez, trais, trayez, tu traies. il trait ; ils traient. il trayait ; ils trayaient. fl traira j ils trairont. 11 trairait ; ils trairaieut. qu'il traie ; qu'ils traient. il traie ; ils traient. (No Imperfect qf the Sulyunctive.) 332. Conjugate in the same manner: — Abstraire, to abstract. distraire, to distract, to divert. extraire, to extract. rentraire, tofinedraw, to dam, retraire, to redeem. soustraire, to subtract. ( tiee Remarks on Abstraire aud Attraire, p. 14«.) 172 IRREGULAR AND DEt'ECtlVfi VEtlDS 333. VAINCREj to vanquish, to conquer. Part. Pres. vainquant. Part. Past, vaincu. Ind. ) Jo vnincs, tu vaincs, il vainc ; pres. ) nous vainquons, vous vainquez, ils vainqucnt. Imp. Jo vainc[uais, tu vainc^uais, il vainquait; nous vamquions, vous vainquicz, ils vainquaicnt. Prct. Je vain^uis, tu vainquis, il vainquit ; nous vainqutmcs, vous vainquites, its vainquircnt. Fut. Je vaincr.ii, tu vaincras, ilvaincra; nous vaincrons, vous vaincrez, ils vaincront. CoND. ) Je vaincrais, tu vaincrais, il vaincrait ; Pres. ) nous vaincrions, vous vaincriez, ils vaincraient. Imfer. (27te 2d pars. s. is not in use.) qu'il vainque ; vainquons, vainquez, qu'ils vainquent. SuBJ. ) g je vainque, tu vainques, il vainque ; Pres. ) o^nous vainquions, vous vamquiez, ils vainquent. //7?p. g je vainquisse, tu vainjuisses^ il vainquit; Cnous ramquissions, vous vainquissicz, ils vainquissent. The Prcsont and Imperfect of the Indicative of this verb are seldom used. Convaincrej to convince, to convict, is conjugated in the same manner. EXERCISE CXI. Is the cow milked f — The least thing diverts his vachet. moindre le • attention. — He has extracted that passage from a dialogue of • in. m. Plato. — Arithmetic teaches to add, Platon. art. arithmUiquef. d additionner, subtract f multiply, and divide. — Scipio vanquished pr. pr. multiplier, pr. diviser. Scipion md-3 Hannibal at the battle of Zama, in Africa. — The Greeks Annibal Afrique. Orec vanquished the Persians au Marathon, Salamis, ind-3 Perse d pr. Salamine, Platea, and Mycale. — How many people cannot be pr. Plat6e, pr. Combien de gens nepeuvent convinced but by experience ! — He was convicted of treason, m. pi. que art. OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. m 334. VIVPE, TO LIVE. Part. Pres. vivant. Part, Past, vdcu. No feminine, il vit ; ils vivent. il vivait ; iln viviiient, il vecut ; ila vccurcnt. il vivra ; ila vivront. il vivrait ; ils vivraient. qu'il vive ; qu'ila vivent. il vive ; ils vivent. il vdeftt ; ils v^cussent. Ind. ■) Je vis, Pres. } nous vivons, Imp. Je vivais, nous vivions, Je v^cus, nous vdcCimes, Je vivrai, nous vivrons, Je vivrais, Pret. Put. COND. D.) Pres. ) Impkr. nous vivnons, tu vis, vous vivez, tu vivais, vous viviez, tu vecus, vous veedtcs, tu vivras, vous vivrez, tu vivruis, vous vivrie*:, vis, vivez, tu vives, vous viviez, tu vecusses, vous v^cussiez. vivons, SuBj. ) gje vive^ Pres. jO'nous vivions. Imp. gje v^cusse, ©•nous vdcussions. So are conjugated, revivre^ to revive ; and surviwe^ to survive. lb ont vicu, in the sense of ils sont morts (they are dead), is an ex- pression purely Latin : the Romans avoided, from superstition, the use of words reckoned inauspicious. We say more generally, ils sont morts ; however, ils ont vicu has become a French phraso, owing to its adoption by a great number of autliors ; besides, it produces a finer e£fect titan the expression for which it stands. 335. To live on or t/pon, is expressed by vivre de ; as, // vit DE legumes (Acad.), he lives upon vegetables. G'est une fille accoutumde h vivre de salade, de lait, de fromage et I pommes. — {Moliire.) V^iVE le Rot I is an exclamation to express that we wish the king' long life and prosperity. Vive is also a term made use of to mark that we highly esteem a person, or set a great value upon something. Vive la liberte ! Vivent nos libdrateurs .' --{Acad.') Malgr^ tous les chagrins, vive la vie! — {OrKSset.) Vivent les gens d'esprit! — (Palissot.) Vivent les gens qui ont de 1 industrie ! — {Pluche.^ Vive or vivent^ in the above and similar phrases, is the third person of the present of the Subjunctive of the verb vivre. (Acad., Feraud, IWvoux, etc.) 174 IRREGULAR AND DEIEOTIYE VERBS EXERCISE CXII. I live with economy. — He lives like a great lord. — She en ♦ seigneur. lives upon her income. — We live in the country. — Those rentes f.^\. d animals live upon herbs and roots. — Saint Louis (Louis herbe f. pr. racine f. IX.) lived in the thirteenth century. — So good a prince will ind-2 d sieclem. 2 » i live for ever in history It is dear living in this eternellcment dans art. fait inf-1 dans town. — - The people shouted, Long live the Emperor !-— peuple m. crier ind-3 Fathers live again in their children. — He will never art. ' revivre dans survive the loss of his reputation. — The husband has cL perte f. . survived his wife. — ^ He did not long* survive a person wlio d ind-3 d f. was so dear to him. — Let us live as good Christiana. iud-2 86 en EXERCISE CXIII. He was in great dejection of mind; but the news ind-2 un accablement m. which he has just received, have revived him. — Homer vient de inf-1 fait inf-1 Homere lived probably about eight hmidred and fifty years before ind-2 environ • avant the Christian era. — That man lives on little lie lives from * * pen. au hand to mouth. — She lives on bread and water.— They live at jour le jour. d' the expense of others. — She lived more than a hundred yviars. depens]A. 116 ind-4 * —The Latin tongue will live for ever. — Long live Champagne 2 1 toujours. and Burgundy for good wines They called out to him, Who crier goes there? he replied, France. — This work will live, vivre OF THE ADVERB. 175 CHAPTER VI. OF THE ADVERB. 336. The Adverb is an invariable word, so called, because it is most frequently added to a verb, to express some quality, manner, or circumstance ; as, il ecrit bien, he writes well ; elle parU distinctement, she speaks distinctly. The adverb serves also to modify an adjective, and cvon another adverb ; as, il est TRi:s eloquent^ ha is very eloquent; elle chante fort hmi^ she sings very well. Some adverbs consist of a single word, as hieriy well ; toiijourSj always; others are compound, and consist of two or more words, and are commonly called, adverbial expressions; such are, pele-mele^ promiscuously; sur-le- champj immediately; tout-ct-coupj suddenly. 337. PLACE OF THE ADVERB. Adverbs, in French, are generally placed after the verb, in simple tenses^ and between the auxiliary and tho participle, in compound tenses ; as, II parle souvent de vous. II a souvent parld de vous. He often speaks of you. He has often spoken of you. But adverbial expressions are placed after the participle in compound tenses ; as, Vous avez jug6 a la hdte. | You have judged hastily. 338. CLASSIFICATION OF ADVERBS. Adverbs may be classified according to their different uses ; we shall give a list of those most in use. 339. Adverbs of Affirmation and Consent, certainly. Certes, oui, yes. sans douto, undoubtedly. soit, ^ be it so, volontiers, willingly. d'accord, doncj agreed. 176 EXERCISE ON ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION, ETC. 340. Adverbs of Denial, Non, ne, en pas ne point, »\ •,/»«! /M» nuUement, by no means. j ^^' ^ '"• point du tout, not at all. 341. Adverbs of Doubt Peut-^tre, perhaps. \ probabloment, probably. EXERCISE CXrV. Thnt is undoubtedly a very fine action. — You wish it: be it C'est m f. so. — I willingly consent to that bargain. — Ao, no, 1 shall not marche m. consent to it. — ^Will you give up your rights to him ? — By no 109 c^der droit m. means Do you fear his resentment? — No, not at all. — ressentiment m. You perhaps think that he is one of your friends ; you are in a croire * * mistake. — He will probably succeed in his undertaking, art. erreurf, rSussir 342. Adverbs of Interrogation. These adverbs are always placed before the verb. Combien, how much, how comment, how. [many. oiH, where. d'od, pourq quan( 343. Adverbs of Quantity. pourquoi, [id. whence, why. when. Assez, enough. beaucoup, much, very much. bien, fort, trSs, very. davantage, more. peu, little. presque, almost. tant, so much, so many. trop, too, too much, too [many. EXERCISE CXV. How much have you got in your purse ? — How many verbs have you learned? — How is he? — Where do you deverbem. se porter live? — Whence do you come ? — Why do you make so muck demeurer "lire noise ? — When shall X have the pleasure of seeing you de inf-1 ag« philc drinl EXERCISE ON ADVERBS OF COMPARISON. 177 eans. II. hiy. agMn?— You have played enowgrA Gentlemen, where are you jouer mt isieur running to ? — I am very glad to meet you Science is courir * de art. ■ f. estimable, but virtue is much more so. — Almost all the art. V hien * philosophers think so. — He has so many friends ! — He ainsL d* drinks too much. — She speaks much and reflects little. Ainsi, aussi, autant, comme, mieux, 344. Adverhs of Comparison, [better. de mieux en mieux, better and moins, less. pis, worse. plus, more thus, so. as, too, also. as much, as many. as, like. better. SI. so. EXERCISE CXVI. The president spoke thus. — That book has merit ; but jpr6sident du there are others as good. — K he has done that, I can do en * d' en as much. — There were as many ladies as gentlemen ind-2 de que de monsieur Don't read like him. — Women speak better than they art. qu' write. — She sings better and better. — Since the invention of n* * Depuis f. powder, battles are less bloody than they were.— art. poudre f. art. sanglant qu* ne V ind-2 His affairs are going from bad to worse. — You do not oflfer mal en enough, give something more. — I was so far from them ! de ind-2 loin 80 345. Adverhs of Order ^ or Rank. Premierenieiit, first. secondement, &c. secondly, 6^c. d'abord, at first, first. aprea, after. ensuite, afterwards. auparavant, before. 178 EXERCISE ON ADVERBS OF ORDEB, AND PLACE. 346. Adverbs of Place, Ailleurs, elsewhere. ici, here. Ik, there. loin, far. partout, everywhere. y, there. Remark. — !F adverb comes from the Latin tit, there; it must not be confounded with the relative pronoun y, which has the sense of to him, to her, to it, to them, &c. — See No. 109. EXERCISE CXVII. Do first what we have agreed upon. — Work first, you ce dont 262 * aahord will amuse yourself afterwards You will go before, and he devant lui after. — The painter had brought together in the same picture ind-2 r assembler un tableau m. several different objects; there a troop of bacchants, here a * ^ bacchante group of young people ; there a sacrifice ; here a disputation of gens m. dispute f. philosophers. — Alexander ^ave to Porus a kingdom larger Alexandre md-3 plu^ grand than the one he had before. — Don't go far. — I have celui qu* ind-2 looked for it everywhere. — Will you go there after dinner ? chercher Vouloir y 347. Adverbs of Time, Present. Aujourd'hui, to-day. \ raainteuant, now. Past. Autrefois, formerly. dernierement, lately. hier, yesterday, [terday. avant-hier, the day before yeS' T> Future, to-morrow. bientot, emani, . ^ rSs-demain, the day after to-morrow. soon, very soon. desormais, hereafter. dordnavant, henceforth. Indeterminate. Alors, then. loagt'cKips, long. quelqtuefois, sometimes rarement, seldom. souvent, often. toiyours, always EXERCISE ON ADVERBS OF TIME. EXERCISE CXVin. 179 We expect him to-day or tomorrow. — Formerly, the attendre education of females was neglected, but now it is very much art. femme ind-2 nlgligi on * *beaucoup (attended to) He set out the day be/ore yesterday. — Let ua ^s'en ^occupe est parti be wist, hereafter. — Be more exact henceforth.— '^hexQ were a 1 ind-2 you then? — He goes sometimes on foot, sometimes in a coach. — ci en * voiture. That seldom occurs. — People often deceive themselves by arriver On se tromper en judging fi'om appearances. — The wisest kings are often sur art. apparencef. deceived. — The moon always revolves round the earth. tromper tozirner autour de 348. Adverbs of Manner and Quality. Bien, well. mal, badly, ill. k la h^tc, hastily. a la mode, fashionably, "k tort, wrongfully. expres, on purpose. To this class must be added the adverbs formed from adjectives, by annexing mtieTU. There are, in French, few adjectives, from which adverbs of tl nature have not been formed. This termination in ri it corresponds to the ly of the English, and comes fn i the Italian sub- stantive mentCj itself derived from i Latin substantive mens, mentis, which signifies mind, ention, manner; so that tendrement, fortement, have d same meaning as "in a tender manner," "in a strc ^ manner." These adverbs are formed from adjectives in the fol- lowing manner : — 349. Rule I. When the adjective ends with a vowel, in the masculine, the adverb is formed by simply adding ment to it ; as, poli, polite; poliment, politely. sage, wise; sagement, wisely. yrai, true; vraiment, truly. t 180 ADVERBS OF MANNER AND QUAUTT. Exception. — Impunij unpunished, makes impimemeni^ with impunity. The six following adverbs take an ^ accented before the termination mentj instead of the e mute of the adjectives : — . Aveuglement, blindly. commod^meut, commodiously. conformdment, conformably. ^norm^ment, enormously. incommod^ment, incommodiously. opini&tr^ment, obstinately. BeUement^ softly ; follement^ foolishly ; mollement^ effeminately ; and nouvellement, newly, are formed from the adjectives, helj folj mol^ nouvel, according to the following rule. ) 350. Rule II. When the adjective ends with a con- sonant, in the masculine, the adverb is formed from the feminine, by adding ment to it ; as, franc, r/t. franche,/. frank i franchement, frankly. heureux, m. heureuse,/. happy; heureusement, Aa»pi7w. naif, m. naive,/. artless ,• naivemcut, artlessly. Exception. — Gentilj makes genvthnent^ prettily. The six following adverbs take an e accented, instead of the e mute of the feminine of the adjectives from which they are formed : — Commun^ment, coinmonly. confusement, confusedly. express^ment, expressly. obacuiement, obscurely. precis^ment, precisely. profondement, profoundly. 35 L Rui E III. Adiectives ending in ant or entj in the masculine, form their adverbs by changing ant into amm^nCj and ent into emment ; as. constant, constant ; Eloquent, eloquent ; constamment, constantly. ^loquemmeni, eloquently. Lentj slow, and present, present, are the only excep- tions to this rule ; they follow the second rule, making lentement, slowly, and prestmtement, presently. N.B. Most ab verbs of manner, and a few of the other classes, have the three degrees of comparison, which are formed fis in the adjectives. as KXERCISE ON ADVERBS Of MAKNER, ETC. l81 352. The following adverbs are irregular in French, as well as in English : — Positive, Comparative. Superlative. bien, well. mieux, better. le mieux, the best. mal, badly. pia, worse. le pis, the worst. pcU) little. moins, less. le moins, the least. (See previous Remorks on these Adverbs, No. 70.) EXERCISE CXIX. (JV. B In the two following Exercises, some \(ycctlvc8 are given, from which the Student will form Adverbs, according to the foregoing rules.) All goes well. — I say it on purpose. — He has done that alter dire faixe very cleverly He acts conformably to your orders Speak fort habile agir to me frankly. — He is dangerously wounded. — Comeille and dangereux Racine are the two best French tr>f^ic poets; the pieces of * *.{. ui.que * piece f. the former are strongly^ but incorrectly written j those of tlie premier ^fort ^ Hncorrect latter are more regularly beautiful, more purely expressed, dernier 7'igulier beau pur exprime, and more delicately conceived. — You walk too slowly, delicat pensi EXERCISE CXX. I want shoes that I can put on easily. — He receives vouloir 32 subj-l * aise \*Yerybody ^(very politely j. — Read attentively. —^Tha lion is font le monde attentif naturally courageous. — The ancients believed that the swan naturel ancien ind-2 nygjiem. sang melodiously^ when it was about to die. — We see erndently ind-2 melodieux lorsqii' ind~2 pres de ivident that three times thiee make nine. — That, affair goes badly.— fois affaire f. Sit upon tliis sofa ; you will be better than on that Asseyez-vous m. chair. — Of all our great -writers, he is the one I like be^t, chaise f, 4crivain c' celui que le 182 OF THE TREPOSITION. CHAPTER VII. OF THE TREPOfelTION. ji 1 I ■ 353. The Preposition is an invariable part of speech, BO called, because, as its Latin derivation implies, it is generally placed before the word whose relation to other words it points out. It is by means of prepositions that we supply the cases which arc wanting in the French language ; for instance, the preposition de often corresponds to the genitive or ablative of the Latin. Le livre de Pierre, — Je viens de Rome. Prepositions are either simple or compound. The simple consist of a single word; as, ci, to; de^ of; avec^ with. Compound prepositions consist of two or more words ; such are, quant d, as to ; vis-ci-viSy opposite ; d, regard dCj with regard to. The prepositions are divided into classes, according to the manner in which they express relation or connexion. 354. To denote Place. near, near, under. on, upoiif over, towards. {Vers is also a prep, of time.) opposite. behold, here is or are. behold, there is or are. EXERCISE CXXI. Chicanery prowls incessantly around justice, envy art. chicane f. I'oder sanM cesse de fhemi* art. around prosperity, calumny around virtue, de art. art. de art aft Aupr^s, near. prSs, autour, round, around. proche. chez, at. sous. dans, in. sur, devant, before. vers, derri5rc, behind. entre. between. hors, out. vis-a^vis, jusque, tiU, until. voici. parmi, among. voila, BXERCISES ON PUErOSlTlOKS. 183 )cccli, it 13 I other error around the mind of man, and injii.,(ice around de esprit m. art. art. f. his heart : what ravages do these monsters not commit de — — ni- * n^ font-ils paSf V hen once they can gain access ! — Tn prosperity it is unefois p6nUrer! art. il ag-reeable to have a friend ; in misfortune it Is a necessity d* oxi. malheurm. c' besoinm. Write injuries upon sand, and benefits upon art. art. art. hicnfaitm. art. brass. — The loadstone points towards the north. — airain m. aimant m. se fourner Paper was invented towards the end of the fourteenth art. ind-4 fin f. century; and printing towards the middle of the silcle m. art. imprimerie f. milieu m fifteenth century. — Go befoj^e me, and not behind him. 855. To denote Order. Avant, befon. apres, after'. depuis, sinee. d^s, from. Avec, xoith. durante during. pendant, whilst^ during. 356. To denote Union, outre, besides. ti^r.i}^<^<^ordingto. EXERCISE CXXII. Christ.— Augustus bcffan to reign forty-two years before Jesus Auguste ind-3 Jesus I fear Gk>d, and qfter God, I fear principally those who do not ceua fear him — Man /rom his birth has the feeling of Art. sentiment m. art. pleasTire and of pain. — The soldier defends his country art. aouleur f. * art. patrie f. with his sword j the man of letters cnlip^htens it with liis pen. — icUiirer It is during youth that we must lay the foundations of pendant art. t( faut poser fondement 184 KXERCISES ON TREPOSITIONS. an houourable mid happy life. —■ The wise man acts lypy according to the dictates of reason. — maxime f. art. art. (are productive) according to their cultivation. produiaent * art. culture f. 357. To denote Separation or Privation. ae conduire Talents m. Sans, without. except^, except. hors, exceptf sao hormis, except^ but. 358. To denote Opposition, Contre, against. uialgrd, in spite of. uonobstant, nottoith- [standing. EXERCISE CXXm. No virtue without religion, no happiness without virtue.—- Point de A child without innocence is a flower without perfume. — Where parfum. (will you find) rosea without thorns ? — ^We must always be trouper inf-1 des // faut ' * ready to serve our friends, except against our conscience. — sea sa f . All is lost sace honour. — Truth, notwithstanding art. art. prejudice, error and falsehood, (clears its way) art. j)r^ugi m. oxi. art. mensongem. se fait jour and penetrates at last. — The hedgehog knows how to percer d la Jin. h6rtssonm. h a. 265 * * defend himself without fighting He has done it in spite of mo, se combattre. 359. To denote the End. Euvers, towards. pour, for. concernant, concerning. touchant, about, respecting. 360. To denote Cause and Means. Par, by. I attendu, on account of. moyennant, by means of. \ tu, considering. EXERCISES ON PREPOSITIONS. 185 EXERCISE CXXIV. Fulfil your duties towards God, towards your parents, Jiemplir mid towards your country. — That letter is not for you. * art. patrie f. — It was at the entrance of Edward III. into Calaii), Ce ind-3 entrie f. Edonard dans \\\ 1347, that (the drum was heard to beat) for the first Van Von entendit battre le tambour time. — He has written to him respecting that business. — She fiAs f. affaire f. charms everybody by her kindness and her gentleness. — tout le monde bond f. douceur f. They will succeed by means of your counsels. — The fleet rSussir avis m. cannot sail on account of contrary winds. parti^ art. * ^ 361. The preposition A is used to express several re- lations, the principal of which are : — 1. place; as, alter k Parisy to go to Paris; demeurer ^ LondreSy to live in London. 2. time; as, se lever k six heureSj to rise at six o'clock, ii. matter; as, bdtir k chaux, to build with lime. 4. manner; as, s'habiller k la franqaise^ to dress after the French fashion. 5. cause; as, un moulin k vent, a windmill ; des armes kfeuy firearms. 6. use, destination; as, un moulin hpapier^ a paper* mill ; un sac k ouvrage^ a work-bag. 7. means; as, petndre k Vhuilej to paint in oil. 8. possession; as, ce livre est k Alfred^ this book belongs to Alfred. EXERCISE CXXV. There are two railways from Paris to Versailles. — How far 186 chemincefer Combien is it from London ^0 Edinburgh ?--The neglect of all religion yat-il Edimbourgf oublim. f. soon leads to the neglect of all the duties of man. — bienitCt 284 devoir m. art. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) .v^ /»;^^ <. > ^^> / S om /A Photographic Sciences Corporation '^^^ 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 'V- // i/.. & & ^ ^ :\ \ ^ "% 186 EXERCISES OK THE rREfOSITIONS A AND DE. I Hypocrisy is a homage that vice pays to art. hommagem. art. — m. rendre art. virtue. — Come back at six o'clock. — We left ^ him Reccnir heure quitter ind-4 at (twelve o'clock).— That is at the rate of five per cent.— midi. C ♦ raison pour The walls of this ancient castle are built «?t7A lime and mwrm. cMteauva.. bdtir prep. cement It is a steam-engine of (twenty-horse power). ciment. C" machine a vapeur f. la force ae vingt chevaux. 362. The principal use of de is to express : — 1. place; as, venir de Li/orij to come from Lyons. 2. time; as, il est parti dejour^ he went away in the day-time. 3. matter; as, une table dc marhre^ a marble tabic ; une tabatiere d'or, a gold snuffbox. 4. possession; as, le livre de Berthe, Bertha's book. 5. subject ; as, parlous de ce^/e affaire^ let us speak q/ that affair. 6. cawse, motive ; as, je 5wes cAarw edc sa for tune j I am happy a^ his fortune. EXERCISE CXXVI. We come from Dublin, where we have spent a week very ou passer huit jours agreeably I intend to go from France to Switzerland ; se proposer d' en Suisse and from Switzerland to Italy. — The seven wonders of the Jtalie. merveille f. world ,2re, the walls and gardens of Babylon; the ind-2 muraille f. art. Bahylone • pyramids of Egypt; tho pharos of Alexandria; the pyrarnidei. Egypte; pharem. mausoleum which Artemisia erected for Mausolus, her husband ; tombeau m. Artimise fit 4lever Mausole the temple of Diana at Ephesus ; the statue of Jupiter m. Ephese; f. Olympius, by Phidias; and the colossus at Rhodes. Olympien, colosaem. de EXEnCISES ON THE PRErOSlTIOX EN. 187 to art. him 4 ;cnt. — td prep. iwer). \eoaux. 3. in the c ; une )ok. eak of ?, I am k very irs serland ; uisse of the on ; the me' la ; the lushand ; Jupiter des. 363. The preposition en serves to mark the relations of place, time, situation, Sfc, and is variously expressed in English, 1. place; as, voyager en AJlemagne, to travel in Ger- many ; aller en Italic, to go to Italy. 2. time ; as, en hiver, in winter ; en temps de paix, in time of peace. 3. situation, manner ; as, etre en bonne sante, to be in good health ; agir en maitre, to act «s a master. 364. Remark. — The noun which follows en seldom admits of the article, whereas the noun which comes after dans is generally preceded by the article. EXERCISE CXXVII. '(The same prejudices) ^(are found) m Europe, in Asia, in prejugt m. on trotive Africa, and even in America. — I have travelled in England, jusqu' Am,erique. Scotland, and Ireland. — Queen Elizabeth was born pr. Ecosse pr. Irlande. art. Elisabeth nattrc ind-3 m 1533, and died in 1603. — Narcissus was metamorphosed ind-3 Narcisse ind-3 mitamorpfiosi into a flower. — He has acted, on this occasion, like a great * agir dans f. * man. — Conscience warns us as a friend before puiii-shing" art. f. avertir * de inf-1 us as a judge. — My grandmother is alive and in good health EXERCISE CXXVIII. My father is in Russia, my brother in Prussia, and my sister in Russie Prusse Austria (It is computed) that there are in France four hundred Aiitriche. On compte * * * towns, and forty-three thousand villages. — I can go in one pouvoir day from Edinburgh to London, and in two days from London to d Geneva.-— He spends the whole day in ^oing from house to passer d inf-1 housci from street to street, and from place to place. 188 OF THE CONJUNCTION. CHAPTER VIII. OF THE CONJUNCTION. 365. The Conjunction is an invariable part of speech, which serves to connect words or sentences. When I say : — Travaillons, si nous voulons ac- querir des talents, car le temps s'enfiiit, ET persuadons-nous bien Qu'il ne revient plus. Let us work, if toe wish to pos- sess acquirements, for time flies, and let tis never forget that it returns no more. In this phrase the words s/, if, car^ for, et^ and, que^ that, are conjunctions, as they serve to unite the different parts of the sentence. 366. Some conjunctions are simple, that is, they con- sist of a single word ; as, ou, or ; mais, but ; others are compound, that is, composed of two or more words, such arc, au reste, besides ; a moins que, unless. Some grammarians reckon as many sorts of conjunc- tions as there are ways in which the sentence is alTected by them, but as these properties are common to both languages, we shall content ourselves with giving here a list of the conjunctions most in use in the French lan- guage. 367. TABLE OF CONJUNCTIOKS. Afin de, afin que, aiiisi, ear, cependant, tOi in order to. that, in order that. so, thus. for. however, yet. c'est-a-dire, that is to say. comrae, as. d'ailleurs, besides. de plus, moreover. de sorte que, so that. done, then, therefore. et, and. 1 usqu' k ce que, till, until. lorsque, when. mais, but. nijaumoins, nevertheless. ni, or, ou, ou bien, parce que, pendant que, pourtant, pourvu que, puisque, quaud, que, quoiciue, savoir, si, sinou, Boit, nor, neither. now, then. or. or else. because. while, whilst. however, yei. provided that. since. though, although. that. though, although. namely, to wit, viz if if not, or else. whether. EXERCISES ON CONJUNCTIONS. 189 EXERCISE CXXIX. I have brought this book in order to consult it.— To listen livre m. Ecouter with joy to a slanderer, and to applaud him, is to cherish * medisant m. * lui c* rechauffer the serpent that stings, in order that he may sting more m. piquer effectually. — David was a king and a prophet. — All the sHrement. ind-2 * * evils are (long ago) out of the box of Pandora, hnt mal m. depuis longtemps hors holte f. hope is yet within. — The compass was not art. encore dedans. houssolei. n' ind-4 point invented by a mariner, nor the telescope by an astronomer, nor trouv^e marinm. telescope m. the microscope by a (natural philosopher), nor printing m. physicien m. art. imprimerie f. by a man of letters, nor gunpowder by a military man. hommedelettres art. poudredcanonf. * EXERCISE CXXX. Which of the two was most intrepid, Ccesar or Alex- ind-3 le ander? — The memory of Henry IV. is and always will be Henri dear to the French, because he placed his glory and pi. mettre ind-2 91 happiness in rendering his people happy. — Provided you d inf-1 qu' on know the ruling passion of anyone you are sure to »ache 'dominant * f. quelqu*un, en assurS de please him. — The Gauls worshipped Apollo, Minerva, lui Oaulois a(?orer ind-2 Apollon, Jupiter, and Mars; they believed that Apollo kept off ind-2 chasser ind-2 diseases; that Minerva presided over works; that art. maladie f. ind-2 d art. travail m. Jupiter was the sovereign of heaven ; and Mars the arbiter ind-2 art. pi. of war. — If you wish to be happy, love vurtue. art. 27G * 190 OF THE INTERJECTION. CHAPTER IX. OF THE INTERJECTION. 368. The Interjection is a word wliich serves to ex press some sudden emotion of the mind. The interjections most commonly used in French, are : — I. For Joy. Ah! ah! bon! voell! II. For Grief and Pain. Ah! ah! aie ! h^las I ay! oh dear! alas ! III. For Fear. Ahl h^I ah! oh! IV. For Aversion, Contempt^ and Disgust, Fi! fi done ! fytfyi V. For Derision. Oh! he! zest ! bah! oh! hah! pshaw ! nonsense! VI. For Surprise. Oh I oh! ha ! hu! VII. For Admiration. Oh! oh! ah ! ha! VIII. For Silence. Chut! hush! st ! hist ! IX. For Encouraging. C^! \ now! well! oh 9^! i" goon! X. ^or Warning. Gare ! rds which reine et h t 8a mtre, , silver, I happy, are ence of -f. vice — m. lusic siquef. ther is Peter ed by led to bstan- :ench, phers. SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 201 1 There are two histories, two floors, philosophers both ancient and modern ; the one expressed, the other under- stood ; therefore the article must be repeated. a^- Observe that the substantive la not put in the plural : Fhisloire ancienne ct la tnoderne, le premier et le second ttage, because these phrases are elliptical, and stand for Vhistoire ancienne et rhistoire moderne, le premier 2iy Petrarque^ BocacCj Michel-Ange, Raphael, etc. ; it is usage that de- cides here, as in many other cases. EXERCISE CXLVI. God said . let there be light, and there was light The ind-3 que la lumiere soit, * 'ind-3 ^ God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, was the only true God. ind-2 seul vrai -^Plato, Aristotle, Homer, Demoffthenes, Cicero, Virgil, and Platon, Aristote, Demosthene, Ciceron, Virgile, 204 SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. LivVf arc classical authors Achilles is the hero Tite-Livet des ^classique ^ Achille hiros h asp, of the Hiad ; jEneas is the hero of the Eneid. — Helen was Iliadei. Enee En^idef. HU^ne ind-4 the ruin of Troy. — Bucephalus (would carrj^ none but) Alex- Troie. Bucephale lie voulait porter qu* ander. — Carthage was the rival of .Rome. — Dantcy Tasso^ ind-2 rivale f. and Ariosto, hold the first rank amon^ the Italian poets. tenir rangm. parmi * * 395. Rule III. The article is not used, in French^ before the ordinal numbers Jirst^ second, third, fourth, etc., when they come after the name of a sovereign, or » after the words hook, cliapter, or such like •, as, Edouard premier. Richard trois. Livre premier. Cliapitre second. Edward the irst. Richard the thiid. Book the Jirst. Chapter the second. 396. Observe that, in French, we make use of the cardinal numbers instead of the ordinal, in speaking of sovereigns, with the exception of the Jirst of the series. With the second, it is optional to use deux or second, for we say indiflferently Henri deux or Henri second. — [Acad,) 397. The cardinal or ordinal numbers are indifferently used, the ^rst excepted, after the words livre, chapitre, page, or such like. We say, livre premier, section premiere, and not livre un, section une. But we say either livre huit or huiti^me; chapitre dix or dixieme; page trois or troisi^me ; tome second OY tome deux, etc. — [Acad.) . (For farther Remarks, see pages 34, 35.) EXERCISE CXLVII. Pope Loo the tenth and Luther were cotemporaries. ^ art. pape Leon contemporain r William the third married the princess Mary, daughter Guillaume ipouser ind-3 Marie of James the second, and granddaughter of Charles the fir ft, Jacques petife-fille SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 205 ■ —Louis the eleventh had a Scotch guard. — Louis the fifteenth ind-2 Hcossais ^garde f. was the great grandson of Louis the fourteenth Book the ind-2 arriere-petit-fils sixth, chapter the fifth. — ^Volume the third, section the seventh, article the first. — Rule the fourth, page the ninth. regie f. 398. Rule IV. No article is used before nouns pre- ceded by any of the possessive, demonstrative, or inde- finite adjectives wio/i, ton^ soUy notre^ votre^ leur^ ce, nuly aucurij chaquCj tout (used for chaque)^ certain^ plusieurs^ telj nor before those which are preceded by a cardinal number; as, Mon frere et ma soeur apprennent la g^ographie. Cette montre est bonne ; donnez-la a votre soeur. Tout homme pcut mentir, mais tout homme ne ment pas. J'ai trois chevaux. My brother and sister are learning geography. This watch is good; give it to j'our sister. Every man can lie^ hut every man does not lie. I have three horses. (See Observations, pp. 42, 43, and Buie, p. 44.) r EXERCISE CXLVm. It is my turn to speak. — Give me the number of his C a tourm. d numerom. house. — The Seine has its source in Burgundy, and its f. f. en mouth at Havre-de-Gr4ce. — All the husbands were at embouchure f. au mari ind-2 the ball with their wives. — These ladies (are waiting for) hat m. ftmme dame attendent their carriages. — Those two boys have lost thdr hats. — voiture f. The Saracens occupied Spain during several centuries Sarrasins ontoccupS pendant sieclem. The city of Tro^ sustained a siege of ten years. — ville f Troie soutint an m. The poimd sterling (is worth) about twenty-five franca. vaut environ 206 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. f 399. Rule V. The indefinite article, a or an, used in ; English, before nouns expressing title^ profession^ trade^ country^ or any attribute of the noun preceding, is omitted in French ; as, Le due d'York, prince du sang. Je suis m^decin. II est lihraire. Etes-vous Fran 9818 ? Je viens de Caen, ville de Nor. mandie. The Duke of York, a prince of the blood. I am Si physician. He is a booheller. Are you a Frenchman 9 I come from Caen, a tovm of Nor- mandy. 400. But when an adjective is joined to the noun, or when it is specified by some circumstance, then a or an must be expressed in French ; as, Je suis UN prince infortund. Jam an unfortunate prince. M. Walewski est un Polonais M. Walewski is a Pole of an illua^ d'une illustre maison. trious family. • A or an is also expressed in French after c'est; as, C'est UN dv6que. f He is & bishop. 401. Rule VI. The English indefinite article a or an is omitted in French, after quel^ quelle^ what, used as an exclamation; as, Quel malheur ! Quelle beauts ! Quelle belle maison ! Quelle folie d'agir ainsi ! What a misfortune I What a beauty! What a beautiful house ! What Q, folly to act thus! EXERCISE CXLIX. Napoleon was (at once) an emperor, a warrior, and a iud-2 dlafois guerriery statesman. — Socrates was a philosopher; Apelles, a homme d'etat. Socrate ind-2 Apelle painter; Phidias, a sculptor; Cicero, an orator; Livy, an peintre Tite-Live historian ; and Virg^il, a poet. — His father was a barrister. — historien poete. ind-2 avocat. I am an Englishman, and a merchant The best coffee nigociant. cafi m. comes from Mocha, a town of Arabia Felix. — I am an Moka, heureuse. I SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. 207 used in I, trade^ omitted prince of mo/Nor^ noun, or a or an fice. \fan illus^ ; as, a or an sd as an use/ hits! t and a » lelles, a 7eUe Hf an •Live rister. — ocat. coffee cafe m. am an unhappy Spaniard, who seek an asylum, where I may tnalheureux Espagnol, cherche aaile m. oii puisst end my days in peace. — He is an officer. — He is a captain finir en C officier. II What a noise you make ! — What a beautiful morninsU".'" """'} Bateau. vapeur I'hree thread-stockings^ i. e. ) t.„„ j, .-^ ^.^ . stockings with three threads, f ^*^ ^ *^«^^ ^^^' Note. — Some compound vrords take the article besides tlie preposition d, ; as, un pot AC laity a milk-Jug. In the following Exercise, when the article is re- quired it has been pointed out. EXERCISE CLX. The inventor of gunpowder was a German monk, named canon poudref. ind-2 ^ ^moine Schwartz. — I have alwaysj^rc-an/winmy bed-room. — Give coucherchambref. me a wine glass, and a soup spoon. — The hay-market verrem. cuillerf. aufoinmarchem. is on your left, and the horse-fair is before you. — There d gauche aux pi. foire f. devant are (a great many) windmills in France. — Have you ever beaucoup de jamais seanB, steam-mill f No; but I have seen several water-mills. — mais plusieurs eau Honour to the inventor of the «i?cam-cwgrme/ — I like rice-soup. Jlonneur machine f. au riz — Take the coffee cups into the dining-room. — Where is Porter cafe tasse manger sallef. OH my sister's work-bag f — My brother has given me a penknife ouvragesacm. canifm, with an ivory handle The waiter has broken the milk-jug ♦ ivoire manchem. ^20 SYNTAX OF tllE ADJECTtVE. Rom Rom that CHAPTER III. OF THE ADJECTIVE. § I. CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE NOUN. 422. General Rule. — The Adjective, in French, must be of the same gender and number as the noun or pro- noun to which it relates, for which purpose it often changes its termination. In English, on the contrary, the adjective is never varied on account of gender or number. EXAMPLES. Le BON pere. La BONNE m^re. De beaux jardins. De belles fleurs. The QOOD father. The GOOD mother. Fine gardens. FiSE flowers. Bon is masculine singular, because pere is masculine, and in the singular ; bonne is feminine singular, because mere is feminine, and in the singular. Beaux is masculine plural, because jardins is masculine and plural ; belles is feminine plural, because Jleurs is feminine and plural. (For the formation of tho feminine, and plural of the acUectives, see p. 20—25.) EXERCISE CLXI. The formidable empire which Alexander conquered, * ^ avait conquis (did not last) longer than his life, which was very short, ne dura pas plus longtemps f . ind-3 court — The victory which Ceesar obtained on the plains f. remporter ind-3 dans plaine f. of Pharsalia was baneful to his country, pernicious to the Pharsale ind-3 funeste pays m. pemicieux 45 CONCORD OP THE ADJECTIVE. 221 THE , must >r pro- b often ^ry, the umber. culine, ecause icullne urs is 10-25.) jred, mquis short, court uus 'ine f. to the UomanSf and disastrous to mankind. — (It is believed) Romain disastreux pour art. genre humainm. Oncroit that the first bayonets were made at Bayoune. — That haionnette f. ind-3 fabriquer custom is very ancient among us. — It is a mere evasion, for coutumef. parmi C franc defaitef. car the thing is public. — Give these ^ne roses to those good girls. 423. 1st Remark. — When the adjectives demif half, wi/ , barfi ^^are placed ^g/brg a substantive^ and when the aH - jective feu^ late, comes before the article 9y a pronomina l aaiective, they always remain invariable ; as, une demi- Itvre^ halt-a-pound ; il va tiu-pteasj he goes bare-foot; feu la reinCj the late queen. But the agreement takes place, ii demi and y2M be placed cr//gr the substantive, and feu after the article or pronominal adjectiv e ; as, Une livre et demie^ one pound and a half; u a les pieds nus^ his feet are bare ; la feue reine^ the late queen ; ma feue niece^ my late niece. Observation. — The adjective demi^ placed after the substantive, never takes the mark of the plural ; because it does not agree with the sub. stantive which precedes it, but with a substantive following, which is un- derstood, and which is always of the singular number. This phrase : 11 a itudi€ quatre ans et demi, he has studied four years and a half, is equivalent to this : II a itudi6 quatre ans et un demi an, he has studied four years and one half year. 424. 2d Remark. — Adjectives used adverbially are invariable, that is to say, remain always in the masculine singular ; as, Ces dames parlent bas, those ladies speak low ; ces flcurs sentent bon, these flowers smell well. EXERCISE CLXII. An Irishman said to a Scotchman: Lend me three guineas.- Irlandais md-2 Ecossais Friter guineef. That is impossible, for I (only possess) half a guinea.— Well, Cela car ne possede qu* * lend it me, and you will owe me two guineas and a toujours devoir half. — They go 6are-foot and ftarc-headed — I have heard tHe f. ou'i dire 222 CONCORD OP THE ADJECTIVE. your tate sister say that her daughter and I were born the d. ^ ^ ♦ moi naqutnies same year. — The late princess was universally regretted. — annie f. ind-3 She sings (out of tune). — They spoke loud Mary, speak low. faux fern, ind-3 haut 425. Besides the general rule upon the agreement of the Adjective with the substantive which it qualifies, there are particular rules which it is indispensable to know, because they serve to explain the general rule. 426. (I.) An adjective referring to two or more sub- stantives singular, of the same gender, must be put in the plural, and agree with them in gender ; as, Le riche et le pauvre sont igaux The Hch and the poor are equal (levant Dieu. before God. La rose et la tulipe sont belles. Therose and the tulip are beautiful. 427. If the dubstantives are of different genders, tlio adjective is to be put in the masculine plural ; as, My sister and brother are at- tentive. He has shoion astonishing pru- dence and courage. Ma soeur et mon frere sont at- tentifs. II a niontr^ une prraence et un courar": cconnirU. 428. Remark. — When the substantives are of different genders, and the adjective qualifying them has not the same termination for the masculine and feminine, the ear requires that the masculine substantive should bo placed last in French, that is to say, immediately before the adjective; so it is better to say: la bouche et les yeux ouvERTS, than, les yeux et la houche ouverts. EXERCISE CLXin. Pilpay and Confucius are very celebrated among the nations celebre par mi peuple m. of Asia. — Uprightness and piety are (very much) esteemed, art. fdroiture fpiete f. tres even by the wicked. — Ignorance and self-love are m^mede jnechant^l. t f. i'amour-proi)rem. t See No. 871, page 192. CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 223 ^orn the wnes potted. >_ kak low. |ment of qualifies, sable to |rulc. )re sub- put in "le equal beautiful, ers, tho are at- nns pru. liferent not the the ear placed 3rc tlio ?5 yeux ions 'Ple m. 'eemed, are m. equaXiy presumptuous. — The mhabitants of (Davi«* Strait) prisomptueux habitant art. ditroit de Davis m . eat their flesh and their fish raw The room and viandet. poissonm. cru chambret the closet are openy but the window and the drawer are cabinet m. ouvert fenUrei. tiroirm. shut. — His sister and brother are very polite. fermi poU 429. (II.) The Adjective placed after two or more sub- stantives which are synonymous or nearly so, agrees witli the last substantive only ; as, Toute sa vio n'a 6ii qu'un tra- vail, qu'une occupation con- TiNUKLLE. (Massillon.') Ills whole, life has hcen nothing hut continual labour and occu- pation. In this case, there is really but one word to qualify, because there is only one and the same idea expressed, and it h with the last substantive that tho agreement takes place, as striking the mind most. 430. (III.) When substantives are united by the con- junction ou (or), the adjective agrees with the last ; as, Un courage ou une prudence An astonishing courage or pru- £tonnante. dence. That conjunction ou gives the exclusion to one of the substantives, and it is upon the last, as fixing the atten- tion most, that the qualification falls. 431. Remark. — When an adjective relates to two or more substantives, and is one of those that must absolutely be placed before the substantive, it is repeated, in French, before each substantive, and agrees with it ; as. Great events and revolutions fol- lowed the death of Ccesar. De OKANDS ^v^nements, et de GRANDES revolutions suivirent la mort de C&ar. EXERCISE CLXIV. Our Queen honours Uterature with that attachment and Us lettres de m. attachementf * dc 224 PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. patronage capable of ^making Mt flourish. — Birds cede protection f. inf-1 -fles Jleurir. oiseau m, build tlieir nests with ^admirable 'art and 'address. construire nidm. avccun art^ * uneadnaset — Tlie demi-gods of the ancients were only men who ancien m. iud-2 ne que des (had disting-uished themselves) by ^extraordinary 'valour 'or s'itaient distingu6s nne 'virtue. — Louis XIV. had in France an ^absolute vne ind-2 un absolu 'power and 'authority. pouvoii'f * une § II. PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 432. Some Adjectives are placed before the noun, and some after it ; others are either put before or after, ac- cording as taste or ear may require. However, it may be laid down as a rule that the French more generally place the Adjective after the noun. ADJECTIVES Wracn ARE PLACED BEFORE THE NOUN. 433. (1.) Adjectives of one syllable, as beau ion, grandj grosy etc., generally precede their substantive. We say, un BEAU jardiny un bon ouvragCy un grand chapeaUj un B AinT per sonnage J etc. ' 434. (2.) Plural Adjectives generally unite harmo- niously with substantives beginning with a vowel ; as, BRiLLANTS otours. It is the same with the Adjectives which, although singular, terminate with an x which is pronounced like a 2 / as, iieureux artificey etc. (See Remark 5th, p. 227.) EXERCISE CLXV. Have you seen the beautiful lake of Geneva? — The Loire lac m. Geneve is a fine river. — You arrive at a good moment. — The Turks riviere f. le m. Turc make a great use of opium. — The big fishes eat the usagem. gros poissonm. f It is Qiily when les is an article, that the contraction or de les into des takea place. Tlie same rule applies to de le, and to d k, i Its. He C He n PLACK OF ADJECTIVES. 225 lirda \iseau tn. »ddres8. \drcssef. leu who ilour "( or ibsolute I absolu in, and er, ac- it may ncralJy N. grand^ 'e say, «w, un larmo- '1 , as, 'ectives ich is Loire Furks Turc li the * takes little ones. — What a holy man father Bernard is I— •* • aaint que art. * He is an old soldier. —My dear friend, you are miHtaken C vieux cher se mdprendre He is in continual alarms That child has fine eyes. // dans de alar me f. 132 ADJECTIVES Wmcn ARE PLACED ArTEU TnE NOUN. 435. The Adjectives which arc placed after the sub- stantive are : — Istj Adjectives which express names of nations ; as, Le gouvernement AiiGLAi8f the English government; Lare'vo- lution FRAN9AISE, the French revolution. Kemark. — When the name of a nation is an adjective, it docs not require a capital letter in French, but it takes one if it be a substantive. So we write; La nation frangaise, anglaise, espagnoh^ italienne, alle- mande. And, with a capital, un Anglaia (an Englishman), un Eajiagnol (a Spaniard), etc. — (Acad.) EXERCISE CLXVI. English bravery ; Spanish gravity ; Italian policy ; Roman bravouref. f. politique i. beauty; Oerman music; Dutch manners; Prussian f. hollandais mccurs f. pi. prussien troops; Swedish soldiers; Chinese ceremonies. — The French troupe {. su6dois soldat chinois f. monarchy be^an under Pharamond, in the year 420. — That monarchic f. ina-3 en I' an young Oerman requests you to inscribe your name in his prier d* inscrire sur album Paul spoke to them in the Hebrew tongue I have m. 86 en * h^bra/ique seen Moscow with its Chinese pagodas, its Italian terraces, and Moscou pagode f. terrasse f. its Dutch farms. — Nothing stops the Russian coachman, his fermef. n* russe cocher driving is a steeple chase; ditch, hillock, overturned tree, course f. course au clocher fossi terfre ^enverse ^ he leaps over everything. — Long live the Irish nation ! franchir tout, 335 irlandais - — f. p 226 PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. I 436. 2dly^ Adjectives denoting colour are placed after the noun; as, un habit noir, a black coat; une robe BLANCHE, a white dress ; un ruhan bleu, a blue ribbon. In poetry, and in a figurative sense, Noir may be placed before the CTibstantive ; as, un noir attentat^ a black crime. Some compound words, as, rouge-gorge, a Robin-ftdbreast ; du hlanc-manger, blancmange, can scarcely be considered as exceptions to this rule. EXERCISE CLXVII She has blue eyes. — The Spanish soldiers wear a red art. porter cockade (Here is) a beautiful statue of white marble cocarde f. Voici f. blanc marhre m. The marigold is a yellow flower. — Saddle my black horse ^I soudm. jaune iSeller shall put on my brown coat, and my American boots mettre * bran americain bottef. Almost all the trees of Florida, particularly the arbre m. art. Floride f. en particulier cedar and the green oak, are covered with a, white moss. cedrem. vert chine m. d' mousse f. 437. Sdly, Adjectives formed from the present participle of verbs, are generally placed after the substantive ; as, Un ouvrage divertissant. La mode r£gnante. An entertaining worh. 2^he reigning fashion. 438. But, Adjectives formed from the past participle are always placed after the substantive ; as, Un homme instruit. Une figure arrondie. A well-informed man. A round Jigure. EXERCISE CLXVIII. . (That is) an amusing book. — The smiling images of Voild riant f. Theocritus, Virgil, and Gessner, excite in the soul a gentle Theocrite t t porter doux feeling". — There are striking examples of English tensibihtet des frappant t Bee Note to Kulc VTL p. 200. d after ne robe bbon. efore the ast ; du ptions to r a red er rble. —. rbre m. )rse ^I oots. — . ottef. rly the titer moss. otissef. :ticiple I as, tlciplo •es of -f. gentle doux iglish PLACE OP ADJECTIVES. 227 g-enerosity. — Orateful people are like those 78 f . art. reconnaisaant personnc f. ressemblent a fruitful lands which give more than they receive. — He has ^fertile *f. rendre ne made astonishing progress. — An affected simplicity is a des etonnant progres m.i^l. affecte f. 78 refined imposture. — She is a well-informed woman. ^delicat 1 f. C* 439. 4:thli/j Adjectives are placed after the substantive, when expressing some physical or natural quality, S'lch as chaudf hot ; froidj cold ; humide^ damp ; and when expressing form, as une table carree^ a square table. 440. 6thly^ Adjectives of several syllables seldom go well before substantives of one syllable ; so, instead of saying les champetres airs^ rural airs ; les imaginaires lois, imaginary laws, say les airs champetres^ les lois imaginaires. 441. ^thhj^ When two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, they are almost always placed after that noun. So, instead of adopting the English construction, ces deux rivales et guerrieres nations, those two rival and warlike nations, say : ces deux nations guerrieres et rivales, EXERCISS CLXIX. Will you give me some warm water? — Bring vuq some cold chaud milk. — Put it on the round table. — Never sleep in a damp lait m. rond covxker room. — 'Arts ^(are divided) into liberal Arts and mechanical art. on divise en m. mecanique Arts. — The king of Spain is styled the Catholic king. — She appeler catholique Elle has an harmonious voice. — She is a good and charitable woman. voix f. C — He is an amiable and virtuous man. Do you not know him ? — C vertueux 289 Denmark is, in general, an agreeable and fertile country. 376 pays to 22U PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 442. Finally, the placing of a great many Adjectives, before or after the substantive, holds so much to the genius of the French language, that from their being placed before or after, often depends the meaning of the substantive ; and usage dictates so imperiously the law, that b^ infringing it we "^vould not be understood. LIST OF adjectives which impart a different meaning to the noun, according as they arc placed before, or after it. Un bon homme, most fre- > u„ ^ommo bor, a good man, ({MeiiUy moans a simpleman. f -"«,«. y^^^ #/»««. Un brave homme, an ^^onesti^^^^^^^^^y^^^^^^^^^,^^^^ man. j Une commune voix, a unani- Une voix commune, a common mous voice. voice. Une fausse clef, a false key. Une clef fausse, a wrong "key. Une Juisse porte, a Pnya^^lune rorte fausse,a/a?5c dfoor. door. Un furieux menteur, a ter- Un fou furieux, afiirious mad- ribleliar. " man. ^maT'''^ ^'''°'"'''' "" S'^^^^jUn homme grand, a /aZZ man. Le grand air, nohle manners. L'air grand, a noble look. Une grosse femrae, a big stout Une ferame grosse, ."^ame as une woman. femme enceinte. Le liaut ton, an arrogant Le ton haut, a loud tone of manner. voice. Un .lonnete homme, an ho- Un homme honnete, a polite nest man. man. Des honnetes gens, respect- Des gens honnetes, polite able people. people. M&uxaia air J a vulgar appear- L'air mauvais, an ill-natured ance. look. Une m^cliante dpigramme, a Une dpigrarame m^chante, a bad epigram. wicked epigram. ^mfu"^ ^'"'' '"'''^ '^ ^*'^'^^}du bois mort, dead trees. Morte eau, ebb tides. • Eau mortc, still water. liC nouvcjiu vin, the wine IjO via nouveau, the wine newly newly come. made* PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 229 ectlves, to the \' being of the le law, Jording man. '6 man. 'ommon 7 ^6]/' e door, us mad. I man. J as une tone of '' polite polite latured nte, a newly He nouveaux li>Tes, others r^ v r ? books ^Deslivres nouveaux, new 5ooA*. ( Un habit nouvcau, a new- Un nouvel Habit, another coat. -< fashioned coat. (^Un habit neuf, a neio coat. ""UhZ^g^T"' " """'}Unhommepauvrc,«poor,«a«. Un plaisant homme, a whim- Vn homme phiisant, a pleasant sical ridiculous man. facetious man. Un plaisant personnage, a Un pcrsonnage plaisant, an contemptible person. am using person. Un plaisant conte, an unlikely Un conte plaisant, an amusing story. story. Un petit homme, a Utile man. Un homme petit, a mean man. Les propres termes, the exact Les termes propres, correct ex- words, pressions. Une ^^ge-femme, a midwife, {^''^onmn!^'' '''^^' "" ^''''^'^* Un seul homme, a single man. Un homme seul, a man alone. VrA^U^^,asinglepic- f t^^rT^,^^:^;^^ '^'^- I payable. ^Imman!^'^^' "" c?mfirree-|un homme vilain,a ^can man. on tiptoo to represent the flrrcai^ des p' EXERCISE CLXX. He opiined the presses with false keys. — As an actor md-3 armoiref. ds was walking marcher ind-2 le bout des pieds pour Agamemnon, they cried out to him that he was making him a on ind-3 * 86 tall man, and not a great man. — Bonaparte had a loud non pas ind-2 tone of voice. — He has (got on) a new-fashioned coat. — A lady, mis seeing Chapelaiu and Patru, said that the first was an author ind-3 ind-2 auteur tciihout geniuSy and the second a poor author. pauvre 230 COVERNMKNT OP ADJECTIVES. § III. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. One of the difficulties of the French language is to know what preposition must be used after an adjective, as the French prepositions are not always in this instance correlative to the English prepositions. 443. Adjectives which govern the preposition A. Adonnd ft, addicted to. ardent a, ardent in. bon ft, good for. cher ft, dear to. conforme ft, conformable to. ^gal ft, equal to. enclin ft, inclined to. lent ft, slow to, and in. nuisible ft, hurtful to. pareil ft, like. pr^t ft, ready to. prompt ft, prompt in, quick at> propreft, ;?^ for. semblable ft, similar to. sensible ft, sensible of. sourd ft, deaf to. sujet ft, subject to. utUe ft, useful to. And in general all adjectives denoting inclination^ habit, aptness, fitness. And, when followed by a verb, it is most commonly put in the present of the infinitive. - ■ EXERCISE CLXXI. Your intentions are conformable to my wishes He is slow d6sir m. to punish, and prompt in rewarding*. — Are you ready to go out ? recompen^er. sortir —He is fit for anything, — He is deaf to remonstrances tout. art. remontrancef. Sicily is subject to great earthquakes. — That man is useful Sicilef. tm. tremblement de terre. and dear to his family. — That is easy to say It is ridiculous families. Cela facile 11 ridicule to put oneself in a passion against objects which are insensible de sc^ en* colere %o'bjetm. of our anger. — Your dress is like mine. anger. colere. robe f. f Place of (8c, No. 88. t Rule V. No. Wl. « No. 8801 I GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 231 444. Adjectives which govern the preposition DE. exempt de, exempt from, fatigue de, fuigued with, heureux de, happy to. '""Tr™^ }incon5o?a6?€ at. inquiet (fc, uneasy about, libre de, free from, mdcontent de, dissatisfiedyfiili. plein de^ full of. satisfait cZe, satisfied with. sfir c?e, 5Mre of. Agrdablc de, aise 33. 8ft. 8fi» 234 EXEUCISE ON ADJKCTIVES 01' KUMBER. EXERCISE CLXXIV. One of the nine Musea is called Terpsichore. — It was in f. s'appeler Ce ind-3 the thirty-first year after the peace, that war (broke out again). annee f. paix f. se rallumer iiid-3 — William, surnaraed the Conqueror, king of En/^land and Ouillaumey surnomm6 Conquerantf duke of Normandy, was one of the giv'^atest generals of the ind-3 eleventh century. — Of ten thousand comtatants, there were Steele m. Sur conibattant il y en eid one thousand killed, and five hundred wounded. — The admirt\l * blcsse showed me a thousand civilities. — About eleven o'clock. faire * caresse § V. ADJECTIVES OF DIMENSION. 454. Adjectives of dimension, such as haut, high ; long, long; Zar^e, wide or broad ; epaiSj thick ; prq/bnc?, deep; which come after the word of measure in English, come before it in French, and are followed by the preposition de; as. A wall seven feet high. A room twenty feet long. Un mur haut de sept pieds. Une chambre longue i>e vingt pieds. Another construction, frequently used, is to let the words remain in French as in English, and to put de both before the number and before the word of measure or dimension. In this case, the substantive of " 1 as. A wall seven feet Ji'gh. A room twenty feet long. dimension is often used instead of the adjectivi Un mur de sept pieds de haut, or de hauteur. Une chambre dk vingt pieds DE long, or DE longueur. 455. The English manner of expressing dimension is to use the verb to be; but the French, in general, make use of the verb avoir. In this case, de is left out before the number, and the phrase is rendered thus : — Ce mur a sept pieds de haut, | That wall is seven feet high, or de hauteur. I EXERCISE ON ADJECTIVES OP DIMENSION. 235 of the EXERCISE CLXXV. The walls of Babylon were two hundred feet high and fifty Bahylone avaient t broad. — The great wall, on the north of China, is about largeur, muraille f. d Chine f. a environ twelve hundred miles long The hig-hest of the pyramids of t pyramide f. Eg-ypt 15, at least, five hundred feet high. — The Monument of a au moins f m. London is a round pillar two hundred feet high The Tiber irond pilier m. f is three hundred feet wide at Rome The famous mine of a t largeur f. Potosi, in Peru, is more than fifteen hundred feet deep. dansPeroum.a de t profondeur. § VI. ADJECTIVES IN THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE. 456. (1 .) By, after a comparative, is expressed by de ; as, II est plus grand de deux pouces. [ JJe is taller by two inches, 457. (2.) In English, when the adverbs more and lus are repeated to express a comparison, they are preceded by the article ; as, the more difficult a thing is, the moke glorious it is to do it welL But, in French, thp article is omitted; as, plus une chose tst difficile, plus il est glo" rieux de la bienfaire. § VII. ADJECTIVES IN THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 458. (1.) An adjective in the superlative degree go- verns the preposition de ; as, Le plus grand empire du monde. The greatest empire in the world. t See Remarks on Cent, p. 84. t See No. 489, p. 8S7. 236 ADJECTIVES IN THE SUrERLATIVE DEGREE. The most able men. 459. (2.) When the substantive precedes the superlative, both take the article ; but the substantive takes no article, if the superlative goes first ; as, Les gens les plus kabiles. ) Les plus habiles gens. j 460. (3.) The article placed before plus and moins is always invariable, when there is no comparison ; as, La lune nenous 'claire pas autaiitgue lesoleil, mimt quand elle est le plus briUante, The moon docs not light us so much as the sun, even when it shines brightest But the article takes gender and number, >vlicn tliere ia a comparison; as, La lum est la plus brillante de toutes les planites, The moon l8 the most brilliant of all the planets. EXERCISE CLXXVI. She is taller than her sister by the whole head. — The more * ^tout tetef. one reads La Fontaine, the more one admires him Seneca on Sonique was the richest man in the empire. — The highest mountains ind-2 ^ ^ moniagnef. are the reservoirs (from which) issue the largest rivers reservoir m. d'ou sortir grand fleuve m. Those whom 1 have always seen most struck with the writings Ceiix que vus frapper de £crit m. of Homer, Virgil, Horace, and Cicero, are minds of the first t t • t des esprit m. order. — Although the Chinese boast of being the most ancient Quoigue Chinois sevanter inf-1 * nation, they are far from being the most enlightened. * f. loin inf-1 tclair€ EXERCISE CLXXVII. That man is the best creature in the world. — That is the f. Voilh cleverest boy in the school. — His father is the most leanied habile savant man in the kingdom His mother is the most sensible wo- spirituel man in the whole town. — Her grandfather is the richest 92 merchant in London. — The more yon study, the more you n^gociant learn. — Astronomy is one of the sciences which does moat f. honour to the human mind. t See Note to Rule rii.. p. Ma SYNTAX OF PERSONAL rilONOUNS. 237 •lativc, :es no CHAPTER IV. OF PRONOUNS. § I. OF PERSONAI^ PRONOUNS. Place of Personal Pronouns. 4G1. The Personal Pronouns, whether subjects or ohJectSy are placed before the verb in simple tenses, and before the auxiliary in compound tenses; except, Is/, When the pronouns take a preposition before them in French ; 2dli/j In interrogative sentences ; Sdli/^ Wlien the verb is in the imperative affirmative (the third persons excepted). Such is the general principle of the position of personal pronouns, which will be fully developed in this chapter. (Sco what has already boen stated on this subject, p. 38.) OP PERSONAL PRONOUNS AS SUBJECTS. 462. (I.) The personal pronouns, /, thouy he or //, she or it J we J yoUj thet/j are expressed in French by Je, tUy ilj ellcj nouSj vom^ Us m., elles f., when they are the subjects or nominativco of the verb ; as, Je parle, I speak ; it chante, lie sings. Elle danse, slie dances; nous ] ouons, we plai/. 463. (II.) /, tkoUj he, they m. are rendered by moi, toi^ lui, eux: — 1st, Wlien used in answer to a question ; as. Qui a fait cela?— -Jfoi. | Who has done that f^l, 2d, When joined to a noun or pronoun by a con- junction, or when a verb has two or more pronouns as subjects; as, Mon frere ct moi. Lni et raoi. Vous. hn\ et moi, nous irons. ^fy hr other and 7. i/e and /. You, lie, and I ic'dl go. 238 SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 3i/, When they after come alter a comparative ; as, II eat plus rlche que lut, qu'ewx et mot. ( He is richer than he, tlicy, and I. Ath, When followed by the relatives qut\ que^ the adjective seul, or a present participle ; as, Moi QUI suis son AIs. Uux QUB j'aimais tant. Lui SEur. respecte la vertu. JCnx, VOYANT qu'ils avaient tort. I who am his son. They whom / loved so much. He alone respects virtue. They, seeing that they wet in the wrong. 5th^ When they mark opposition or distinction, ».»• point out the part taken in an action by different per- sons; as, Eux I'ont relev^, et mi I'a I They raised him up^ and ho pansd, I dressed his wounds. GtJi, When coming after these expressions, It is, it ivaSy it will bCj it would be^ or similar ones, whether in the affirmative, negative, or interrogative ; as, It is I, It is he, C'est moi. C'est lui. It is thou, C'est ioi. It is they, Ce sont eux, n. elles, f. EXERCISE CLXXVIII. / come from Dover. — You like the town, and / the Douvi'es. country. — Who read last ? - He. — /am not so tall campagne f. ind-4 le dernier fem. si grand as your sister, but she is older than /. — They alone have que dgi seul fought the enemy; they alone deserve to be rewarded. — combattre meriter d' recompense He, perceiving their intentions, gave up his project. — s apercevoir de f abandonner projet m. Your uncles and your brother take charge of the enterprise; se charger they find the money, and he will manage the work. — fournir fonds pi. conduire ind-7 travail m. Was it he that was singing? -No, it was /. ind-2 ce qui ind-2 c' ind-2 . t :\roflt words endl/ig in ion are alike In both languages. Sec p. 3& SYNTAX OP PERSONAL PIIONOUNS. i>30 464. (III.) Personal pronouns used as subjects^ nro placed after the verb, although no interrogation is meant: — I5/, When the verb is in the present or imperfect of the Subjunctive without any conjunction being expressed. In such a case, the final c of the first person is marked with an acute accent, for the sake of euphony; as, V\\\Bs6-je do mes yeux, &c. (Corneille.) May I with my eyes, &c. l)uBs6-je mourir! (Racink.) Were 1 to die! 2df When the verb is preceded by any of these i words, aussij peut-itre^ encore^ en vain^ dii vwinSj ait motnSy a peine; as, ' Peut-etre avez-vous raison. I Perhaps you are right. En vain pr^tenclons-7io««. | It is in vain that we pretend. "We might also say : Peut-etr vous avez raison; — rn vain nous pritendons^ but then tlio expression possesses neither the same grace, nor the same energy. Scf, In narrations, as in English : — Oh allez-vous ? lui dis^^'e. I Where are you going f said I to him. Jc le veux bien, lui r^pondit-tV. [ / am very vnlling, replied he to him. ^" Observe that in the foregoing examples a hyphen is put after the verb when followed by the pronoun its subject. EXERCISE CLXXIX. (Oh that I may) see himl — (Though you were) more Puisse-je Fussiez-vous numerou!?, you will meet with\ resistance. — This nombreux eprouver ind-7 32 lace is beautiful, (6m/ then) it is dear. — The rose is dentellef. aussi coHterf J f. the queen of flowers ; therefore it is the emblem of art. aussi emhlemem. arU beauty. — Perhaps I shall go.-^- You were hardly gone when Peut-etre ind-2 d peine partir que your brother arrived. — What would you have ? said he to me. ind-3 ind-1 * Life, replied I. — Scarcely had I arrived, art. repondre fus t See the 9d Remark, p. 87. t See the 2d Bemark, p. 23L 240 SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 465. IV. Personal pronouns, when subjects or nomina- tives, must be repeated : — Istj When we pass from negation to affirmation; ar>, Je ne plie pas et je romps (I do not bend and I break.) But we can say : Je plie et je ne romps pas, or je plie et ne romps paSj the first verb being in the affir- rrifltive. 2dj When the verbs are connected by any conjunction except et (and), ou (or), ni (nor), mais (but). Except in those two cases, the personal pronouns subjects, are either repeated or not, according as the harmony, energy, and especially the perspicuity of the phrase may require. EXERCISE CLXXX. Fou gain nothing ^ i\nd you spend (a great deal). — / gagner depenser heaucouj). (am not ignorant) that one cannot be happy without virtue, n'ignore pas on ne saurait art. and 1 (am firmly resolved) always to practise it. — We detest me propose bien de * a i the wicked, because we fear them.-i^^/Te is learned aZMoMflr/* mechantparce que craindre quoique he is very young. — I wish to see you happy, because I am subj-1 bien desirer * attached to you. — You will be truly esteemed, if you are wise attachi * vraiment and modest. — You are not happy, and you have saved Rome. modeste OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS AS OBJECTS. 466. A Personal pronoun, when the regiment or object of the verb, is either direct or indirect. A pronoun is the direct object of the verb, when it is governed by the verb without any preposition, either expressed or un- derstood ; as, Je la vois, I see her. But, when a pronoun is the indirect object, it is always preceded by d (to), or t Reoixen. The word or member of a sentence governed by a verb ; as, Evil communication corrupts good manners, where good niar.nert may be said to be the reglmoa, or part of the sentence governed by the verb corrupt$.-'W:'^ mal cL propos. rdcomperiser generously. — God is a father to those who love him, and a genereusement. le de ceux , le protector to those who fear him. — (As soon as) my sister 78 de craindre Des que (shall have) arrived, I will go and see her. — Vice often sera ind-7 * art. deceives us under the mask of virtue. — We sh«ill go and masque m. art. * see you after dinner. — Do you not see ihem f — Whoever apres diner. 112 flatters his masters betrays them I know it. tninttvo fffthtf OAt maitre trahir 265 468. (II.) When personal pronouns are the indirect objects of the verb, and governed by the preposition d (to), 2^2 SYNTAX OP PERSONAL PRONOUNS. understood, they are expressed by ?»«, te, luij in. and f ; wotM, votis, leur^ m. and f., and placed before the verb, in the same manner as v:hen they are the direct objects; as, She speaks to me. He gives him (t. e. to him), / will write to them. Elle me parle. II lui donne. Je leur ^crirai. 469. (III.) When the preposition ct is to be expressed before the pronouns, they are then rendered by moi, toi\ luiy elUy 7iouSj vouSy euXy elles, and placed after the verb. This happens only in the following cases : — Isty With the verbs allcr^ to go; courir and r>xouri)\ to run to ; marcher^ to walk ; penser and songer^ .0 think ; y«mV, to come ; viser^ to aim at ; Hre (in the sense of to belong) ; avoir ^ to have, used with the words affaire^ egardy rapport^ recours ; as. Votre frere vint a nous. Ce livre est a mot. J*aurai recours a eux. Tour brother came to us. This hook belongs to me. / will have recourse to them. 2c?, When a verb has two or more indirect regimens, and likewise with all reflected verbs; as. Je parle a lui et a elle. II s'adressa a moi. I speak to him and to her. Se applied to me. EXERCISE CLXXXII. Do you not speak to her, when you meet hei .-' — Few quand rencontrer Peu people are wise enough to prefer the blame that is useful de gens pour to them, to the praise which betrajs them. — They came to its louange f. trahtr when we (were not thinking") of them. — That horse was ne pensions pas a ind-2 formerly mtwc, but I sold it to your cousm. — If you don't autrefois d moi ind-4 l* behave better, you will have to do with me. — He speaks se conduire affaire ct to you and to him. — We trust to them She applied to him, sejier 470. (IV.) When a personal pronoun, used aa a direct i i» SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 245 md I . irb, in ts; as, :ouri)\ or Indirect object, ace ^npanies a verb in the imperative mood, in the first person plural, or in the second person singular or plural, it is put in French, as in English, im- mediately after the verb, and moij toiy are used instep d of witf, te. But, if a negation attends the imperative, the pronoun fellows the general rule, and is placed before the verb, and again mc, te^ are used. EXAMI'LrS. Affirmatively. Almons-fes, LeL us love them. Sauvez-woi, Save me. Dites-/u}, Tell him. Negatively. [them. Ne les aimr ns pas, Xet us no' love Ne ma sauvez pas. Don't save me. Ne lui dites pas, Don't tell him. 471. Remarks. — (1.) When two imperatives are joined by the conjunction et or om, and without a negative, it is considered more elegant to place the second pronoun before the verb ; as, Pclissez-/e sans cesse, et le Polish and repolish it con- repolissez. — {Boileau.) tinually. 472. (2.) When an imperative has two pronouns for regimens, one direct and the other indirect, the direct regimen is expressed first ; as. Donnez-le-moi. Pr6tez-le-lui. Give it me. Lend it to him. Negatively, we would say, Ne me le donnez pas; Ne U lui pretez pas. 473. (3.) When moi, toi^ are placed after the impera- tive, and followed by the pronoun tfw, they are changed into m\ V ; as, Donnez-m*en, Give me some. [ Eetourne-i'cn, Go hack. Note. — Observe again how a hyphen is introduced in the foregoing examples. The rale is thus laid down by Beuuzie and Firaud, When the first and second persons of the imperative have for complemetu (or regimen) one of these words: moi, toi^ nousj vous, le, la, lui, les, leur, en, y, they aro joined together by a hyphen, and a second hyphen is introduced when there are two of those words as complement of the imperative. Examples: — Donne^-mot, d6p6chons-nou8^ accoidex-lom leur, rendons-la-lui. But "weyfThe: faites-mol lui jparler, and not jfaites-moi-luiparler^ because lui is the regimen of parler, and not otfaites; venez me parler^ because me is not governed by venez, but by the infinitive /Jar/er. 244 SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONODNS» EXERCISE CLXXXm. ^Vhatever tlang (you have promised), give if. — 127 que vous ayez promise, Listen to me; do not condemn me without a hearing. — Ecouter ♦ condamner m'eniendre. Tell me the truth. — Bon*t speak to me Repeat to them vSritef. Repeter continually, that, without honesty, one can never succeed in sans cesse on riussir the >vor^'l Don't repeat to them the same things. — Take Prendre them, or leave them, it is (all one) to me My innocence laisser cela egal f. ia the only good that remains to me: leave it to me. seul oienm. qui 474. (V.) Personal pronouns, whether direct or indirect objects, are repeated, in French, before every verb ; as, II vous estime et vous honore. [ He esteems and honours you. Son visago odieiix r^'afflige et me poursuit. (Racine.) EXERCISE CLXXXIV. He beseeches and entreats me not to do it. — I say and prier conjurer de declare to you The idea that they believe him guilty, * penseef. on croire coupaole pursues, torments, and overwhelms him. — He wearies and poursuivre, tourmenter, accabler cnnuyer torments us incessantly. — A 'well brought up 'son never obseder sans cesse. bien elevS rebels against his father ; he loves, honours, and respects him. 86 rivolter respecter 475. (VI.) The pronouns it^ they^ them, which the English use with reference to animals and inanimuto things, are expressed in French by il, elle, ils, elles, when they are the subject or nominative of the verb, and by fe, Za, les, when they form the accusative or direct object of the verb. Be careful to make these pronouns agree in gender and number with the nouns to which they refer. It is almost ilYNTAX 0*" PERSONAL rRONOURS. 245 unnecessary to repeat that the French language has no neuter gender, consequently inanimate objects are either masculine or feminine ; so, in speaking of the 7'05«, wiiich is feminine, we say elle est helle^ it is beautiful ; and of a book, livrey which is masculine, vous a-t-ii, amus^ ? has it amused you ? 476. Remark. — When these pronouns come after a preposition, they are usually left out in French ; then the preposition becomes an adverb, and conveys the idea sufficiently ; as, -lam Approchez-vous du feu.— Je suis tout auprls. Come near the Jire.- quite near it. EXERCISE CLXXXV. "^ Look at that magnificent building ; ii unites grace Jiegardcr * magnifique bdtiment m. riunir art. grdce f. with beauty, and elegance with simplicity. — Whe*"^ d art. art. d art. is my pen ? It is upon ibe table. — Give it me. — Never plume f . sur judge from appearances, for they are often deceitful. — juger sur art. apparence f. car trompeur (There is) a good book, read it My house is new ; I will Voild maison f. neuf not sell tY; but I will let it — His cot was solitary; ind-7 louer ind-7 cahane f. ind-2 isoU near it flowed a spring of couler ind-2 source f. pure water. 1 477. (VII.) When to it^ to them, relate to inanimate things, they are expressed by y ; as. Ce tableau est tres-bon; mettez-T un cadre. That picture is very good; put a frame to it. But, when the pronouns it, them, are in the dative case, that is, used for to it, to them, and have reference to animals, plants, and ideal substances, in which we suppose an active principle, such as some virtues and vices, or are preceded by the verb to owe, or to be indebted. 246 SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. they are translated by lui for the singular, and letir for the plural ; as, That dog is hungry, give it some bread. These orange-trees will die, if you do not give them water. Ge chien a faim^ donnez-LUi du pain. Ces Grangers vont p^rir, si vous ne LEUB donnez point d'eau. (For the proper place of y, see N.B. p. 50.) EXERCISE CLXXXVI. I study botany, and apply myself seriously to art. botanique f. pron. s'appliquer serimsement it History and geography are his delight, he (gives himself up) 373 dilices'pX. se livre to them entirely. — I leave you the care of that goldfinch ; entierement. laiaser soinva, chardonneretm. do not forget to £;{\e it water ^When virtue appears in all oubiier de parattre dans its beauty, . we cannot refuse it our homage and respect ne pouvons refuser m. This book cost me (a gi*eat deal), but I (am indebted) to it for cofite cher dois * my knowledge. — Bring my horses, and give them some hay. instructionf. Amener foinm. 478. fVIII.) The pronoun le, which make*^ la for the feminine, and les for the plural of both genders, may supply the plice of a substantive, or an adjective, or even of a part of a sentence. When this pronoun supplies the place of a substantive or an adjective used substantively, it takes the gender and number of that substantive or adjective used sub- stantively. In such a case, the English equivalent is almost always understood. EXAMPLES. A Etes-vous madame de Genlis? — Are you madame de Genlisf — 1 Je ne In suis pas. Etes-vous la mere de cet enfant? — J Oui, je la suis. Etes-vous la malade ? — Je la suis. MesdameSjdtes-vousIesparentes de monsieur ?-.Oui, nous les sommes. am not. Are you the mother of that child f —Yes, I am. Are you the pacient f — / am. Ladies, are you the relations of this gentleman? — YeSf we an* SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 247 for T if to 'up) or EXERCISE CLXXXVII. Are you Dr Kitto's sister? Yes, I am.— Arc you Marshal sceur marichal m. Ncy's daughter? No, I am not.— Are you Lady Melville? Non Laayf Yes, I am. — Are you the mistress of this house ? I am.— y^re mattresse you the king's ministers ? We are.— Madam, are you the bride ? ministre marine Yes, I am.— Are those your gloves? Yes, they are. Give -ce Id gant m. ce them to me. — Are you my sister's dressmaker? I am. couturiere f. 479. (IX.) The pronoun le remains invariable, when it lias reference to a verb, an adjective, or a substantive used adjectively. The English equivalent, which is generally so or ilj is almost always understood. EXAMPLES. Madame, dtes-vousmalade? — Qui, monsieur, je ?6 suis. Etes-vous mire ?— Je le suis. Mesdemoiselles, Stes-vous prates? — Oui, nous le sommes. Madam, are you illf — Fes, Sir, I am. Are you a mother f — / am. Young ladies, are you ready f— Yes, we are. EXERCISE CLXXXVm. Madam, are you pleased with that speech? Yes, I am. — 444 discours m. Madam, are you married? Yes, I am.— Are you mistress of mariSe mattresse your actions? I am not. — ^Ladies, are you glad to have seen bien aise the little Princess? Yes, we are.— Have we ever been so princesse jamais quiet as we are ?— Do you know if they are rich ? No, tranquiUe que 265 riche they are not. — The poor will not always be so. pauvre pi. t Mot emprunM de ranglaia. On prononoe LMi^iAatd.) 243 SYKtAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. OP THE PRONOUNS fiC, SCt, (For tlio various meanings, scoNo 56.} 480. The pronoun se (s' before a vowel) is of both num- bers and genders ; it is always placed before the verb of which it is the regimen ; as il se connaity he knows himself; elle s' imagine, she fancies. Les yeux de ramiti(? 8e troinpent rarement. — VoLTAiiiE. 481. The pronoun soi is of both genders, and is gene- rally preceded hy a preposition, or by the conjunction qve. — VvTien appliad to persons, it is employed only in a vague and indeterminate sense; as, II frd prendre garde a SOI, it is necessary to take care of oneself. EXERCISL CLXXXIX. They lost themseUes in the wood. — This flower is fading". s'egarer ind-3 fleur f. sefletrir These trees are dying. — A good deed carries its reward se 'mourir hienfait m. 'porter r^ompenst f. with itself. — ^Frankness is good of itself, but it has its excesses. avec franchise^. de excesm. When a man loves nobody but himself, he is not fit for Quand* on n* * que on propre society- — To be too much dissatisfied with ourselves is a * 444 soi weakness; but to be too much pleased with ourselves is a faiblessef. * 444 folly. — It always depends on ourselves to act honourably. sottisef. de d' RESPECTIVE P*.ACES OP THE PERSONAL PRONOLNS. 482. When a verb (the imperative affirmative excepted) governs two or more pronouns without a preposition, they are always placed before it, and before its auxiliary in compound tenses, in the following order : — me, te, se, nous, vous, le, la, les, lui, leur, en. before all others, before lui, leur, y, en, before y, en. before e\. is always the last. SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 249 mm- verb lows I- i 14 483. When the sentence is not interrogative, the pro- noun which is the subject of the verb is always placed at the head ; as, Vou3 ne me le conseillez pas. Je ne le lui dirais pas. Nous les en avertirons. Nous lui en parlerons. lis ne 8*y soumettront pas. You do not advise me so. I would not tell it liim. ]Ve shall warn them of it. We will speak to him about it. They will not submit to it. 484. In an imperative sentence, when affirmative, Ze, la^ lesj are always placed first ; as, donnez-le-moi^ give it me. Moi is placed after y; as, menez-y-moi^ take me thither : but nous must precede y; as, menez-nous-y^ take us thither. EXERCISE CXC. Do not say to a friend, who asks something: of you: Go, Bce p. 211 * and come again to-morrow, and I \;'ill give it you ; when you revenir demain • lorsque can give it him immediately. — It is certain that old pouvoir lui sur-le-champ. art. G^ronte has refused his daughter to Valere ; but because he parce qu' does not give her to hinif (it does not follow) that he will give il ne s'ensuit pas her to you. — I will give you some. — I have a letter for you. en letire f. pour Your brother has sent it me to bring it you. Give it me. envoyee pour § n. OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Under this head we shall place the possessive ADJECTIVES, as we have already done, page 42. 485. Possessive adjectives agree in gender and num- ber with the noun to which they are joined. 486. They are repeated before every noun of the game sentence ; as, mon pere, ma mcre^f et mes frerei sont venus^ my father, mother, and brothers have come. t Me$ pire et mire, tespdre et mire, instead of mon pin et ma mire, sonpire ei $a mire, are phrases extremely incorrect, and thougli used by many people, are moat certainly contrary to the principles of the French language, and are con- demned by Vcmgelas, WaiUy, by the modern Grammarians, and fliially by the french Academy. 250 STNTAX OF POSSESSIVK ADJECTIVES. 487. Possessive adjedivfis arc repeated also before the adjectives tliat do not qiialiiy the same noun; as, mon grand et MON petit apparteinent, which is equivalent to mon grand APPARTEMENT et moH petit appartemcnt. But I would say : Mon grand et bel appartementj without repeating moHf were I speaking of an apartment both large and beautiful. (See wlmt la said npon tho repetition of the Article, p. 200 nnd 201.) EXERCISE CXCI. Cyrus knew all the soldiers of his army, and could soldat .03 arm^e f. pouvoir ind-2 ind-2 designate them by their names.— 'Four 'thing's ^(are required) designer nom m. on demande of a woman: that virtue (should dwell) in her heart; that d femme que 371 hahite dans modesty (should shine) on her forehefidt that gentleness 371 bi'ille front m. 37! douceur f. (should flow) from her lips, and that work (should occupy) dScoule Uvref. B7i travailm. occupe her hands. — Her father and mother are dead — My uncle and 235 aunt are in Paris. — He (showed him) both his fine and Uffly tante lui a montre * beau r»/m?w dresses. — He showed him his beautiful and rich dresses. habits m. 488. The French make use of the article, and not of the possessive adjective, when the sense clearly points out who is the possessor ; as, .T'ai n^al A la t^te. I'lfciio a re^u un coup de feu au bras droit. I have a pain in my Tiead. Peter lias received a shot in his right arm. As there can be no doubt as to whose head is aching, and whose arm has received the shot, tho French deem tho article sufficient. But, to avoid ambiguity, I must say, Je vois que mon bras enfle. I / see my arm is swelling. Pierre a perdu son argent. | Peter has lost his money. Because, were I to say, Je vois que le bras enflt; < StNTA ' OF POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. S51 c tho frand irand k^ould ating and i Pierre a perdu h'argenty one would not know whether it is my arm or that of another that I see swelling ; or, whether it is his own money or John's that Peter has lost. The possessive adjective is also used in speaking of an habitual complaint known to the person spoken t^ ; as, Ma migraine m'a repris. Sa goutte le tourmente. 3/y headache has returned. Ins gout torments him. Reflected verbs generally remove all ambiguity ; as, Je me suis blessd & la. main. Je me lave les mains. / have hurt my hand. I wash my handa. The use of the possessive adjective would here be an error ; custom, however, authorizes a few familiar expressions in which the posscssivo seems to be redundant ; as, Je me suis tenu toute la Journie sub uxa jAMBES ; — il se tieniferme suR ses pieds. 489. The French use the article, not the possessive adjective, before a noun forming the regimen, when a personal pronoun, which is the indirect regimen, suffi- ciently supplies the place of the possessive ; as, Vous LUi avez cass^ le bras. Vous MP blessez la main. You have broken his arm. You hurt my hand. EXERCISE CXCII. Of all 'living" ^cre»'^Mre8, man is the only one who (has not) Bxi.vivant f. aeul * n'aitpat his face turned towards the earth ; lie walks with his eyes — f. tournS vers marcher * m. directed towards heaven, as if to indicate the superiority dirig6 art. del m.comme pour indiquer of Ilia origin. — My gout does not allow me a moment's repose. son laisser repos. —You will cut your fing-er. — A cannon-ball se couper dotgt m. boulet de canon m. lui carried off his arm Our carrieg-e passed over his emporter ind-3 voiture f. lui ind-3 sur body, and bruised his right shoulder. corps m. lui meurtrir ind-3 ^droit Hpaule f. 252 SYNTAX OF POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 490. When its or their relate to inanimate objects, they arc expressed by son, sa^ ses^ kur^ or leurs : — Istj When the possessor, substantive or pronoun, is expressed, as the subject, in the same member of a sen- tence; as, Londrcs a ses bcautds. | London has its beauties, 2dy When preceded by any preposition whatever ; as, J 'admire la largeur de scs nies. | / admire the width op its streets. Sdj When joined to a noun qualified by an adjective, unless the noun form the regimen ; as. Ses bfitiments r€(iuliers plaisent au premier coup d'ocil. Ita regular buildings plcaw at first sight. Athj When joined to the subject of the verb, the latter is, or may be, followed in French by the preposition dc; as, Son commerce produit D'im- menses ressources. Its trade produces immense re- sources. On all other occasions, its and their are expressed by fw, before the verb, and by the article before the noun, So, still speaking of London, I would say : La situation en est trds-com- I Its situation is very convenient mode pour le commerce. | for trade. EXERCISE CXCIII. ^' A new custom was a phenomenon in Egypt : (for which coutume f. ind-2 prodige m. en aussi reason) (there never was) a people that preserved so long n'y eut-il jamais de conserver subj-3 its laws, and even its ceremonies. — The pyramids of Egypt pyramide f. astonish, both by the enormity of their bulk, and by the egalement et masse justness of their proportions. — The Thames is a magnificent justesse f. superbe river : its cliannel is so wide ana so deep below London- lit m. large au-dessous de bridge, that several thousand vessels lie at their ease in it. millier de itre V 109 \ I SYNTAX OF POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 253 i, they 491. Remarks. — 1. A fnend of mine ; a booko/i/oiirs, are turned in this manner in French, unde mes amis; un de vos Uvrea. As if it were, one of my friends, one of your books ; and so on with all other phrases of the same kind. 2. Mine^ thine^ hisy herSy ours, yours, theirs, used with the verb to be, in the sense of to belong, arc expressed, in French, by a moi, a tot, a lui, a elle, a nous, a vous, a eux, m., h elles, f. ; as, this book is mine, ce livre est k MOI ; that watch is hers, cette montre est A elle. 3. The fonns my brother's, your sister's, etc. are also rendered by a mon frere, a votre sceur. 4. In speaking to a person of his relations or friends, we generally put monsieur, madame, mademoiselle, mes- sieurs, mesdames, mesdemoiselles, before the possessive adjectives ; as, / met your father. How does your mother do f J'ai rencontr^ monsieur votre p^re. Comment se porte madame votre mfere ? But this is a mere form of politeness, and has nothing to do with the rules of grammar. "^^ EXERCISE CXCrV. Ills mother is an old acquaintance of ours. -^ ancienne connaissance f. That gentleman is a relation of mine. — I am going to monsieur parent • dine with an aunt of his A sister of hers is dead. — Is this tanie 161 house yours or his? It is not mine. It is my uncle's or oncle my mother* s. - Is your sister in town? — No, she is in 161 en a the country, with a cousin of mine. — These keys are Aw or f . clef f. kera.—Thej are not mine, they are my father's or my mother's. 254 SYI7TAX OP DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. § ni. OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 492. Ce before etre^ requires this verb to be in the singular, except when it is followed by the third person plural. So we say, O'est moi, c'est Zmi, c'est nous^ c'est vous. But we must say, Ge sont, c'^taient, ce furent, ce seront eux^ elles^ les parents^ qui, etc. Such is the rule of the best grammarians. With the third person plural, however, some re.<*pectable authors use the verb etrey sometimes iu the plural, and sometimes in the singular. 493. Ce is often used instead of «7, elle^ Us, elks, in re- ference to a person or thing mentioned before. Ce is preferred when the verb etre is followed by a substantive, accompanied by the article, or the adjective un; as, Lisez Homere et Yirgile ; ce sont LES plus grands poIites de I'an- tiqnitc. C'est JIN Cesar. C'est un Cicdron. Bead Homer and Virgil; they are the best poets of antiquity. He is a Coesar. He is a Cicero. But, when the verb etre is followed by an adjective without a noun, or by a noun taken adjectively, i7, eUe^ Us, elles, must be used ; as. Lisez D^mosth'^ne et Cicdron ; ils SONT tieo eloquents. J'ai vu le Louvre; il est magni- Jique^ et digne d'une grande nation. Bead Demosthenes and Cicero; they are very eloquent, I Jiave seen the Jjouvre; it is beauti/ulf and worthy oj a great nation. EXERCISE CXCV. It "'s we who have restored tranqnilUty It is you, bravo retablir soldiers, who fought gloriously. — It was the Egyptians soldat comhattrem^A ind-3 Egyptiens who first observed the course of the stars, regulated les premiers ind-3 coursm. astreva.. regler the year, and invented arithmetic Read attentively Plato ann^e f. Lire and Cicjro; they are the two philosophers of antiquity, who philosophe have given us '(the most sound and luminous) Mdeas upon art. sain liimineux idie f. morality. — I have seen the city of Edinburgh ; it is beautiful, morale f, viliet. BfNTAX OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 255 n the )erson c'est TRENT, person netimes m rc- Ce is intivc, Ij they iquity. Cicero. ectivo /, elle^ Cicero; ; it is a great ^ bravo ptians ptiens ulated igler Plato , who upon Hful Ce qui m'attaclie h, la vie, c'est vous. Cs que je d6sire le plus, c'est d'aller vous voir. 494. Ce qui^ as the subject, and ce que^ as the object, are mrch used in the se'ise oiwhat^ that whichj that thing which. When ce qui or ce que begin a sentence of two parts, ce must be repeated in the second part of the sentence, if it begins with the verb Sire; as. What keeps me attached to life, 18 you. What / wish viost^ is to come and see you. The repctiticn of ce is not indispensable when the verb itre is followed by a substantive singular. Thus, we may say, Ce qui me qui The prince to Avhose patronage I ou DUQUEL je dois ma fortune. owe my fortune. From whom is rcnd'jred by de qui, and not by dont, 504. N,B. Dont can only be used when the antecedent is expressed ; for, in the beginning of an interrogative phrase, of whom would be rendered by de qui, and oj which by duquel, de laquelle ; as, De qui parlez-vous ? Of wliom do you speak f Duquel vous plaignez-vous ? Of which do you complain? 260 SYNTAX OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 505. Whose, used without refennce to a noun ex- pressed before, implies the word person understood. If it can be changed into of whorrij it is expressed by de qui; as, De qui dtes-vous fils? Whose son are you? i. e. of whom are you the son f If WHOSE can be changed into to whorrij it is expressed hy a qi'^'; as. Whose hat is this 9 i. e. to whom does this hat belong f A qui est ce chapeau? EXERCISS CCI. There is the gentleman wAose horse has won the race. — Voilci monsieur gagner prixde la course. He is a man of whom I have a good opinion.— The lady of whom C* * dame you are speaking is gone. — Here is the book of which you ind-1 partir Void made me a present. — The daughter of Minos gave a thread to iud-4 * present. md-3 film., Theseus, (by means) o/u^AtcA he got out of the labyrmth. — Thisee au moyen sortir ind-3 lahyrinthe m. The people from whom you expect so many services deceive gens attendre iantde trompcr you. — Whose daughter is she? — Whose house is that? 506. When the pronouns whom or avhich come after any preposition (except q/*), whom is expressed by quiy and which by lequel^ laquelle^ lesquels^ lesquelles ; as, Le monsieur a qui j'ecris est tres liche. II y a un Dieu, par jui tout est gouvcrn^. Le chevrtl sur lequel il est. La disposition dans laquklle il est. Le bonheur api-^s lequel j 'aspire. The gentleman to whom I write is very rich. There is a Ood, by whom all things are governed. The horse on which he is. The disposition in which he is. The happiness after which I aspire. It follows from the foregoing rule, that qui, preceded by a preposition, is never said of things, but only of persons. So, we can say : La per~ Sonne k qui fai donni ma confiance ; but we cannot say : Les sciencfs k qui je m' applique. We must say : Les sciences auxquellesje nC ap- plique. "» SYNTAX OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 261 ex- by EXERCISE ecu. The man, for whom you speak, is gone to Paris He is a aller C friend in whom I put my confidence. — There are two things en mettre confiance f. y avoir to which we must (accustom ourselves) under pain of finding falloir s'accoutumer peine inf-1 life insupportable: the injuries of time and the injustices of injure f. men Regulus, in his expedition against Carthage, had to Regulus ind-3 combat a prodigious serpent, against which it was necessary combattre m. falloir hid-3 to employ *the ^ whole Roman army. ir § V. OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.-See p. 61. 507. The pronoun on is generally followed by a masculine singular; as, On n'est pas toujours heurbux. | People are not always fortunate. Yet, when it is quite evident that a female is spoken of, on should be followed by a feminine singular; as, On n'est pas toujours jeune et I A woman cannot be always young JOLIE. — (^Acad.) I and pretty. On may likewise be followed by an adjective or sub- stantive pluralj when the sense clearly indicates that this pronoun relates to several persons : the verb, however, remains singular; as, On se battit en disespdris. \ They f ought like desperate men. Ici ON est €(jaux. {Inscription sur la porte d'un dmetihe.) 508. On must be repeated before every verb of which it is the subject or nominative ; as. Th&y praise, th.eaten, and caress him ; hut whatever they do, they cannot master him. On le loue, on le menace, on le caresse; mais, quoi que I'on fasse, ON ne pout en ^^-enir a bout. N. D. — When they is used with reference to a plural noun expressed before, it is ren'lered in French by ils or elles, and not by on. 1^ Observe also, that although on frequently represients we, thet, PEOPLE, which are all of the plural number, yet Ci is always followed by a verb in the third person singular. 2Gt^ SYNTAX OV INDEPINITK PHONOUNS. 509. The English have an indefinite manner of ex- pressing themselves, by means of the indejinite pronoun it, which the French express by on, at the same time chang- ing the verb from the passive into the active sense ; as, On (lit. On pcnso. ONrapporte. | It is said. It is thought. It is reported. 510. On is much used in French as tlie subject of an arfivc verb, when thf nassi" v. ice is rsed in English, feo, instead of t-yuig a. th>: Ligiish: 1 am deceived; — 1 have been told; the Frbrch hay: On me trompe; — On m*a dit; as if it were, 2'hey u : eive r »; — They have told me. 511. Chacun, each^ every one. This pronoun is always singular, but when preceded by a plural, it is sometimes followed by son^ sa, seSj and sometimes by leur^ leurs. Chacun takes sow, sa, ses^ when it is placed after the direct regimen, or when the verb has no regimen of that nature ; as, They have brought their offerings^ every one according to his means. The two kings have retired^ each to his tent. They voted, eacli in his turn. lis ont apportd leurs offrandes, chacun scion ses moyens. Les deux rois se sont retir s ibjcct, it is put in the plural ; as, Mon fr^re et lui parlent fraiigais. | My brother and he speak ^ ..:h. And, should the subjects be of different persons, the verb must agree with the first person in preference to the other two, and with the second rather than with the third. In this case, the pronoun nous (not expressed in ' English) is generalb/] placed before the verb, if one of the subjects is in the first person; and, the pronoun vows f if the second person is used with the third^ without ^ first person; as. You and 7, have done our duty. I have heard that you and your brother were soon to set out. Vous et moi, nous avons fait uotre devoir. (^Acad.) J'ai appria que vous et votro frfire vous partiez bientot. ( Ibid.) t Observe, I say generally , and not always, as most grammarians do ; for nous or vous may sometimes be understood, as in this sentence oi Fcn6lon: Narbal et moi admirions la bonte des dieux. Narbal and I were admiring the goodness of the gods. EXERCISE CCIV. 'Riches ^often attract friends, and poverty keeps them richesses\A. attirer art. eloigner away Religion watches oyer 'secret ^crimes ; the laws watch * f. veiller m. 264 AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. over 'public '< rimes. —Virgil, Horace, and Tibullus were friends. TibuUe ind-2 —lie and she will go to the country with my father — . campagne f. You, your cousin, and I, have each a 'different ^opinion 114 f. You and he shall accompany me to the botanical garden. accompagner EXCEPTION. 514. When two subjects singular are joined by the conjunction ou (or, cither), the verb is put in the singular ; as, Jean ou Jacques le pera. | John or James will do it. When, liowevrer, the words joined by on are of different persons, usage requires the verb to be in the plural, and that it should agree with the person that has priority, that is, with the first person rather than with the other two, and with the second rather than with the third ; as, Vous ou ir * ''ARLERONS. You or I shall speak. Vcus ou voire frrre viendrkz. You or your brother will come. REMARKS. 515. (1.) As the words Vun et V autre (both) express plurality, the verb should be put in the plural ; as, L'un et I'autre sont venus. | Both are come. L'un et I'autre ont promts. — (Racine.) L'un et I'autre ont le cerveau trouble. — {Boileau.) 516. (2.) Ni Vun ni V autre (neither, neither the one nor the other), and all subjects joined together by ni repeated, require also the verb in the plural ; as, J'ai lu V03 deux discours : ni l'un I have read your two speeches: vei- ni I'autre ne sont bons. iher ike one nor the other is good. Ni Tor ni la grandeur ne nous rendent heureux. — (La Fontaine.") Exception. — When one of the words united by ni can alone perform the action expressed by the verb, the verb is then put in the singular ; as, Ni l'un NI I'autre n'oBXiENDRA le prix. Ni M. le Due, ni M. le Comle ne SERA nommd ambassadeui & Saint-P^tersbourg. Neither the one nor the other will obtain the prize. Neither the Duke nor the Count will he appointed ambassador to St.-Petersburg. Observe that iV», and Ni Vun ni I'autre take ne before a verb. AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 265 EXERCISE CCV. It was cither Viit or Fox Yfho said that— Either mildness, C" ind 1 * md-4 douceur f. or force will do it.— I have seen A. and B., either the one or the _f. 273 other will write to you It was e'iher he or I that did that. — ind-7 ind-1 * ind-4 I send you my two servantb, both are honest. — Neither hat domestique honnUe done his duty Neither of them shall marry my daughter. devoir m. * • epouser 517. We have already seen (page 17) that there are two sorts of collective nouns : the collective general^ and the collective partitive. — The collective general arc those which express the totality of the persons or tilings of which we speak; as, VarmSc, the army; la foide^ the crowd ; or a determinate number of those same persons or things ; as, la moitii, the lialf. — The collective partitive arc those which express only a partial number ; as, une quantite'y a quantity, une foule^ a crowd. La troupe de volcurs s^esl introduite^ the gang of thieves got in : — U.ie troupe de voleurs se sont introduiti^ a gang of thieves got in. In the first sentence troupe is a collective general; in the second it is a collective partitive. 518. Rule I. When a collect im general is followed by the preposition de (of) and a noun, the adjective, pronoun, participle, and verb, agree with the collective general; as, The army of the infidels was en- tirely destroyed. He hasfurnisfied the number of copies agreed upon. L'armee des inCdbles fut entifere- raent ddtruite. II a fourni lk nombre d'exem- plaires convenu.— {Acad.^ 519. Rule II. Wlien a collective partitive is followed by the preposition de (of) and a noun, the adjective, pro- noun, participle, and verb, agree with the /asf «ottr?,bccausQ 2GG AGREEMENT OP THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. it expresses the principal idea, and more particularly fixes the attention ; as, Mont people believe it. Most men think so. A great many enemies appeared . He found a part of the apricots eaten, a part of the liquors drunk. La plupart du monde le OROIT. La plupart dcs homines lo PENSENT. Un grand NOMBRE d'cnncmis PARURENT. 11 trouva UNE PARTIE des abricots viangesy une pa rtie des liqueurs SUES. 520. Observations. — (1.) Adverbs of quantity, as;7CM, few ; beaucoupf many ; assez^ enough ; plus^ more ; trop^ too many, etc. are considered as collectives partitive. Consequently we write : — Pcu de gens neglige7it leurs intdrdts. Bcaucoup de monde itait i la promenade. Few people neglect their in- terests. Many people were walking. 521. (2.) Peu, beaucoup, and la plupart^ used by themselves, require the verb in the plural ; as. The senate was divided, the majo- rity wished... Lc sdnat fut partagd, la plupart VOULAIENTque... The noun wliich here regulates the agreement of the verb is understood : La plupart des s^nateurs voulaient qucj etc.; the majority of the senators wished... >< EXERCISE CCVI. It was with James the First, that began that series of C ind-1 d 395 que ind-1 chaine f. misfortunes wliich pave to the house of Stuart the title of malheur md-4 titreva.. unfortunate. — A troop of nymphs, crowned with flowers, infortun'e troupe i. nymphef. de swam behind her car Few men reason, and all wish to iud-2 derriere char m. raisonner vouloir * decide. — Most were of that opinion. — An infinite number of ind-3 avis m. birds made those groves resound with their sweet songs. * * ^ de chant m.B Ilarly ared. moots ^iquors peuj trop^ [itive. m- AnUEEMENt Of tItE VERU AVITII ITS SUnJECT. 2G7 Addttionnl Remarks upon the General Hide, 522. (1.) When tlio words forming the subject arc Bynonymous, the verb agrees, in French, with the hiot noun ; as, Son courage, son intr<^piditd 6tonne les plus braves. — {Domergue.) (pBT Synonymous nouns must never be joined, in French, by the conjunction tt, 523. (2.) The verb agrees also with the last noun only, although the nouns be not synonymous, if we dwell more upon the last than upon the others, cither because it explains the preceding nouns — is more energetic, or is of such moment that the others arc forgotten; as, Le fer, le bandeau, la flamme est toute prfite. — (Riicinc.') Le Pdrou, le Potose, Alzire est sa conqufite. — ( Voltaire.) 521. (3.) The verb is put in the singular, although preceded by plurals, when there is an expression which sums up all the nouns int<^ one, such as tout^ rien^ per- sonne^ nul, chacun; or when th(> conjunction mats is placed before the last noun, and this noun is in the singular; as, Paroles et regards, tout est charme dans vous. — {La Fontaine.) Crainte, p<5rils, ricn no m'A re- ten u. — ( Racine.) Nonseulement toutes ses richesscs, mais toute sa vertu s*€vanouit. Words and looks, everything is a charm in you. Neither fear nor dangers, nothing could restrain me. Not oidy all his riches^ but aJl his virtue vanished. 525. (4.) When two subjects are joined by the follow- ing and similar conjunctions, comme^ de meme que^ ainsi giie, aussi bien que., tlic verb agrees with the first subject, the second beiii, the subject of a verb understood ; as. Cot to bataille, comme tant d'autres, no dicida de rien.— Voltaire.) Aristophane, nussi bien que M6- nandre, charmait les Grccs. It is as if it were : That battle, like so many others^ decided nothing. Aristophanes, as well as Menan- der^ delighted the Greeks, Cette bataille ne ddcida de rien, comme tant d'autres batallles nfj i4- cidferent de rien. Aristophane charmait les Grecs, aussi bien que Me'nandre charm kit les Grecs. 268 PLACE OF THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB. EXERCISE CCVII. Vanity, says Pascal, is so rooted in tke 'human ^heart, that ancH de Vhommt a scullion, a porter even hoasts, and wishes to have marmiton ciocheteur • se vanter vouloir • his admirers. — Games, conversation, shows, nothing admirateur 404 jeu spectacle diverts her. — The strength of the mind, like that of the ne distraire force f. dme f. body, is the fruit of temperance. — Alcibiades, as well as art. Alcibiade Plato, was among the disciples of Socrates. au nombre de § II. PLACE OF THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB. 526. Rule. — Tho subject or nominative is generally placed he/ore the verb, in French, as in English ; as, Le maitre enseigne, et VicoUer apprend. Nous irons vous voir. The master teaches^ and the scholar learns. We shall come and see you. 527. Thcro are a few cases in which the subject is placed after the verb ; they are the following : — Is^, When, in any interrogative sentence, the subject Is a pronoun ; as, Quand-viendra-t-e//e f \ When will she come t But if, in asking a question, the subject of the verb is a nouny the noun is placed before the verb ; and to show that a question is asked, one of the pronouns, e7, elle^ ils^ elles^ is placed immediately after the verb ; as, Votre yrrrc parle-t-il/7\infai5 f Vos soeurs ^onUelles arrivdes ? Does your brother speak French t Have your sisters arrived ? Itemark. — When an interrogative sentence begins with que^ a qvoi, oUy wo generally place the noun subject after the verb, without adding a pronoun to it ; as, Que fait votre frere ? A quoi s'occupe votre soeur ? Om demeure votre oncle ? What is your brother doing f What is your sister busy with f Where does your uncle live f (See the JPtcUminary Bemarks on Interrogation, p. ST.) ..-■«A' >^.. .»• PLAC" OF THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB. 269 2dj When, as in English, we quote the words of another person ; as, Que feraije ? dit TeMmaque. \ What shall I dof said Telemachus. 3rf, When the subjunctive mood is used without any conjunction being expressed ; as. Heaven grant you may he happy I Fasse le ciel que vous soyez bcurcux ! Dussi-JE y pdrir, j'irai. Should I perish there, I will go. This turn of expression has more vivacity than if we had said : Je touhaite que le cielfaase que vous soyez heureux. Quoique Je dusse y pkrir^ firai. A.thy When the sentence begins with a unipersonal (or impersonal) verb, or with one of these words, ainsi, thus^ so ; TEL, such ; as. 11 est arrivk d'beureux change ments. Ainsi finit cette trag^die. Tel fut le rdsultat de sa folie. Ilappy changes have taken place. Thus ended that tragedu. Such was the result o/his/oUy. (See Rule III, p. 239.) 5thj When the subject is followed by several words which are dependent upon it ; as in this phrase of Fenilon: — Li coulent mille ruisseaux qui dis- tribuent partout une eau claire. There flow a thousand rivulets thoA carry everywhere a clear water. This transposition of the subject is sometimes indis- pensable, and sometimes only the effect of taste. 8 EXERCISE CCVIII. The violet is the emblem of modesty Are they g-one ? violette f. embleme m. partir Does your cousin often come to see you ? — Is your ffovcmess vejiir English or French? — What will posterity think? — You are ind-7 avoir wrong, said her father to her. — May you succeed in your tort Pouvoir riussir projects ! — ^*(Great misfortunes) \have happened). — So goes the malheur m. world. — Such was his advice. — On one side was seen a river mondem. avism. D* on ind-2 '^from which) sprung islands lined with lime-trees in bloom. oil se former horde de tilleul jleuri 270 GOVERNMENT OP VERBS. § m. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 528. The object^ regimen^ or complemcui of a verb, is a word which completes the idea begun by the verb. 529. There are two sorts of regimens, the one called direct^ the other indirect, 530. The direct regimen denotes the immediate object of the action of the verb, without the help of any prepo- sition, and answers to the question quil (whom?) for persons, and quoi ? (what ?) for things ; as, J'aime mon pere^ I love my father. J'aimCj qui? mon peve. — II aime Ve'tude^ he likes study. // aime^ quoi? V etude. Monpere and V etude then are the direct regimens of the verb aimer^ since they complete, without the help of any preposition, the idea begun by the verb. 531. The indirect regimen completes, in an indirect manner, the idea begun by the verb ; that is, it completes it only by means of a preposition expressed or understood; it answers to the question a qui 1 de qui? pour qui ? par quiy etc., for persons ; and a quoi f pour quoi / de quoi ? etc., for things ; as, II parte a sonfrere, he speaks to his brother. II paide^ a qui ? a son frere. A son frere is then the indirect regimen ofparler^ and completes the action expressed by that verb, by means of the pre- position d, 532. The direct regimen corresponds to the accusative; the indirect regimen to the genitive^ dative^ or ablative of the Latin. ^_^, 533. Rule I. Wlicn a verb has two reguaens, the one direct and the other indirect, the shorter must be placed first; as, Les hypocrites parent U vice des dehors i« la vertu. Los hypocrites parent des dehors de fa vertu les vices les plus bonteux et les plus decries. Hypocrites deck vice with the ex- terior of virtue. Hypocrites deck with tlio»exterior of virtue the most shcuncfui and odious vices. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 2T1 534. Rule II. If the regimens are of equal length, the direct regimen imst be placed first ; as, L'arabition sacrifie le priser.t d Ambition sacrifices the present to I'avenir, mais la volupt^ sacri- the future,but pleasure sacrijices fie I'avenir au present. the future to the present. bjeet rej^o- for mon .—11 EXERCISE CCIX. He has sent a circular to all liis correspondents. — lie circulaire f. correspondant m. devotes his talents to the defence of ^public liberty Give consacrer pi. to study all the time that you can. — I delivered the letter ituae f. remettre ind-4 to the tutor of the prince. — Show your governess the pr^cepteur d letter that you have written. — I have given a ring to my sister f. Alexander, in dying, said that he left his empire to the most ind-3 ind-2 worthy, — Have you lent my brother any money ? 535. Rule III. Passive verbs require de or par before the noun or pronoun which they govern. 536. De is used, when the verb expresses an action wholly of the mind; as, L'honnSte homme est estimd, mdme I An honest man is esteemed, even DE ceux qui n'ont pas de probitd. | by those who have no probity, 537. Par is required, when the hodily faculties parti- cipate in the action ; as, Carthage was destroyed by the Romans, Carthage fut ddtruite par les do- mains. Remark. — Par is also used to avoid the repetition o(de in the same sentence ; as, Son ouvrage a iti censuri D'une maniere severe par les critiques. Remember that it is a General Rule to make every past par. ticiple used with the verb etre, agree in gender and number with the Bubject of that verb. ^ 872 GOVERNMENT OP VERBS. EXERCISE CCX. Your brother is honoured and respected by all who know honor er ceux him. — He is loved by all his masters. — Misers are tormented 371 avare with the fear of losing* what they have Bombs crainte f. perdre inf-1 ce qu' 371 bombe f. were invented by Gallen, a bishop of Munster, about the ind-3 " 399 vei's middle of the 16th century. '— The citv of Troy was vilie f. ind-3 taken, plundered, and destroyed by the Greeks, 1184 years saccager detruire B. C. This event has been celebrated by the avant J.-C. evenemejit m. two greatest poets of Greece and Italy. art. 31 538. The preposition to, before a second verb in the infinitive, is expressed in French by A, de, or pour, but not indiscriminately. Sometimes also there is no prepo- sition at all in French. EXAMPLES. J'aitne a I!re. Je Grains de tomber. Je le fais pour vous obliger. Ou laissez-moi pdrir, ou laissez- ;^oi r^gner. — {Corneille.) I like to read, 1 fear io fall. 1 do it to oblige you. Either allow me to perish, or allow me to 7'eign. It is M'pori: nt to observe, that when in French a pre- position IP ^equi'-ed before m infinitive, it is the foregoing ' t:b, !;oan. ^r i.*i 'active *>iat determines which is to be use 'j ..oc'T l'?ic; as that verb, noun, or adjective governs one 0^ "lo+her prepositit n. This government must there- fore be as5C L'tamet' This is one of the principal diffi- culties of ibv French language, and, in order to remove it, we give two Lists of Verbs with the prepositions that they respectively govern, and a third List of those Verba that require no preposition. 54 VFRBS WHICH GOVERN tt. 273 vlio know ormentod Boniba bombe f. bout the vers •oy was ind-3 84 yeara J by tlie b in the >UR, but ) prepo- rish^ or a pre- •egoing to be ;overns ; there- I diffi- emove IS that Verba 539. N.D. After prepositions,* the Frencix use the present infinitive, and not the present participle ; as, Amusez-vou9 a lire. II m'empdche de le faire. Amuse yourself with reading. He hinders vie from doiii(/ it. The only exception is en; as, Nous causerono en marchant. 11 donna cet ordre en partant. We shall talk as we walk. He gave that order in going away. 5-10. List I. Verbs which require the preposition A before the infinitive which follows them. s'Abaisser a, to stoop to. aboutir a, to end in, tend to. s'accorder a, to agree in. accoutumer a, to accustom to. aider a, to help to, assist in. aimer a, to like to. [with, s'amuser a, to amuse oneself animer a, to excite to. s'appliquer a, excel m. to excite to ^0 exerciy in. , exhorter a, • To ascertain whi:h preposition to use, consult tlie Lists. t Some writers occasionally use de, and catabllsli a shade of difference between cvmrnencer b. and commence de; but, according to the latest decisions of tlie French Academy, d may be properly used in all cases. X As it sounds best, i. e. cte to avoid several o, and a to avoid several de, II 4 or de, as it soupds beat ip tlic active sense, but always cfe in the passivt. X.2*:-"'i^ /- 274 VERBS wnicn govern a. I • h^siter h, to hesitate to. Inviter ft, to invite to. seMettrea, to set about to^ be- montrer «, to show to. [gin to. Obliger a, de,t to oblige to. s'obstiner ft, to persist in. s'offrir ft, to offer to. oublier ft, to forget how. Parvenir ft, Tanddoctcur.C76.) Laisser, to leave, to let. 11 laisse opprimer I'lnnoccnce. (Rac.) in dare -f ^"^ suis-je pour oser murmurer ? (L. \ Racine.) to appear. II ^^a?'ai7 etre satisfait. (Acad.) to be able, i ^^'^'' "^/'"^, prospdrc;- sur des terras ( ing-ratcs. (L. Racine.) to pretend. II ^re7t'wrf donner la loi. (Acad.) to know. Je 5ai5 lire et dcrire. (Moliere.) . _ f L'ennui semble dire aux humaius . . . to seem. \^yoitaire.) Souliaiter, % to wish. Valoir raieux,* to be better. H vaut mieux attendre un pen. (Ibid.) Venir,§ to come Je cit^/w adorer I'Eternel. (Racine.) Voir, to see. II n'aime pas £l voir souflrir. (Acaci.) Y ] • t h M9*7/ ( Voulrji-voiis da. i>\ih\ic meriter lea amoxiTs^ Vouioir, to be wmmg. |gan3aesseen^crivantvariezvosdiscours. [Boil) • Aimer mieux; valoir mieux, foii//*red by two verbs In the luflnitive, rcqulio db before the second inflnlt' ve; J'aimerais mieux mourir, que vt/aire une si mauvaiae action.— 11 y a beaucoup d'occasions oil il vaut mieux se (aire que de parler. i Esp^rer, being in the present infl/ilMve, and followed by another verb also In the prctt^nf infinitive, rpr^mrcs de : I'eut-on cBp(5rer dc vous revolt? I Jt i« tm, used with lit, 4'' toufiaite de vous voir.—(RacineO S Fmir, »r> W>« sense oftoOtjvil, /oA»i#>i«/, rcquirtisde before the next inflnltlrt;; when used Uii /// h/ipptn, it requires d ; as, II w\ii\i 4t sortir. I He hasitist oone out. WU v* f w^w '/ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I ■so Hf lig 12.0 u WUU III 1.25 1.4 llllim 1.6 6" Photographic Sciences Corporation N? 1 \ iV :\ \ rv ^^^^' 6^ 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) S72-4S03 ) 280 OF THE IMl^ERt'ECT, :| |1 !3 ( thinks that either 'your ^brother *or ^you have written that song. penser * — It 'seldom ^rains in Egypt. — Seamen smoke a great deal. — en marin beaucoup. The battle begins, and immediately a cloud of arrows darkens aussitSt nueef. trait m.ohscurcir the air, and covers the combatants. — I shall be with you a in a minute. — I set out to-morrow for the country. la partir 550. The imperfect (je parlais^ I was speaking, I spoke, I did speak, I used to speak) expresses a thing having been done at the moment that another took place; as. Je PENSAis h vous, quand vous dtes eatt4. I was thinking of you, tvJicn you came in. 551. The Imperfect is also used when we wish to denote that the action of which we speak was habitual^ or has been reiterated ; as, When I was in Paris, I generally walked in the Champs Elysees. 1 often met Englishmen there. Quand j'dtais k Paris, je me pro- MENA13 ordinairement dans les Champs felysdes. J'y RENCONTRAis souvent des Anglais. 552. Finally, the Imperfect is used in describing tlic qualities of persons or things, the state^ place, and disposi- tion in which they were in a time pasty but without fixing the time of its duration ; as. Alfred €tait un grand roi. Alfred was a great king. Carthage itait sur le bord de la mer. Carthage was on the sea-coast. 663. Note. — Suppose you have to translate into French, I spoke, I wrote, and you are in doubt whether to use the Imperfect or Preterite, see whether you can turn the expression into, / used to speak, I used to write, or into, / was speaking, J was writing — if you can, the Imperfect is your tense. This rule is infallible. EXERCISE CCXVII. Montezuma reigned over the Mexicans, when Fernando rtgncr lorsque Fernanda Cortez attacked Mexico. — Socrates, wishing to harden himself, ind-3 t'endurcir OF THE PRETEHItE DEFINITE. 281 that song^. fit deal. — coup. darkena ohscurcir with you a try. aking, I a thing )k place; when you wish to ^itudl^ or generally s Elysees. there, ing the disposi- it fixing coast. spoke, I ['reterite, t, I used can, the imando irnand- liimsclf, ircir tveyit barefoot in the depth of winter. — In 'ancient ^times, 423 plus fort ancien those who ivc?'e taken in war lost their liberty and became slaves. d devcnir — Among the Romans, the plebeians attached themselves, under Chez plebeien s' . the name of clients, to some patrician whom they called their qiielquepatricien patron. — The temple of Delphi had for an inscription this Delphes * maxim : ICnow thyself. — The pyramids of Egypt were Connais-toi toi-m^ine. intended as buryino'-placcs for the kings. destiner ci art. s^iUture f. s. de 554. The treterite definite (Je parlaij je re^mj serves to express something done at a time completely past, and of which no part remains unexpired ; hence it cannot be used when speaking of anything done during the present day, week, month, year, or century ; as, J'ecrivis hier £L Bordeaux. Nous nous rencontrdmes I'ann^e demiere a Gen6ve. / wrote yesterday to Bordeaux. We met last year at Geneva, 555. As the events related in history are considered as facts, completed in a time entirely elapsed, the preterite definite is principally used in that style ; as, Les Juifs quitterent I'^gypte sous TTie Jews left Egypt under the la conduite de Moise. conduct of Moses, EXERCISE CCXVm. Amenophis conceived the design of making his son a dessein m. inf-1 de conqueror. He set about it after the manner of the Egyptians, conquerant. s'y prendre d manierei. that is, with great ideas. All the children who were born c'est-dr-dire pensee f. 316 on the same day as Sesostris, were brought to court, by order * que amener art. court. of the king : he had them educated as his own children, and faire Slever inf-1 282 OF THE PRETERITE INDEFINITE. with the same care as Scsostris. When lie was grown up, soin pi. que grand he ^made 'him serve his apprenticeship in a war against the lui /aire apprentissage m. par Arabs. This young prince learned there to bear hunger Arabe y supporter f aim ^. and thirst, and subdued that nation, till then invincible. soifi. soumettre jusqu' lie Afterwards ^attacked Libya, and conquered it. ensuite Libye f. EXERCISE CCXIX. After these successes, Sesostris formed the project of succesm.. subduing the ^whole *world. In consequence of this, subjuguer mf-l entier En • * he entered Ethiopia, which he rendered tributary. He dans EtJiiopie se rendre continued his victories in Asia. Jerusalem was the first to feel Jerusalem {. a the force of his arras, the raih Rehoboam could not arme f. timeraire Roboam •resist *him, and Sesostris carried away the riches of Solomon. lui enlever richesse'pl. Salomon. He penetrated into the Indies farther than Alexander did Indes ne afterwards. Tlie Scythians ^obeyed 'him as far as the ensuite. Scythe lui jusqu'd Tanais: Armenia and Cappadocia were subject to him. In Cappadoce f. sujettes En a word, he extended his empire from the Ganges to molm. ^tendre m.depuis Oangem.jusqu'a the Danube (Bossuet.) 556. The Preterite indefinite ffai parley is the past tense most used in French ; it expresses something done in the course of the day, week, month, year, or century in which we arc ; as. J'ai RE9U cette semaine la visite de monsieur votre p^re. Je lui Ai j^CEiT ce matin. / have (Ms week received a visit from your father. I wrote to him this morning. ^ OF THE PRETEUITE ANTERIOR, ETC. 283 )^VIl lip, rand inst i]\Q this, ♦ He 557. The Preterite indefinile Is also used In sjoeaking of a past action, without specifying i\\Q time iu which it happened ; as, / have sold my horse, lie has travelled in Gervmny. 1 mentioned it to your master. This tense is sometimes used instead of the /wtwre; as, J'at vf.ndu mon cheval. II A VOYAOE cu AHeniagne. iJ'en Ai PARL^ h, votre maitrc. AvKZ-vous bientdt fait? Attendez, j'ai fini dans un moment. Will you have done soon ? Wait, I shall have done in a moment. 558. The Preterite anterior ffeus parle) denotes a thing past and done before another also past, and is, for this reason, called anterior. It is generally preceded by a conjunction, or an adverb of time, such as quand, lorsque^ des que^ aussitot que ; as, Quand j'eus reconnu mon er- [ When I had seen my error, 2 reur, j'cn fus honteux. | u;as ashamed of it. Noti. — There is another preterite, called the preterite anterior indcm Inite : J'ai eu parte, tu as euparU, etc., but it is little used. 559. Pluperfect ffavais parte) represents a thing as past before another event happened ; as, J\ivais dine quand il entra. | 1 had dined when he came in. This tense, like the Imperfect, serves to describe, and to express repetition, habit or custom ; as, Dbs que f avals din& j'allais k la pSche. As soon as I had dined, / icent Jislung. Jt EXERCISE CCXX. I rcas (at Your house) this morning ; I saic your brother, and cfiez vous spoke to him. — We have written to him to-day. — The 'present je aujourahui. actuel ^century hegan on the first day of tlie year 1801, and will end * annee f. finir on the last day of the year 1900. — He resided six months * demeurer at Rome. — ^When I had done that, I set out. — I had finished partir my work when he arriyed.— During his stay in the country, Pendant sejourm.a aa soon as he had breakfasted, he went hunting. 281 OF THE CONDITIONAL, ETC. 1 560. The Future ABSOLUTE fje parlerai, I shall or wil! speak) represents the action as yet to come ; as, Je vous j^CRiRAi, 1 shall write to you. 5G1. The Future anterior ff aiirai parte) intimates that a thing will be done before another takes place ; as, J'aurai fini mon theme avant / shall have finished my exercise votre retour. before your return. 562. N.B, The English often use the present tense after when^ as soon as, after, or similar words, when they want to express a thing to come : the future, however, must always be used in French ; as, Passez chez moi, quand vous Call on me when you are ready. BEREZ pret. Conditional Mood. 563. The Conditional mood has i^YO tenses, the presejit and the past. 564. The Conditional present (je parlerais, I should or would speak) expresses that a thing would be done on a certain condition ; as, J'iRAis avec vous si j'avais le / would go with you if I had temps. time. 565. The Conditional past (faurais parle\ or feusse parlefj expresses that a thing might, could, would, or should, have happened, at a time now passed, if another thing had taken place ; as. Le ministre lui aurait Donn^ cette place, s'il I'avait demandde. The minister would have given him that place, if he had asked for it. 566. Remark. — When si (if) signifies suppose que (suppose that), the French use the present indicative instead of the future, and the imperfect instead of the conditional; as, J'irai demain k la campagne, s'il fait beau. Si j'allais en France, je vous en pr^viendrais. I shall go to the country to-morrow, if it be^ne weather. If I should go to France, I will let you know. t Some writers often use tills form, but the student will do well to follow tbe first if h OF THE IMPERATIVE, ETC. 285 I or wilt «/e vous timatcs ,• as, exercise t tense n they •wevcr, ready. wesejit uld or e on a had j'eusse id, or lothcr en him for it. e que ative f the >rrow, nil let H ^» Imperative Mood. 5G7. The Imperative mood commands, exhorts, en- treats, or permits. It has only one tense. EXERCISE CCXXI. I shall wait for you till six o'clock. — When I have done, attendre jusqu'a heure I shall go out. — I will call on you, as soon as I have dined. passer chez aussitdt que — I would sing, if I could. — I shoidd have found him (at home), chez lui if I had arrived a little sooner. — If he should come, what etre plus tdt. shoidd I say to him? — Do good, if you wish to he art. hien m. vouloir happy; do good, if you wish that your memory should be subj-1 honoured ; do good, if you wish that heaven should open to art. subj-1 you its 'eternal Agates. portet * Subjunctive Mood. 568. The Indicative is the mood of affirmation, and the Subjunctive that of doubt and indecision. The Subjunctive is used : — 569. (I.) After r.iy verb expressing douht^ fear, sur- prise, admiration, will, ivish, desire, consent, or command ; because then this verb denotes nothing affirmative, nothing positive with regard to the following verb ; as, II veut, il exige, il desire que lie wishes, he requires, lie desires vous FASSiEz votre devoir. you to do your duty. There is an uncertainty whether you will comply with his wish, his request, or his desire. 570. (II.) After an interrogationj and after a verb 286 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. accompanied by a negation^ because then there is doubt, uncertainty, etc. ; as, Croyoz-vous QU'lL VIENNB ? Je ne crois pas qu'il vienne. Do you think he will come f I do not think he will come. 571. Remark. H. — Sometimes an interrogation is used only to affirm or deny with more energy. In tliis case, the second verb is put in the Indicative, because there is no doubt expressed ; as, Crotez-vous que les Limousins SONT des sots? Do you think that the Limousins are blockheads f That is :— Are you simple enougli to believe that the Limousins are blockheads ? 572. (Til.) After unipcrsonal verbs, or those used unipersonally ; as, // conyien^ qu'il VIENNE. \ It isproperthatheshouldcome. {there. 11 importe que vous y soyez. 1 It is of importance that you should be . 573. Remark. — II semhle, accompanied by an indirect regimen of persons, il y a, il parait, il re'sulte, and some other unipersonal verbs which express something positive, follow this rule when used negatively or interrogatively^ else they require the Indicative ; as, II me semble II vous semble II parait 11 est s^ It seems to me vi • // seems w ..ou qu 11 A raison. j. „ ■* ^ Jt appeals It is certain that he is r'ujht. EXERCISE CCXXII. I tremble lest he should come. — I wish you may succeed qu' ne souhaiter I consent that you do it. — ^Do you think it will rain to-day ? — croire I do not think it will rain much. — Although the wicked some- Quoique times prosper, do not think that they are happy. — ^Do 3'ou peruser believe that the guilty man sleeps tranquilly, and that ho coupahle * tranquille K^ -j i imim I doubt, me. is used s case, here is i7}ioiisins lOllSillS e used e. [titoe. hould be tidirect some Dsitive, r'ujht. ceed day ?— some- )o you iut ho OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 287 can stifle the remorse mihyifliichheiBTackcd}— His enough itoujfer remordsT^\. dont dSchirer svffire that you order me. — / think I see hira. — It often commander II me semble hapj>ens that we are deceived. arriver on f 574. (IV.) The Subjunctive is used after the relative pronouns qui, que, dont, ait, etc., wlien they are preceded by peu, or by an adjective in the superlative relative degree. Among such adjectives are included le scul^ V unique, le premier, le dernier ; as, There are few men ivJio can stij)- 2)ort adversity. The best retinue that a king can have is the love of his subjectf,. The dog is the only animal whose fidelity is proof. It is the only place to which you can aspire. II y a PEU d'hommes qui sachent supporter Tadversit^. Le MEILLEUB cortege fju'nn roi PUIS8B avoir, c'est le cceur de ses sujets. Le cliien est LE seul animal dont la fid^lit^ soiT ^ I'epreuve. C'est LA SEULE place oil vous PUissiEZ aspirer. 575. (V.) The Subjunctive is used after the relative pronouns qui, que, dont, oil, etc., when we wish to express something doubtful and uncertain ; as, Je cherclie quelqu'un qui me I seek some one who may render RENDB ce service. me that service. Je sollicite une place jMC je PuissE I solicit a place which I may be remplir. able to fill. J'irai dans une retraite ou je SOIS I shall retire to a place where 1 tranquille. may be quiet. It is possible that the person I am seeking may not render me that service ; that I may not be able to fill the place I solicit; and, that I may not be tranq^ il in the retreat where I shall go ; it is the subjunctive that expresses this doubt and uncertainty. Observe that we could also say : qui me rendra ce service; que je fevx remplir ; oii je seiiai tranquille ; but the sense would no longer be the same : the action marked by the verbs rendre, pouvoir, and etre, would then be represented as certain and positive. I 288 OF TnE SUBJUNCTIVE. 576. (VI.) Tlic Subjunctive is required after quel que^ quelque. . .. que^ qut^ que, quot, que; as, Queh que soiENT vos talents. Quelque riche que vous soyez. Qui que vous soYEZ, parlez. Whatever your talents may be. However rich you may be. Whoever you be, speak. Quoi qti' on DISE, uii &non ne deviendra qu'un kne. — {Orozelier.) (See what has already been said on Quelque, p. 57-58.) Finally, Tiie Subjunctive is required after certain con- junctions, see Chapter VIII. EXERCISE CCXXIII. He is the only man who lives in that manner. — The example C de la sorte. of a good life is the best lesson that one can give to vie f. on art. mankind. — The siege of Azoth lasted 29 years: it is the genre humain m. c' longest siege mentioned in ancient history. — Show me DONT ttre question a road that will lead to London. — However clever chemin m. qui conduire habile '(those two writers) *6c, neither the one nor the other will icrivain f obtain the vacant seat in the French Academy. — Whatever place f. d Quoi que you study, you must (apply yourself to it) with ardour. il vous y livrer Concord between the Tenses op the Subjunctive and those op the indicative and conditional. 577. The Subjunctive mood being always subordinate to a verb that precedes it, its tenses are regulated by this foregoing verb ; as, Je ne CROis pas que vous VENIKZ. Je ne croyais pas que vous VINS- 8IEZ. I do not think you will come. I did not think you would come. t See Remarks on Seither, No. 614. 'fw^ ' mel que^ nay be. >e. 'izelier.) 8.) ain con- example ve to art. it is the Show me r clever habile ther will Vhatever 2uoi que ardour. 'E AND )rdinate by this me, ^. come. \ CONCORD BETWEEN THE TENSES. 289 •■•r-» 578. Rule I. After tho present and future of the In- dicative, we use the present of the Subjunctive to express a thing present or future ; but we use the preterite of the Subjunctive to express a thing past : — je ou e ^ I ^^^ ^^^g etudiiex maintenant. Je doute ) ^i i-* y • Jedouterai | que vous aye* e^uite laer. 579. Remark. — After tho present and future of the Indicative, wo use tho Imperfect of the Subjunctive instead of the present, and tho Pluperfect instead of tho preterite, when some conditional expression is introduced in the sentence : — Jc doute ) que vous etudiassiez maintenant, demain, si Je douterai ( Ton ne vous y contraignalt. Je doute ) quo vous eussiez etudie hier, si l*on ne vous Je douterai \ y edt contraint. EXERCISE CCXXrV. Do you douht that I am your friend ? — Does he think 1 douter tkall have time? — 1 don* t think yon have learned nialhe- art. art. matics. — He will wait till you are ready. — She will wish que vouloir que your sister to he one of the party. — I shall always doubt that * partie f. you have used all your endeavours Do you think I might faire effort m. pouvoir speak to him, were I to go now? — / doubt whether my si y ind-2 que brother would have succeeded, (had it not been for) your reussir sans assistance. 580. Rule II. After the Imperfect, the Pluperfect, any of the Preterites or Conditionals, we use the Imper- fect of the Subjunctive, if we mean to 3xpress a thing T 290 CONCORD BETWEEN THE TENSE8. present or future ; but to express a thing that is past, we use the Pluperfect ; — ■ Je doutais Je doutai J'ai dout^ J'avais dout^ Je douterais J'aurais dout^ Je doutaia Je doutai J'ai dout^ J'avaic doutd Je douteraia J'aurais dout^ qne vous itudiassiez aujourdliui, demain. que vous eustiez etudie la semaino passive. 581. Remark. — With a Preterite indejinite the follow- ing verb is put in the Present of the Subjunctive, if we intend to express a thing which is, or may bo done at all times ; as, Qod has surrounded the eyes with very thin tunics^ transparent on the outsidef that wc may see ihrouyh them. Dieu A ENTOUR^ les yeux de tuniquea fort minces, transpa- rentes au dehors, afin que Ton PUISSE voir h travers. And in the Preterite of the Subjunctive, if wc intend to express something past ; as. II A FALLU qu'il Se SOIT DONNfi bien de la peine. He must have given "himself a great deal of trouble. EXERCISE CCXXV. He was waiting till I should he ready Would you wait tiU aitendre que que we «AottZd fee ready?— Sparta was sober before Socrates Aad Sparte avant que praised sobriety ; before he had praised virtue, Greece abounded avant qu* abonder in virtuous men. — WiUiam III. Zc/V, at his death, the reputa- laisser tion of a gretit politician, although he had not been populai', politique populaire and of a general (to be feared), although he had lost many d craindre, battles. — You must have had (a great deal) of patience II afallu beaucoup '1 OF TUE rilESENT rAUTIClPLE. OF THE PRESENT PAUTICIPLE. 291 582. Tlio Present Participle always terminates in ant^ nnd is invariable : — Un homme ^isaH^/ deshommes | A »;jan reading ; wi«n reading. lisant. A woman reading; women read- ing. Une feinme lisant ; des femmes lisant. Wc say, however : — Di'S liommcs obllgeants; une Obliging men; a charming wo- femme charmante. man. But the words obligeantSj charmante^ are not here pre- sent participles ; they are verbal adjectives. 583. We call verbal adjectives, those adjectives which aro derived from verbs ; as, charmant^ menaqayitf &c. These adjectives always agree in gender and number with the nouns which they qualify. The verbal adjective simply expresses a quality; the present participle expresses an action. N.D. In English, the verbal adjective is placed before the noun, and the present participle aflnr it. In French, botli are generally placed after. See No. 437. 584. Remark. — The present participle is often used in English as a noun, which is never the case in French : — Le jcu et la chasse sont la ruine Gaminq and huntinq are the ruin de bion des gens. of many peojtle, EXERCISE CCXXVI. *David Ms 'often 'represented playing on the liarp. — She on ind-1 de is a woman of a good disposition, obliging her friends, whenever caraciere m. qvand an occasion (presents itself). — Those m^n foreseeing the d .ig-er, V s'en presente. jw&voir put themselves on their guard. — Those foreseeing men have pi. perceived the danger. — The ruling passion of Ceesar was apercevoir dominant 292 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. ambition. — Your sister is charming; how obliging she is!— que Her singing was much admired. chant m. ind-3 fort OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 585. (I.) The Past Participle employed without an auxiliary, agrees, like an adjective, in gender and number, with the noun or pronoun to which it relates ; as, Les m^chants ont bien de la peine k deraeurer UNia (Finelon.') The wicked have much difficulty in remaining united. Que de ramparts detruits! que de \i\\es forcees / — (JBoileau.) 586. (II.) The Past Participle^ accompanied by the auxiliary verb etre, agrees with its subject or nominative in gender and number ; as, My brother is come. My sister is come. My brothers are come. My sisters are come. The army has been conquered. The enemies have been conquered. Sometimes the subject is placed after the participle, but this construction docs not alter the agreement of the participle : Quand il vit Vurne ch etaient renfermj^es les CENDRES d'HippiaSf il versa un torrent de larmes. (Fe- nelon.) . 587. (III.) When the Past Participle follows the verb avoir^ it never agrees with its subject ; as, My father has written. Mon frdre est venu. Ma sceur est venue. Mes freres sont venus. Mes sceurs sont venues. L'arm^e a ^td+ vaincue. Les ennemis ont 4t4 vaincus. Mon pere a icrit. Ma mere a ecrit. Mes freres ont ecrit. Mes sceurs ont ^crit. My mother has written. My brothers have written. My sisters have written. EXERCISE CCXXVII. A quarrelsome dog has always a torn ear. — The ceiling" * Jiargneux V dechirer plafond ra. of the Egyptian temples was painted blue. — That letter ia en 4' ' t The participle ^/^ never varies. We say t7 or eUe a 4tiy he or she haabeen ; Ut or elltt ont iti^ they have beec ihe is!— lout an lumber, fflculty in ',au.) by tlie linotive lered. •nquered. •ticiple, of the ^ES les (Fe- le verb md m. Jtter is aa been OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 293 well written, — The citv of London, havrng been burnt hi vilie f. 1666, was rebuilt in three years, more beautiful and more rebdtir annie f. regular than before. — The ancient Greeks were persuaded that auparavant. persuader the soul is immortal. — It is to Jeuner tliat '(the discovery of dScouverte f. vaccination) *(is due). — Artemisia survived '(Mausolus, her vaccine f. Artimise n* ind-4 d Mausole husband), *(only two years). — The Amazons have acquired que an m. Amazone celebrity. — They have executed the orders of Your Excellency. 32 ^" To make a right application of the following rules, the student must distinguish well a direct regimen from an indirect rei/imen, for this is the pivot on which turn the principal difficulties of the past par ticiple. For the meaning of regimen^ see Nos. 405, 466, 600. 588. (IV.) The Fast Farticiple accompanied by the auxiliary avoirj always agrees with its direct regimen^ when that regimen is placed before the participle ; as, Iva lettre que vous avez ecrite. Voici les lettres ^'we j'ai regues. Oil est votre livre ?~je Z'ai perdu. Oil est votre plume ?-je VaX perdue. Oil sont vos livres?-je les ai perdus. lis m'ont felicite. II nous &felicites. Quelle affaire avez-vous entreprisef Que de desagrements lis m'ont causes ! Comhien de livres avez-vous lus ? The letter which you have written. Here are the letters which / have received. Where is your booh f-Ihav. lost it. Where is your pen ?-I have lost it. Where are your boohs ?-I have lost They have congratulated me. [them. He has congratulated us. [taken ? What business have you under- What vexations they have caused me! How many books have you read ? These Examples show that the direct regimen which precedes the participle is expressed either by one of these pronouns que^ fe, Za, les, w?e, wom«, te, vows, se, or by a noun preceded by quel^ que de^ or combien de. In the first example e'crite agrees with que^ of which the antecedent is lettre, feminine and singular. In the fifth example, perdus agrees with leSj which stands for its antecedent livres^ masculine and plural. 201 OF THE PAST rARTICIPLE. A lady would say, lis m'ontfelicitce. ] Tliey have congratulated me. Felicitee agrees with me, of which the antecedent dame is understood. The same analysis applies to the other and similar cases. (^ Observe that the rule says direct regimen, for although wo say, II nous a vus, he has seen us ; we could not say, II nous a dits cela, he has told us that : we must say, // nous a dit ceJa ; because nous is here used for a nouSf and is an indirect regimen. EXERCISE CCXXVIII. Here is the answer which I have received. — The sciences reponsef. f. which you have studied^ will prove infinitely useful to you.— Ure General Villars often said, that the two ^(most lively) art. vif ^pleasures he had felt in his life, had been the first subj-2 resseniir ind-2 prize which he had obtained at collcg'e, and the first victory prix m. ind-2 which he had gained over the enemy. — Where is my ind-2 remporter watch?- 1 have not seen it. — They have deceived us. — What montre f. tromper answer have they given you? — How many enemies has he not on jaire conquered ! — The house which her father has bought, vainer e que 589. (V.) After the auxiliary avoir j the Fast Participle remains invariable when the direct regimen is placed AFTER the participle, or when there is no direct regimen ; as. Nous avons regu votre leitre. lis ont perJu leurs livres. J'ai ricompense mes Jils. We have received your letter. They have lost their books. / have rewarded my sons. No agreement here takes place, because the direct regimens votre lettre^ leurs livres^ mes jfilSj are placed after the participles requ^ perdu, recompense. . OF THE PAST PAllTIC^. i.E. 295 lar In the same manner, we write without varying the participle : She has danced. We have sung. T/ie^ have answered our cxjpecta- tion. Kile a dans&. Nous avons chantS. Us ont rcpondu k noire attcnte. Because the verbs danser^ chanter^ repondre^ have not here any direct regimen. 590. Remark. — It follows from the preceding rule, that the participle of neuter verbs, which arc conjugated with avoir^ never varies, since that class of verbs has no direct regimen. Thus, in Les cinq heures quefai dormi (the five hours that I have slept), les dix ans quHl a v£gu (the ten years that he has lived), the participle of the neuter verbs dormir- and vivre does not vary, and the relative que which precedes, although presenting itself under the form of a direct regimen, is in reality but an indirect regimen, equivalent to pendant lequel: les cinq hcurcs PENDANT LESQUELLES fat dormij les dix ans PENDANT LESQUELS H a Ve'cU. Note. — Sometimes neuter verbs are employed actively, then their participles agree, if preceded by a direct regimen ; as, La langue que Ciceron a parl^e, the language which Cicero has spoken. EXERCISE CCXXIX. I have received no answer. — He has named several persons. • plusieurs — Cromwell governed England under the title of Protector. — ind-4 Men have never reaped the fruit of happiness from the tree of cuellir sur injustice. — The Romans triumphed successively over the ind-4 successivement de '(most warlike) ^nations They danced a great deal at the hclliqueux f. ind-4 last ball. — We have laughed heartily. — We must deduct halm. deboncceur. II retrancher from life the hours we have slept, on 296 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 591. (VI.) The verb etre being used instead o^ avoir in pronominal or reflected verbs, the participle of these verbs follows exactly the same rules as the participle con- jugated with avoir ; that is, the participle of a reflected verb agrees with the direct regimen when preceded by it, but remains invariable, when the direct regimen is placed after it, or when there is none. So we write with agreement : — Nous nous sommes blesses, Lucrece «'est tuee. We have hurt ourselves. Lucretia killed hersel£ Because the participles llessis^ tuee^ are preceded by their direct regimens nous^ se. But we write without agreement : — Lucrece s'est donnt la mort. | Lucretia destroyed herself. Because the participle donne is followed by its direct regimen la mort. In this example, se is an indirect regimen or dative. "We write also without varying the participle : — 11 se sont ecrit, Tliey have written to each ottier. Nous nous sommes succeM, We have succeeded one another. Here, the participles ecrit and succe'de have no direct regimen. It is as if it were : lis ont ecrit a eux : Nous avons succede a nous. 592. Remark. — It follows from the foregoing rule, that verbs essentially pronominal, that is, verbs which cannot be conjugated without two pronouns of the same person, as je me repens, je rrCdbstienSj require their participles always to agree, because these verbs have for direct regimen their second pronoun ; ns. Nous nous sommes ahstenus de toute reflexion. ^les amis, vous vous 3tes repentis. We have abstained from all re- flections. My friends, you have repented. EXERCISE CCXXX. Madame de S^yign^ has rendered herself celebrated by the se rendre graces of her style. — She perceived herself in that glass. m. s^apercevoir ind-4 gla>ce f. i OF TUB PAST PARTICIPLE. 297 — That lady has given herself fiue dresses. — Some robe f. QnelqueS'Uns of our modern authors have imagined that they surpassed the s'imaginer ind-2 ancients They have spoken to one another. — They have se parler succeeded one another. — Those boys have repented. — Tlie se repentir troops have seized the town. s'emparer de 593. (VII.) The participle of a unlpcrsonal (or imper- sonal) verb is always invariable : — Les clialeurs qu'il a fait cet 6t4. La disette qu'il y a EU I'hiver dernier. T/ie heat which we have had this summer. The scarcity which there was last winter. Here the verbs faire and avoir have not their active signification, but simply express existence, and the que which precedes is not the regimen of any verb, for we do not say faire des chaleurSj as we say faire des habits. That que must be considered a gallicism. 594. (VIII.) The Past Participle, followed by an in« finitive, agrees with the antecedent noun, when that noun is the regimen or object of the participle, but it remains invariable when the noun is the object of the infinitive; as, La lettre que je lui ai donn€e 4 copier. La lettre que jo lui ai DIT de copier. 27ie letter which I have given him to copy. The letter which / have told him to copy. Note. — The regimen or object is known to belong to the participle when the antecedent can be placed after the participle, as in the first example, which may bo turned, Je lui ai donne la lettre a copier. As we cannot say, Je lui ai dit la lettre dc copier^ but wc may say, Je lui ai dit de copier la lettre, it follows that the regimen belongs to the infinitive. For the same reason, the participles Dfi, owed, ought ; pu, been able, and voulu, been willing, remain invariable when an infinitive is understood after them ; as, Je lui ai rendu tous les services que / have rendered him all the «er- J'ai PU (lui rendre understood.^ vices that I haw. been able. ^/ 298 OP THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 595. Remark. — When the French participle happens to bo placed between two que^ the first que is not the regimen of the participle, but of the verb which follows it, consequently the participle is invariable ; as, Le3 raisons que vou3 avez cbu que j'approuvais. Lcs mathdmatiques que vous avez VOULU que j'dtudiasse. The reasons which you thought 1 approved. The mathematics which you ivouUl have me to study. EXERCISE CCXXXI. The heavy rains which we had in the spring", have grand pluie f. • il /aire ind-4 been the cause of many diseases That young lady sing's well; maladie f. I have heard her sing". — That song L charming"; I heard it ind-4 simgf. — I have used all the endeavours I could. — He has inf-1 faire effort iq..'\- ind-4 obtained all the favours he unshed. — These are the answers grdce f. t vouloir ind-4 Voild which I had foreseen they would give you. — The difficulties (/tte t faire embarrasm. which 1 knew you were in have accelerated my departure. ind-4 1 ' avoir * depart m. V EXERCISE CCXXXII. The rain which has fallen has prevented me from going out f. fait empichS sortir to-day. — Have you finished the letter which I gave you to nid-4 write ? — Have you finished the letter which you had begun to ind-2 write ? — Have you read the books which I advised ^ you conseiller ind-4 to read ? — Is that the actress whom we heard sing ? — Sing" the de -ce Id actrice ind-4 song" which we heard her sing Imitate the virtues which ind-4 lui you have heard praised. t See Rule and Note, foot of page 268w SYNTAX OF TUK ADVERB. 299 CHAPTER VI. you # r F T II E A I) V E R B. 596. (I.) Adverbs, In Frcncli, arc generally placed after the verb in the simple tense^^ and between the uuxil'ary and the participle in the compound tenses^ bnt never between the subject and the verb, as is frequently the case in English; as, Je pense souvent k vous. / often Odnh of you. J'ai TOUJOURS pense a vous, / have always thougid o/t/ou. Compound adverbs are usually placed after the par- ticiple; as, Vous etes venu A propos, you have coinc seasonably. In some instances, however, the ear alone is consulted ; for we say, Je V avals tout A fait oublU, I had quite forgotten it. 597. (II.) The adverbs aujourd'iiui, to-day ; dematn, tO'inorrow; iiier, yesterday^ may be placed either before or after the verb, but never between the auxiliary and the participle ; as, II fait aujourd'iiui beau tempSj il pleuvra DEMAiN ; or, Aujourd'kui il fait beau temps, demain il pleuvra, To-day, it is fine ; it will rain to-morrow. 598. (III.) The adverbs bien, well; mieux, better • mal, ill'j PIS, worse, may be placed either before or after anm- finitive ; as, Bien faire son devoir, or Faire bien son de- voir, to do one's duty well. But they are always placed after the verb in the simple tenses; as, VousfitesniY.^, ilfit MAL, you did well, he did ill. And, with the com- pound tenses, they are placed between the auxiliary and the participle ; as Vous avez mal fait, yau have done wrong. 599. (IV.) The adverbs, comment, ou, combien, quand^ pourquoi, are always placed before the verb ; as, Comment se porte monsieur voire frere ? I How is your brother f Ou allez-vous ? | Whither are you going f 300 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. Remarks on some Adverbs. 600. (1.) Beaucoup is not, as the English much, sus- ceptible of being modified by any preceding adverb ; thus, tres beaucoup, trop beaucoup, si beaucoup, would be barbarisms. 601. (2.) BiEN before another adverb means vert/, much, quite, etc. ; as, Bien tard, very late ; bien moins, much less; bien assez, quite enough. After the adverb, it signifies well ; as, Assez lien, pretty well; moins bien, not so well. 602. (3.) Plus and davantage, both mean more, but they are not used indiscriminately. Davantage can never modify an adjective, and cannot, like plus, be followed by the preposition de nor the conjunction que. We say : — He has more brilliancy than solidity. lie relies more on his own know- ledge than on that of others. Wc could not say, // a davantage de brillant, il se lie davantage a ses lumieres, etc. Davantage is always used absolutely, either at the end of a sentence, or at the end of a member of a sentence ; as, Le cadet est riche, mais I'aln^ Test davantage. ]1 a PLUS de brillant que de solide. II se fie PLUS A ses lumidres qu'ii celles des autres. The youngest is rich, but the eldest is still more so. 603. (4.) Plus t6t means sooner, and has for its op- posite PLUS TARD, later. Plut6t signifies rather. EXERCISE CCXXXIII. I very seldom go out. — Homer sometimes slumbers in the sortir • sommeillcr d midst of his ffods and heroes. — She has sun^ very well. — milieu m. tres Where hatred prevails, truth (is sacrificed). — That grieves aominer fait naufrage. chagriner mc very much. — This letter is pretty well written. — I would f. like you much more, if you were reasonable. — He has arrived bien ind-2 est sooner than usual. — I will die rather than suffer it. de coutum^, d€ I OP NEGATIVES. 301 Remarks on the Negatives. 604. (1.) The negative expressions ne-pas^ ne-point^ etc. form only one negation. 605. (2.) Point denies more strongly than pas. 606. (3.) Pas is used in picferencc to point ; 1st, Be- fore pluSf beaucoupj moins, si, aidant, and otlier compara- tive words ; as, Milton n'est pas moins sublime qu^ Homer e, Milton is not less sublime than Homer; 2^/y, Before nouns of number ; as, // n^y a pas six ans, it is not six years ago. 607. (4.) Pas and point may bo suppressed after the verbs cesser, to cease ; oser^ to dare ; and pouvoir^ to bo able : as. EUo ne oesse de gronder. On n'osE I'aborder. Je ne puis me taire. She does not cease scolding. They dare not accost him. J c&nnot be silent. 608. (5.) After savoir, to know, when this verb is used to express a state of uncertainty, it is better to omit pas and point ; as, Je ne SAis oil le prendre. II ne SAiT ce qu'il dit. / do not know where to find him. He does not know what Jte sni/s. But, pas and point must be used when savoir is cm- ployed to declare anything positively ; as, Je ne SAIS pas le frangals. ( I do not know French. (See former Remarks on Pouvoir and Savoir, used with a negative, p. 140 and 141). 609. (6.) Pas and point are suppressed after the con- junction que, preceded hy the comparative adverbs plus^ moins, mieux, or some other equivalent ; as, J I dcrit micux qu'il ne parle. 11 est moins riche, plus riche qu*on ne croit. C'est autre chose que je ne croyais. He writes better than he speaks. He is less rich, richer than is be- lieved. It is different from what I thought. 610. (7.) Pas and point are omitted with a verb in the preterite, preceded by the conjunction depuis que, or by the verb il y a, denoting a certain duration of time ; as, Comment vous 6tes-vou3 portd IIow have you been since I saw depuis que je A vous ai vu ? you f 11 y a six mois He je ne lui ai / have not spohn (o him these six rtarM. H monthi. 302 EXERCISE ON NEGATIVES. lliit tliey arc not omitted Avhen the verb is in the present tense : — Comment vk-il dcpuis que nous no le voyons point ? II y a six mois quo nous ne nous parlons point. now does he live now that we do not see himf It is six months since ict do not sjicak to one another. EXERCISE CCXXXIV. There is no happhiess without virtue. — The rich are not 164 honheur m. riche la3 always happier than the poor. — There will not be nmch pi. fruit this year. — You will not find two of your opinion annee f. • tti avis m. You do not cease scolding me — I dare not speak to him inf-1 I cannot understand whuL in means. — I do not know comprendre ce qu* vouloir dire. what to do. — She sings much better than she did.— que ne ind-2 He is riclicr than he was. — That child has g-rowii ne ind-2 grandir (very much) since I saw it. bien ne ind-4 EXERCISE CCXXXV. Since the world has been a world, said Boileau, one Depuis que est * • on has not seen a great poet, son of a great poet. — She does de un not like (people to flatter her.) — Do you not believe what he qu'on laflatte. ce qu* says ? — That is not worth more than a guinea. — Do not go cn d' so fast. — There are I know not how many people at the si 186 402 door. — When Darius proposed to Alexander to divide Asia ind-3 partager 375 equally with him, he answered: The earth c«7mo^ admit of tgauinent ind-3 souffrir two suns, nor Asia of two kind's. ill th(^ hat we do e do not li are 7}ot ie loli be much pinion avis m. [) him '.ot know did.- e ind-2 STOwn grandir iau, one on Jhe does ivhat he ;e qu* not go at the [e Asia (jer 375 idmit of wiiffrir SYNTAX OF THE PUEPOSITION. 303 CHAPTER VII. OF THE PREPOSITION. Gil. Rule I. In Frencli, tlic preposition is always placed immediately before its object, whereas in English it is sometimes placed after it ; as, ( To lohom do you speak f A qui pailez-vous ? De quoi V0U3 plaignez-vous V or. am do you speak to ? Of IV hat do you complain f rof or. IVhat do you complain of? EXERCISE CCXXXVI. N To whom does that house belong- ? — What house are you ajyj^artenir speaking off — Of that white house. —■ It belongs to the ind-1 gentleman with whom we are ^oing to dine. — He has two monsieur md-l footmen behind his carriage. — Tiberius was emperor after laquais voituref, Tibere ind-3 Augustus. — The liberty of the Roman republic expired under Auguste. 435 ind-3 Tiberius. — A serpent biting its tail was, among qui se mord art. queue f. iud-2 chez the Egyptians, the emblem of eternity. art. 612. Rule II. The prepositions a, de, and EXERCISE CCXXXIX. I live near the gate Saint-Martin. — ^6ore the door were demeurer porte f. ind-2 written these words In the 'ecclesiastical ^hierarchy, 586 mot m. ecclesiastique hierarchie f. h asp. the bishop is below the archbishop The queen had her archevique. daughters around her. — We came along the river side. — ind-4 riviere i'. * He lodges opposite my windows. — All fathers, even the most art. grave, play with their children. — Let us go together as far jouer as Oxford. — As for him, he (shall act) as he pleases. en usera lui ind-7 EXERCISE CCXL. ^^sculapius '(is represented) with a snake in his hand Esculape on repr^ente couleuvre f. cL or around his arm, and a cock near him.— The Falls of coq cataracte f. s. Niagara are near the boundaries of the United States se trouve limite f. Etats- Unis and Canada. — The Americans place Washington and 31 m. Bolivar above Alexander and Cffisar. — The planets are de planete f. opaque bodies wliich turn around the sun, from which they tourner . oti derive light and heat. — There are forests of canes iirer lumieref. chaleurf foritf. cannei. along the Ganges. — I will wait for you till two o'clock. Gange m. 151 308 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. CHAPTER VIII. OF THE CONJUNCTION. 621. In French, some conjunctions require the verb which follows them to be in the indicative, some in the sub- junctive, and others in the infinitive mood. 622. The following Conjunctions^ and Conjunctive Locutions, require the indicative mood: — Ainsi que, as^ as well as. apres que, after. [as. attendu que, considering tnat, aussitotque, 1^„ „^^« «. dSsque, ^as soon as. autant que, as much as [what. k ce que, as, as far as, from a mesure que, as, in proportion au lieu que, whereas. [as. depuis que, since. lorsque, when. parce quo,t because. pendant que, I ^7,;;. ^.i.:].* tandis que, IW'/*"^* «'/*"««• peut-etre que, perhaps. puisque, since. ' tant que, as long as. vu que, seeing that. They require the indicative, because the principal sen- tence, which they unite with that which is incidental, expresses affirmation in a direct and positive manner. + Observation. — Par ce que (in three words) is not a conjunction, though sometimes mistaken for one. It signifies, by that which, by what. EXERCISE CCXLI. As soon as the Khan of Tartary has dined, a herald cries kan m. Mraut that ail the other princes of the earth may go and dine, terret ind-1 * if (they please). — A child ought not to ^obtain ^anything, bon leur semble. ne doit * rien because he asks for it, but because he has need (of it). — * besoin en We must not judge of a man by what he (is i^noraut of), II falloir ignore ; I ( ( SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 309 but by what he knows. — Whilst we are in prosperity, savoir on art. we mu3t prepare for adversity. — As long as I have it se d art. ind-7 money, you shall not want any. manqiier en G23. The following Conjunctions^ and Conjunctive Locutions, require the subjunctive mood. ) however j little, provided that. pour pen que, si peu que, pourvu que, quoique, ^ bien que, >-though,although. encore que, ) sans que, without. soit que, whether. suppose que, supposing that. avant que, before. a moins que,t unless. au cas que, in case that. t ZfrtT^'^ \ for fear, lest. (le pcur que,T j •^ -^ » jusqu'a ce que, till, until. non que, > ^ ^^ ^ non pas que, ^ '»" " They require the subjunctive, as they always imply doubt, desire, uncertainty. 624. Remark on the conjunction que. Learners are often mistaken, by supposing that que always requires the verb which follows it to be in the subjunctive mood ; but QUE does not govern any particular mood. It is the positive or doubtful • sense of the first verb that requires the second to be in the indicative or subjunctive.t There are, however, several cases in which que requires the subjunctive after it. These are when que is used instead, or in the sense of some conjunctions which themselves always govern the subjunctive, such as ajin que^ avant que, a moins que, jusqu^d ce quCj quoique^ sans que^ soit que^ suppose que ; as, Approchez, que je vous vcle (o/F/i que.) Attendez que la pluie soit pass^e (^jusqu'a ce que.') Couie near, that I may see you. Wait until the rain be over. t A moins que, de crainte que, de peur que, require ne before the verb whlcll follows them, although not ha-v>" a negative •ense- X See the Bjntax of this mood, p. 2S5-288. 310 EXERCISES ON THE CONJUNCTION. EXERCISE CCXLII. The Apostles received the gift of tongues, that i\\^y might iud-3 don m. ponvoir preach the Gospel to all the nations of the earth. — If my Evangile m. brother come before I am up, show him into the dining-- ind-1 levi faire entrer room, and give him a newspaper to amuse himself with till I come down.— Unless you be useful, you will not be sought after. descendre recherche — Speak low, for fear anybody should hear you. — Though on entendre you are learned, be modest — Get in without his seeing you. instruit Entrer 625. The following Conjunctions govern the infinitive \— Afin de, avant de,t uvant que de, h. moins de, k moins que de. tOy in order to. before. unless. au lieu de, loin de, de peur de, } instead of. far from. de crainte de, Xfor, or from fear of. plutot que de, rather t of. han. + Avant de, and avant que de, are both correct expressions ; but present usage is decidedly in favour of avant de. Note. — A cause que, devant qtce, durant que, malgri que, are found among the Tables of Conjunctions, and in the Exercises of many Grammars ; but these are antiquated expressions. A cause que is replaced by parce que ; devant que, by avant que ; durant que, by pendant que ; and malgr€ que, by quoique. EXERCISE CCXLIII. He works in order to acquire riches and consideration. — Before acqu^rir f. granting him my confidence, I shall examine if he is worthy of confiance f . it. — Instead of studying, he does nothing but amuse himself. ne * que se divertir. — Far from- thanking me, he has scolded me. — Charles VII., grander king of France, abstained from eating, in fear of ind-3 par art. crainte f. being poisoned, and allowed himself to die, from fear of se laisser ind-3 peur dying. — Bather die than do a dishonourable action. inf-1 Idcheti f. i c •f OF ABBREVIATIONS. 311 of of C26. Tlio Interjections have been trcatccT of in page 190: their construetion is the same in French as in Eng- lish ; they require, therefore, no furtlier explanation. The Boul is the only syntax for interjections, and they can never embarrass the student, since they do not require any rules. 627. Of Abbreviations. There are certain French words which it is customary to abridge and represent by capital letters, as follows : — for Jesus- Christ. ... Notre- Seigneur. ... Notre- Seigneur Jesus-Christ. ... Sa Saintet6. ... Sa Majeste. ... Leurs Majestes. ... Sa Majeste Imperialc. ... Sa Majeste Trcis-Chretienne. ... Sa Majeste Catholique. ... Sa Majeste Tr^s-Fidelc. ... Sa Majeste Britannique. ... Sa Majeste Suedoise. ... Son Altesse. ... Son Altesse Royale. ... Son Altesse Imperiale. ... Son Excellence. ... Son Eminence. ... Monseigneur. ... Monsieur. . Messieurs. . Madame. . Mademoiselle. . Marchand. . Marchande. . Negociant. . Compagnie. ( Encycl. method, — Gram, dcs Gram.— Acad.) * The first is more used in print, and the latter in writing. Jlessn is also a good abbreviation of Messieurs, J.C. N.S. N.S. J.C. S.M. LL. MM. S.M.I. S.M. T.C. S.M.C. S.M.T.F. S.M.B. S.M.S. S.A. S.A.R. S.A.I. S.Ex. S.Em. Mer M. or W * MM. or M}'^* Mile Md Mde N6gt Ci« •; [ 312 1 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE NINE PARTS OF SPEECH, AND Ox\ THE PRINCIPAL NICETIES, DIFFICULTIES, AND IDI03I3 OF THE - FRENCH LANGUAGE. CCXLIV I look upon the silence of the abbiS Sieycs, said regardcr Mirabeau, as a public calamity. — Saying of Peter the Great : Mot It requires three Jews to deceive a Russian.— A Swiss proverb : 187 644 Keep at least three paces from him who hates bread, and the 247 toi d voice of a child.— Every Roman knight had a horse maintained 120 eniretenir at the expense of the republic, and wore a gold ring as a mark pi. 419 of his dignity. — I bequeath to surgeon Larrey, 100,000 fr. ; Je legue he is the most virtuous man I have known. {NapoUorCs Will.) 493 » » 1 subj-1 CCXLV. — It is related of Alexander that he said of 111 ind-2 Diogenes, that if he had not been Alexander, he (would have) eUt eUt wished to be Diogenes. — It was at the battle of Cressy (1346) 98 that for the first time the English made use of artillery. — Go, fois f. my friends, said Napoleon to his grenadiers, fear nothing, the ind-2 293 ball which will kill me is not yet cast. — The Spaniards ind-7 fondre compare Ciiarles V. to Solomon for wisdom, to Caesar for 76 courage, to Augustus for good fortune Such was Sheridan ! bonheur m. he could soften an attorney I There has been nothing like it since the days of Orpheus.— (-Byron.) ts EXERCISES ON iDIOlVtS. 313 \ CCXLVl "Soldiers," said Bonaparte, in one of Li.s nro- ind-2 clamations, "you have, in a fortnight, gained six victories, remporter taken twenty-one standards, fifty pieces of cannon, several drapeau m. strong places, made fifteen thousand prisoners, killed or 76 wounded more than ten thousand men. You have won battles de without artillery, crossed rivers without bridges, performed passer faire forced marches without shoes, bivouacked without brandy and bivaquer often without bread. Thanks be rendered to you, soldiers ! Ordce f. The country has a right to expect great things from you. Patrie f. You have yet combats to wage, towns to take, rivers to cross. livrer Friends, be the liberators of the people, do not be peuple pi. their oppressors." en jUau m. CCXLVII.— The castle clock struck twelve. At that mo- sonner En ment the buzzings of the crowd ceased, and a little man, bourdojinement m. dressed in a green uniform, white trousers, and wearing 253 d' d' chausse de riding-boots, appeared all on a sudden, keeping on his head d I'ecuyere en 146 a three-cornered hat as fascinating as he was himself. The d trots cornea prestigieux V broad red riband of the Legion of Honour floated on his ind-2 breast. A small sword was at his side. He was perceived poitrine f. apercevoir by all eyes, and at once. Iff ediately, cries of: Long hve 335 the Emperor ! were uttered by the enraptured multitude. potisser enthousiasmer f. S14 EXr.RCiSKS on IDIOMS. CCXLVIII.— Botanists assure us that corn is nowhere to * ble m. bo found in its primitive state. This plant seems to have 643 been confided, by Providence, to the care of man, with the pi. use of fire, to insure him the sceptre of the earth. With corn 644 and fire, we can acquire all the other g-oods. Man, with corn on bien ra. alone, can feed all the domestic animals that sustain his life, nourrir 248 and share his labours ; the pig*, the hen, the duck, the pigeon, partager tlie ass, the sheep, the goat, the horse, the cow, the cat, and brebts f. cJievre f. the dog, which give him, in return, eggs, milk, bacon, wool, rendre services, and g-ratitude. CCXLIX.— My dear Friend, Pray, apply yourself diligently to your exercises ; for though s'appUquer the doing them well is not supremely meritorious, the doing- meritoire them ill is illiberal, vulgar, and ridiculous. ignoble I send you enclosed a letter of recommendation for Marquis ci-inclus Matiffnon, which will at once thoroughly introdqce you tout d'un coup into the best French company. Your character, and conse- reptUation qucntly your fortune, absolutely depends upon the company you keep, and the turn you take at Paris. I do not, tournure f. in the least, mean a grave turn; on the contrary, a gay, a nidlement sprightly, but at the same time an elegant and liberal one. by ni Fi a EXERCISES ON IDIOMS. 315 icrc to 3 Iinve th the h corn h corn is life, )ig'eon, it, aiiii wool, liough doing" irqiils you jonse- ipany ) not, ay, a Keep cftrefully out of all quarrels. Many young* Frenchmen are hasty and giddy But these young men, when mellowed by age and experience, very often turn out able men. The number of great generals and statesmen, as well as authors, that France has produced, is an undeniable proof of it.— {Lord Chesterfield to his Son.) CCL. — Scotland is a picturesque countiy The country has its amusements and beauties, but I prefer town It is very fine weather. — That reauires much time I saw him to-day for the first time — I know him, but I do not know where he lives. — If your sisters are at home, brinj^ them with you ; we shall be deliffhted to see them. — Bring' mo a few French books well bound in calf. — There is some cold veal. — Here is a calf's head.— Cut some bread.— Give me the loaf. — The poorest of the Russians have a tea-pot, a copper tea-kettle, and take tea, morninff and evening". — It requires an iron hand in a silk glove. — Andrew was Simon Peter's brother. CCLI.— Knock at the door. — There is no knocker. — She is always cross. — What a pretty gold cross she wears ! — She reads better now, and better oooks. — If I had better paper and a better pen, I would write better. — She has married my brother. — It was our bishop that married them. — Look at this boy. — He looks well to-day.— I have called at your house — Tell him to call again. — Call the waiter — I am a bachelor. — They sav the plague is at Smyrna.— Don't plague me. — When Cromwell gave half-a-crown a-day to every dragoon, he readily got recruits for the Parliamentarian armies- CCLII. — The sons of the emperors of Russia take the title of Grand-duke. — Take my horse to the stable. — Take the saddle to the saddler. — If you are goin^ to Canterbury, take me with you. — Take this bonnet to your sister. — I take a cup of coffee every morning. — It has rained all the morning. — I will go and see you on Friday evening I shall spend the evening with you. — He has spent all his money. — I come from Paris, and I will return to- morrow. — I am going to Paris, and I will return next week. — Return me my money Have I not returned it to you?— Gar- dener, have you swept all the walks ?- Good bye, ladies ; I wish you a pleasant walk. INDEX. A Pape /j ; witli and without accent, 8 rropor names ending in a, 37 Knglisli indef. art. 14, 199, 20() „ ... j8, 14, If), 185, Preposition, j 219,. 303. Verbs which require d, . . 273 Abbreviations in the Exercises, 6 of Titles, . .311 Abstain (to), s'abstcnir, . .133 yfccc/i^j; number and use. . Jl A djedive ; Feminine of, 'JO to 25 Plural of, 25, 2t) Possessive, 42 Demonstrative, .... 44 Numeral, . . . . 31, 233 Cardinal, ... 31, 233 Ordinal, .... .31, 34, 233 General Rule on, Concord of the, . Used adverbially, Place ot the, . . Government of the, Of Number, its synt, Of Dimension, G{j 220 to 224 . . 221 224 to 230 230 to 233 . . 233 . . 234 In the Comparative Degree, 235 In the Superlative Degree, 235 A dverb / its place, . . 1 75, 299 How formed from an adj. . 179 Of Quantity, . . . 176,266 A ieul ; its plural, . . . . \9 All, 17,26,56 Alter; s' en aller, . . 117,118 Alphabet {French), .... 7 A Ithough, quoiquo, .... 309 Always, toujours, . . . .178 Antecedent; its vaQaxi'mfi;, . . 47 Any; how expressed in French, \Q Apostrophe, 9 A ppartenir, 800 Tenir, . .133 Ai'ov.nd^ 305 Article, . . . 13,14,15,16 Contraction of, .... 14 Partitive, . . . 16, 62, 198 When used, . . 192 to 202 When not used, 197, 202 to 210 When invariable, .... 236 Aucun, aucune, none, ... 55 A utrui, others, 52 A vant, devant, 305 Avant de^ nvant que de, . .310 /I voir, to have; itaconjugation, 00 Ijarcfoot, 221 Beaiicoup; Remark on, . . 300 Before; how expressed, 305,310 JJenir, to bless, Remark on, 122 nest, 30 Better 30 and belter, . . . .177 JJien, Remarks on, . • 207, 300 Jjor7i {to be), naltro, . . .163 Both, 53, 264 Ca, for cela, 256 Can (to bo able to), pouvoir, 130 Case* ; if any in French, . . 11 Ce, demonst. pron., 45, 254, 255 Cedilla, 10 Cent ; when it takes an «, . . 34 Chacun, every one, . . 52, 262 Chaque, every, each, ... 65 Ciel ; its plural, 19 Collective nouns, . 17, 33, 34, 265 Comparative degree, . 27, 2i\ 235 Comparison, degrees of, . . 26 Compound nouns, . 215 to 220 Compound tenses ; how formed, 59 Concord between the tenses, 288 Conditional mood, .... 284 Conjugations ; how distinguish- ed, 69 First in er, 69 Second in ir, 73 Third in oir, 77 Fourth in re, 80 Negatively, 83, 84 Interrogatively, . . . 87, f'S Interrogatively & negatively, 90 Conjugation — Of Passive verbs, .... 92 Of Pronom, or Reflect, verbs, 96 Of the same, negatively, 99 ; interrogatively, 101 ; in- terrogatively and nega- tively, 102 Oi Impersonal OT Urdpers. 103 INDEX. 317 i'nw • 1 310 'a lion , 00 • • 221 • • 300 305 ,310 on, 122 • • 30 t • 30 • • 177 207, 300 • • 163 53. 264 • • 256 'oir, 13G • • 11 , 254, 255 • • 10 > • • 34 52, 262 • • 55 • • 19 J, 34, 265 ', 28, 235 • • 26 15 to 220 ■med, 59 OS, 288 • • 284 iiish- • • 59 ff • 69 • • 73 • • 77 • • 80 . 83 ,84 . 87, 08 vely, 90 • 92 rbs, 96 )9; in- ?a- . J 102 u 1 [03 V&f Conjugation — Of verbs in yer, eer, cer^ uei\ tier, eter^ yer, ier, 108 to 117 Conjunct' ona ; the principul, 188 Somo govern tho indie. . . 308 Some tho snbj. or inf. 30J), 310 Connaitre, to know, . . .151 Its difterenco from savoir, 141 Craindre, and verbs in iiindve and oindre, 153 Cm; with and without accent, 9 X/ ; takes the sound of t, . 90 Vans, en ; how used, . . . 304 Date, how to, 34 De, . 14, 15, 182, 186, 218, 303 Verbs which roquh'o de, . 274 Deceive ( More, 800 (no), 83 Much, very much, too much, . 170 Mur; with and without accent, 8 *-^ antes (proper) soo Proper, Near 30G Negatives, 83, 301 Neither, 264 the one nor the other, 264 Neuter Verbs, 94 Remark on, . 295 Never, . . • 83 No, not, 83, 301 No more, 83 Nohody, 62, 63 Nothing 83 Nor, ........ 264 Noun, see Substantive. Nnl, nulle, none, .... 65 Numbers, 11 Cardinal, . . . 31,34, ^^t Ordinal, . . . 81,3-^,204 Rules on, . . 34, 35, 204, 233 ijbtain ( Se INDEX. 319 . . 42 43, 210 . . 217 . . 278 . . LiU 218, 3();j . . 273 306, 307 ust, 270 . . 27U . . 30(] . . 281 . 47 . 300 . r>7 57, r>8 . C7 . 304 , 104 . J60 )I, 102 JO, 203 67, CO , 180 li4snlu; nUout, 168 ne), onvoyor, . . . back, ronvoyor, . . Serve (to), to holp to, sorvir, Set out, {to), j)artir, . . . Several, plusiours, . . . She who, he who, .... Si, if, Sinq ito), chanter, . . . Soi, 41,248 Some ; how expressed, . .16, 103 Something, 211 Sometimes, 178 Sovereigns, 35, 204 Speak (to), parlor, .... 69 Steam-engine ; how translated, .186 Subjunctive mood ; when used, 285 Substantive; plural of, . 17 to 20 Gondorof, 11,210 • .Number in, . . . 213,214 Plural of compound, . . 215 Superlative degree^ .... 28 Sur; with and without accent, 8 Syntax, 192 J. ake (to), prendre, . . . 1 07 Tel, telle, such, 54 Tell (to), diro, 156 Tenses; fonnation of, 59, 67, 68 Syntax of, ... 279 to 291 Their, its, 42, 252 Thousand, mille, 34 To ; how translated, . 14,272 When expressed by pour, 278 Tout, ...... 17, 2G, 56 Trima, or dierSse, .... 10 Tris ; its derivation, ... 29 Tu ; with and without accent, 9 U nipenonal verbt, . 103 270 273 274 y enir, to como, . . . .134 Verb; how many kinds of vtrbs, 59 Conju^(atcd ne^^tlvoly, . 83, 81 Interrogatively, . . .87, 88 Interrogatively and nt'L'aliv. 90 Active verbs, ')9 Passive, 92,271 Neuter, 94 Pronominal, reflective, re- ciprocal, 95 Impersonal or Unipersonal, 103 Verbs ending in ger, eer,cer^ uer, eler, eter,ytr, ier, 108 to 117 Observations on, .... 67 Agreement of the, . . . 263 Place of the subject of the, 268 Government of the, . . . Verbs which require d, . : Verbs which re(iuire de. Verbs which require no pre- position, 277 Verg, 20, :;0() Vingt ; when it takes an s, . 34 Vivre ; remarks on, . . . .173 Vowels 7, 9 rr ; when used, .... 7 Wait, wait/or, attendro, . . 81 Who, which, 2.56 Whom, which, . . . 256, 260 (of), ...... 259 Whose, of whom, of which, . 259 Words alike in French and English, 30 Worse, 30 Worst, .•;() Write (to), dcrirc, . . . .157 7, 50, 17S FINIS. PRINTED BY WILLIAM DLACKWOOD AND SONS, EDINUUUOH. EEMAKQUES SUR LA PRONONCIATION DE QUELQUES MOTS. Alger. Girard, Demandre, L^vizac, et Leniare disent que le r du mot Alger doit se faire entendre. Ces autorite's sont imposantes; cependant ce mot, devenu aiijourd'hui im nom tout fran5ais, a perdu la trace de son origine e'trangere, et ne Sonne plus autrement que le mot herger ; c'est la prononcia- tion partout adopte'e. Dans Baptiste, bapteme, baph'ser, baptismal, baptistaire, le p ne se prononce point. Caen (ville de Normandie). On prononce Kan. On prononce k la fran9aise: architecte, patnarche, Michel, Achille, Machiavel, Ijzechias, Ezechiel, Colchide ; et, avec le son du h, Michel- Ange, Zacharie, Jericho. Almanadif chaos, se pro- noncent Almana, had. D final Sonne dans David, Joad, Sud; mais il ne se prononce pas dans les mots nid, Madrid. Davoust (mar^chal). On prononce Davou. DouBS (riviere et departement). On prononce Dou. G final a le son du Z;, dans bourg. Mais il est muet dans fau- bourg, Strasbourg, Edimbourg, Hambourg, Petersbourg, Gkranium, substantif maseulin. Prononcez geraniome. GuizoT. On prononce Ghizd. Dans de Guise, Vu se fait en- tendre. Joua (yoke). On fait sentir un pen la lettre finale, meme devant une consonne. La Fayette, La Haye. On prononce Lafa-iett, La H^. Metz, Municli, Zurich. On prononce Miss, Munih, ZuHh. N 'final Sonne dans Eden, hymen, le Tarn. Beam se prononce Bear. S se fait entendre dans ailas, mceurs, Calvados, Crisus, Jonas, MenSlas, Pallas, Rubens, Themis, Tunis. Mais la lettre s est nuiette dans avis, irepas, Jesus, Jesus-Christ, Thomas, Judas. Dans le cas de la liaison, s final prend le son du z, avi-z-au lecteur. Sa6ne, subst. fem. (riviere). On prononce >S'dne. Sieyes (I'abb^). On prononce Si-ess. SoLENNEL, ELLE, adjcctif On prononce toujours Solanel, et on fait Ya bref ; il en est de meme dans les d^riv^s. SouLT (mar^chal). On prononce Soidte. SouRCiL {eye-brow). Prononcez sourci. Sully. ^ Ce mot ne doit pa? prendre le son mouille, malgrd /\ I'opinion coutraire de quelques Grammairiens. Q ^ / f I:: * il a * # 1\ i U V .